Contacto PDF
Contacto PDF
Contacto PDF
POWER DISTRIBUTION
PRODUCTS
Circuit breaker for protection against Circuit breaker for protection against Circuit breaker for protection of motor and
overload and short circuit overload, short circuit, and electrification against short circuit
Detailed Installation Characteristics Detailed Installation Characteristics Detailed
Specifications and Connection and Dimensions Specifications and Connection and Dimensions Specifications
P.672 P.716 P.760 P.682 P.716 P.800 P.688
Circuit breaker compliant with UL 489 Circuit breaker with measuring and display Circuit breaker for protection against
America function overload and short circuit of branch circuit
Detailed Installation Characteristics Detailed Installation Characteristics Detailed Characteristics
Specifications and Connection and Dimensions Specifications and Connection and Dimensions Specifications and Dimensions
P.689 P.716 P.818 P.693 P.716 P.832 P.702 P.838
665
Circuit breaker for protection against earth Mechanical switch for equipment Circuit breaker for protection against
leakage and electrification of branch circuit overload of equipment
Detailed Characteristics Detailed Characteristics Detailed Installation Characteristics
Specifications and Dimensions Specifications and Dimensions Specifications and Connection and Dimensions
P.704 P.841 P.703 P.843 P.706 P.709 P.844
Main circuit breaker to meet demands more Our lineup also includes an earth leakage
advanced and multi-functional facilities relay
Detailed Installation Detailed
Specifications and Connection Specifications
P.710 P.710 P.712
666
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-voltage Circuit Breakers
Product Line-up
Frame (A)
20 30 32 40 50 60 63 70 100 125 160 225 250
Classification
NF-C
NF30-CS NF63-CV NF125-CV NF250-CV
Economy class
NF125-SV NF250-SV
NF-S
NF32-SV NF63-SV NF125-SGV NF160-SGV NF250-SGV
Standard class
NF125-SEV NF250-SEV
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers NF125-HV NF250-HV
NF-H/L NF125-LGV NF160-LGV NF250-LGV
NF63-HV
High-performance class NF125-HEV NF160-HGV NF250-HEV
NF125-HGV NF250-HGV
NF-R/U NF125-RGV NF250-RGV
Ultra current-limiting class NF125-UV NF250-UV
NV-C
NV63-CV NV125-CV NV250-CV
Economy class
Earth Leakage NV-S NV125-SV NV250-SV
NV32-SV NV63-SV
Circuit Breakers Standard class NV125-SEV NV250-SEV
NV-H/R NV125-HV NV250-HV
NV63-HV
High-performance class NV125-HEV NV250-HEV
NF100-CVFU NF225-CWU
UL 489 Listed MCCB NF50-SVFU NF125-SVU NF250-SVU
UL 489 Listed NF125-HVU NF250-HVU
Circuit Breakers
NV100-CVFU
NV250-SVU
UL 489 Listed ELCB NV50-SVFU NV125-SVU
NV250-HVU
NV125-HVU
BH-D6 BH
Miniature Circuit Breakers BH-DN
BH-D10 BH-P
Residual Current Circuit Breaker BV-D
Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload
BV-DN
Protection
Isolating Switch KB-D
CP30-BA
Circuit Protectors
CP-S
Air Circuit
AE-SW
Breakers
Related Components Earth Leakage Relays NV-ZBA, NV-ZSA, NV-ZHA, NV-ZLA
Note: *1 When placing an order, specify “MB.”
WS-V Series (New models)
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 667
NF400-REW NF800-REW
NF630-REW
NF400-UEW NF800-UEW
NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV400-SW NV630-SW
NV800-SEW
NV400-SEW NV630-SEW
NV400-HEW
NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
NV400-REW
NF400-SWU NF630-SWU
NF400-HWU NF630-HWU
AE2000-SW AE4000-SWA
AE630-SW AE1000-SW AE1250-SW AE1600-SW AE2500-SW AE3200-SW AE5000-SW AE6300-SW
AE2000-SWA AE4000-SW
668
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-voltage Circuit Breakers
Eco-friendly products
Environment Adapt to RoHS directive and the use of restricted substance is within the line
limits stipulated by the said directive
Breaking capacity of 5 models is 20% to 50% higher than the W & WS Series
Improvement of breaking capacity on 250AF-C/S/H models (Fixed) & 125.250AF-R models (Thermal/Adjustable).
250-RG 20 %
UP
250-H 50 %
Model Name
UP
250-S 20 %
UP WS-V Series
WS Series
38.8%
250-C UP
20 %
125-RG UP
The new electronic circuit breakers (with display) and MDU breakers can display various
measurement items
This will enable energy management through “visualization”, which leads to energy saving.
The display is on the circuit breaker body and shows circuit information.
Detailed setting can be done on the display.
The display turns red during alarms.
Display Current
Alarm
in each phase
LAN(Ethernet)
EcoWebServer
(Conventional model : 105 × 165 × 86mm) (New model : 105 × 165 × 68mm)
250AF circuit breakers’ fixed types (NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV), thermal adjustable types
(NF250-SGV, NF250-HGV, NF250-RGV), and electronic types (NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV) are the same size,
leading to the reduction and standardization of panel design.
Applicable accessories
32AF and 63AF circuit breakers can now be used in both AC and DC circuits without specifying when ordering. This will lead to prevention
of ordering mistakes.
The earth leakage circuit breakers can now be equipped with a voltage shunt trip device (SHT).
Barcode Reader
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 671
Eco-friendly products
Our products are compliament with the RoHS directive and the use of restricted substances is within the line limits stipulated by the said
directive.
Sales Office:62
branch office :18
representative office :43
(available in 56 countries)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DALIAN Production Base :3
INDUSTRY PRODUCTS CO.,LTD
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
CORPORATION
FUKUYAMA WORKS
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
(XIAMEN) Co., LTD
672
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Detailed Specifications
dNF-C (Economy class)
Frame (A) 30 50 60 63 100 125
Model NF30-CS NF63-CV NF125-CV
Image
Current (*1) AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible
Specifications
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 50 75 60 90 60 90
dimensions (mm)
and
c
b 96 130 130 130 130 130
Overall
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.9 0.6 0.9
Characteristics
Dimensions
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
connections
Rear (B) 716 dRound stud (assembled in) dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) − d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6)
accessories
d(*6)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) − d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 739 − − − − − −
Closed (S) d d d d d d
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 753 − d d d d d
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
Waterproof (W) − − − − − −
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
d d d d d
Electrical operation device (NFM) 756 − − − − − d − d
External accessories
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC.
Breakers
*7 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products.
Not available for use with connection as shown on the right.
*8 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
*9 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary.
(Standard type is thus SLT equipped).
*10 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 673
Specifications
AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC
Specifications
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Detailed
Detailed
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
8,000 8,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
4,000 4,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
A A A A A B
3 3 3 3 3 3
Connection
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A
Installation
105 105 140 140 140 210
and
165 165 257 257 257 275
68 68 103 103 103 103
92 92 134 134 134 155
1.3 1.5 1.3 1.5 4.4 5.0 5.2 6.0 5.2 6.0 10.9
Characteristics
Dimensions
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
d d − − − −
and
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d
d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
Accessories
d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
d(*6) d(*6) d d d d
d d d d d d
− − − − − d(*9)
d d − − − −
d d d d d d
Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed.
Breakers
2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block.
3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.
Other
674
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Image
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
Detailed
Detailed
a
c
b 130 130 130 130 130
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.45 0.65 0.45 0.65 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.55 0.75 1.0
Connection
Installation
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
and
connections
accessories
725
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
and
Waterproof (W) − d − d − d − − d − − d −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 756 − − − − −
External accessories
HL 750 d d d d d
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
device
HL-S d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d
718
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 d d d − d − d −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) − − −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 762 762
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC.
*2 In case of a current rating of 100A, it does not specify NK rating. Line Line
*3 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products.
If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively.
(In case of NF250-SV, three and four poles can be used for up to 500 and 600VDC)
*4 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame
Display Unit
Measuring
(excluding UVT).
Breakers
Load Load
*5 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. 3-pole 4-pole
Not available for use with connection as shown on the right.
*6 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
*7 Not isolation compatible. excluding 400 to 800A frame.
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 675
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 (100) 125 150 160
125 16-32 32-63 63-125 125-160 250
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 175 200 225 (*2)
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
690 690 690 690 690 690 690
8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8
18/18 18/18 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30
25/25 25/25 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
40/40 (*3) 40/40 (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3) − 20/20 (300V) (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3)
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1)
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
25,000 25,000 50,000 25,000 40,000 25,000 25,000
10,000 10,000 30,000 10,000 15,000 10,000 10,000
A A A A A A A
Specifications
Specifications
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Detailed
Detailed
N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A
60 90 120 60 90 120 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140
130 130 165 165 165 165 165
68 68 68 68 68 68 68
90 90 92 92 92 92 92
0.7 1.0 1.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.7 2.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0
Connection
Installation
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
and
d d d d d d d d d d
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d d d d d d d
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
Characteristics
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
Dimensions
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
and
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
d d d d d d d d d d d d
− − − d − − −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d −
Accessories
− d − − d − d − d − d − d − d −
− d − d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d d d
d − d − d d − d d − d −
d d d d d d d
Image
Rated current In (A) 125-160 140-200 250 300 Adjustable 200 225
80-160 125-250 500 600 630
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 175-250 350 400 250 300 350 400
Number of poles 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 8/8 8/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A A N/A A N/A N/A
ca
a a 105 140 105 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 140 185
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 165 257 257 257 257
Overall
Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.7 2.2 4.6 5.2 6.8 6.0 7.6 5.4 6.2 8.0 5.4 6.2 8.0
and
Front connection (F) Page d dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
connections
accessories
LC d d − − − −
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Handle lock
HL 750 d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d d d d
718
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) (LR, ABS, GL) − (LR, ABS, GL) − q − q − q − q −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 772 774 776 778 782
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC.
*2 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Line Line
If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively.
*3 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame
(excluding UVT).
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
*4 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products.
Not available for use with connection as shown on the right. Load
Load
*5 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. 3-pole 4-pole
(Standard type is thus SLT equipped) AS for flush plate type, an outline differs from a standard.
*6 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
*7 Not isolation compatible. excluding 400 to 800A frame.
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 677
Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 400 450 Adjustable 500 600 700 Adjustable 600 700 800 Adjustable 800 1000 1200
(700) 800 1000 1250 1600
400 500 600 630 500 600 700 800 800 900 1000 1000 1200 1250 1400 1500 1600
3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
10/10 10/10 − 25/13 25/13 − 25/13 −
30/30 30/30 − 65/33 65/33 − 65/33 −
42/42 42/42 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
50/50 50/50 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
50/50 50/50 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
50/50 50/50 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
85/85 85/85 − 125/63 125/63 − 125/63 −
85/85 85/85 − 125/63 125/63 − 125/63 −
− − 40/40 − − 40/20 − 40/20
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC AC DC AC AC DC AC DC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
6,000 4,000 4,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000
1,000 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
B B A B B A B B
Specifications
Specifications
7.6 9.6 − 20 at 0.1 20 at 0.1 − 20 at 0.1 −
Detailed
Detailed
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A A N/A A A N/A A A
140 185 210 280 210 210 280 210 280 210 210 280 210
257 275 275 406 406 406 406 406
103 103 103 140 140 140 140 140
155 155 155 190 190 190 190 190
Connection
Installation
6.5 8.3 10.9 14.2 9.0 23.5 30.7 23.5 30.7 22.0 34.5 41.2 32.0
and
dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − − − − − − − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d − d − d − −
Characteristics
d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d
Dimensions
d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d
and
d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d d d d
d (*5) d (*5) − d (*5) d (*5) − d (*5) −
− − − − − − − −
Accessories
d − d − d − − − − − − −
d − d − d − − − − − − −
d (*6) d (*6) d(*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
d d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d − − − − −
Image
Rated current In (A) 10 15 16 20 25 15 16 20 30 32 40 16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 40-50
60 (63) 125
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 30 32 40 50 50 60 63 75 80 100 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 50-63 63-80 80-100 100-125
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/8 10/8 8/8 10/8 –
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
Utilization category A A A A A A A A
Detailed
Detailed
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 50 75 100 50 75 100 50 75 100 90 120 90 120 105 140 105 140 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130 165 165 165
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
Connection
ca 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92
Installation
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.5 1.8
and
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d d dScrew terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
connections
Alarm switch (AL) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3)
Dimensions
d d d d d d d
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
725
and
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 d d d d d d d d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 739 − − − − − − − −
Closed (S) d − d − d − d − d − d − − −
Accessories
LC d d d d d d d d
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Handle lock
HL 750 d d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d d d −
718
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 d − d − d − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) q − q − q − q − q − (LR, ABS, GL) − (LR, ABS, GL) − (LR, ABS, GL)
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 762 764 772 772 772
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC.
*2 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Line Line
If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 500 and 600VDC, respectively.
*3 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame
(excluding UVT).
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Specifications
Specifications
A A A A A A A A
Detailed
Detailed
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
Connection
92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92
Installation
1.7 2.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.5 1.8
and
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal
d d d d d d d d d d d
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d d d d d d
Characteristics
d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3)
Dimensions
d d d d d d d
d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
and
d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
d d d d d d d d d d d
d − − − − − − −
− d − − − − d − − −
Accessories
d − d − d − d − d − d − d − −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d − −
d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d d
d − d d d − d − d d d
Image
Rated current In (A) Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 400 450 Adjustable 400 450
80-160 125-250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 400 500 600 630 400 500 600 630 500 600 700 800 500 600 700 800
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 10/8 35/18 − 35/18 − 15/15 −
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
Rated short time with stand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s − 5 5 7.6 7.6 9.6 9.6
Detailed
Detailed
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A A A
ca
a a 105 140 140 185 140 140 185 140 210 280 210
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 257 257 257 257 275 275
Overall
Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.7 2.2 6.0 7.6 6.0 6.5 8.3 6.0 10.9 14.2 10.9
and
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
connections
Alarm switch (AL) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1)
Dimensions
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1)
725
and
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*1) d d d d d d d d d d
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 739 d d (*2) d (*2) d (*2) d (*2) d (*2) d (*2)
Closed (S) − − − − − − −
Accessories
d
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Handle lock
HL 750 d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d d
718
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 − − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) q (LR, ABS, GL) − q − q q − q q − q
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 774 778 778 784 784 786 786
Notes: *1 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame
(excluding UVT). Line Line
*2 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary.
(Standard type is thus SLT equipped).
*3 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Specifications
Specifications
− − 5 9.6
Detailed
Detailed
3 3 3 3
N/A N/A A A
90 120 105 140 140 280 210 280
191 240 297 322 322
68 68 200 200
90 92 252 252
Connection
Installation
1.35 1.5 1.9 2.5 2.7 3.7 16.2 25.4 27.6 33.7
and
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
dBar stud dBar stud − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d − d − d − −
Characteristics
d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1)
Dimensions
d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1)
and
d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1)
d (*1) d d (*1) d d d
d d d d
− − d (*2) d (*2)
− − − −
Accessories
− − − −
− − − −
d d d (*3) d (*3)
d d d d
− − − −
Detailed Specifications
dNV-C (Economy class) Harmonic Surge Ready
Frame (A) 50 60 63 100 125
Model NV63-CV NV125-CV
Image
Earth leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
Specifications
Rated short-circuit
Current AC AC AC AC AC
and
Dimensions
Utilization category A A A A A
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2
and
c
b 130 130 130 130 130
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90
Accessories
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.7 0.75 0.7 0.75 0.7 0.75 1.0 1.0
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Installation and
connections
Cassette-type
Test button module (TBM) 738 d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Closed (S) − − − − −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 753 − − − − −
Waterproof (W) − − − − −
UL 489 Listed Earth
d d d d d
Breakers
718
Plug-in (PM) − − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 d d d − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition − Recognition in process − Recognition in process − Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) − − − − −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Other
125 150 175 200 225 250 250 300 350 400 500 600 (630)
3 3 3 3 3
3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W
Specifications
Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
Specifications
15/12 15/12 25/13 36/18 36/18
Detailed
Detailed
25/19 25/19 36/18 36/18 36/18
25/19 25/19 36/18 36/18 36/18
36/27 36/27 50/25 50/25 50/25
36/27 36/27 50/25 50/25 50/25
36/27 36/27 50/25 − −
Connection
6 6 8 8 8
Installation
AC AC AC AC AC
and
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
8,000 8,000 6,000 6,000 6,000
4,000 4,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
Characteristics
Dimensions
A A A A A
2 2 3 3 3
and
A A A A A
105 105 140 140 140
165 165 257 257 257
68 68 103 103 103
92 92 134 155 155
Accessories
1.7 1.7 6.1 6.9 6.9
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
− − − − −
Earth Leakage
− − − − −
− − − − −
d d d d d
Breakers
− − − − −
− − − − −
TÜV approval TÜV approval Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
− − − − −
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Other
Image
Rated current In (A) (5) 6 10 (15) (5) (10) (15) 16 20 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
(32) (60) 63 125 63-125
Rated ambient temperture 40°C 16 20 25 (30) 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (*3)
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4
3f3W, 3f3W,
3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W,
Phase line (*1) 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 3f4W
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) AC 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440 100-440
30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500
Time-delay High-speed
Utilization category A A A A A A A A
and
c
Characteristics
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
and
ca 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4 1.9 2.5
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d
Installation and
connections
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − −
Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
Cassette-type
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) 725 d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
d d d
External accessories
HL 750 d d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d
718
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 d d d d d − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
*2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *7 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
*3 In case of time delay type, rated current is produced with 20 amp. or more. *8 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame.
*4 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit *9 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.
breaker operates between 0.15 and 0.45 seconds, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds
and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 685
Specifications
Specifications
85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 − − 85/85 −
Detailed
Detailed
6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
25,000 25,000 25,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
10,000 10,000 10,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
Connection
Installation
A A A A B A A B A
and
− − − − 5 − − 7.6 9.6
2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
A A A A A A A A A
105 105 105 140 140 185 140 140 140 185 210
Characteristics
165 165 165 257 257 257 257 257 275
Dimensions
68 68 68 103 103 103 103 103 103
and
92 92 92 155 155 155 155 155 155
1.9 1.9 1.9 6.4 6.2 8.2 6.9 6.9 7.1 8.9 15.3
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − − − − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Accessories
− − − − − − − − −
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d d d d d
Earth Leakage
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
− − − − − − − − −
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
804 806 808 810 812 814 816
Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when 4. Rated operational voltage Applicable circuit voltage Available voltage range
an order is placed. 100-440V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 85-484V
2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire 200-440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 160-484V
Other
terminal block.
3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity
specified in the shaded cells.
686
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Image
Rated current In (A) (15) 16 20 (30) (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 125 150 175
(60) 63 125 63-125 250 125-250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (*3) 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3 3
3f3W, 3f3W,
3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W,
Phase line (*1) 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 3f4W 3f3W, 1f2W
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) AC 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500
Time-delay High-speed
at I∆n 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Max. operating time (s)
at 5I∆n 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) − − − (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable)
type
Max. operating time (s) (*4) − − − (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable)
Internal non-operating (s) (or more) − − − (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65
breaking capacities (kA)
Rated short-circuit
415V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
IEC 60947-2 400V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 75/75 75/75 75/75 75/75
EN 60947-2 AC
(Icu/Ics) 230V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 100/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100
200V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 100/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100
Specifications
Specifications
100V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 − 100/75 − 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100
Detailed
Detailed
Utilization category A A A A A A A A A
and
c
Characteristics
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
and
ca 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.75 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4 1.9 2.5 1.8 1.8 1.9
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d
Installation and
connections
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − − −
Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Cassette-type
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) 725 d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
d d d d d d
External accessories
HL 750 d d d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d
718
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 d d d − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
*2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *7 Not isolation compatible.
*3 In case of time delay type, rated current is produced with 20 amp. or more. *8 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.
*4 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit
breaker operates between 0.15 and 0.45 seconds, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds
and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 687
Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400 Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400 Adjustable 300 350 400 500 600 630 Adjustable 400 450 500 600 700 800
3 4 3 3 3
3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f4W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W
Specifications
Specifications
100/100 150/75 100/100 100/100
Detailed
Detailed
8 8 8 8
AC AC AC AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
− − − −
6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
1,000 1,000 1,000 500
Connection
Installation
B B B B
and
5 5 7.6 9.6
3 3 3 3
A A A A
140 185 140 140 210
Characteristics
257 257 257 275
Dimensions
103 103 103 103
and
155 155 155 155
6.6 8.2 6.6 7.1 15.3
dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Accessories
− − − −
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d d d d
Earth Leakage
d d d d
d d d d
− − − −
Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
810 810 814 816
Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when 6. Rated operational voltage Applicable circuit voltage Available voltage range
an order is placed. 100-440V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 85-484V
2. The setting is set to 500mA and delivered when not specifying 200-440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 175-484V
Other
Detailed Specifications
dNF-MB Please specify MB
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500 500 500 500 500 500
440V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 25/25 36/36
breaking capacities (kA)
Rated short-circuit
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 6,000 6,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 10,000
Specifications
Utilization category A A A A A A
Detailed
Detailed
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 75 75 75 75 90 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130 165
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68
Connection
Installation
ca 90 90 90 90 90 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.7 1.0 1.6
and
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
accessories connections
Dimensions
725
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 d d d d d d
Closed (S) d d d d d d
Accessories
Handle lock
HL 750
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 744 d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d
718
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 d d d d − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration TÜV approval
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) q q q q q q
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 762 762 764 768
Notes: *1 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for Remarks: 1. The motor circuit breakers do not have an applicable rated motor
installation on side (excluding UVT). capacity. Select a motor circuit breaker based on the total load
*2 Not isolation compatible. current of the motor.
*3 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. 2. Products with rating parenthesized are produced when an order is
placed.
3. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead wire terminal
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
block.
4. The circuit breaker has the rated short circuit breaking capacity
specified in the shaded cells.
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 689
Image
600Y/347V − − − − 18 18
UL 489 480V − − 30 30 50 50
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − − − −
240V 14 14 50 50 00
1 100
120V − − − − − −
DC 60V − − − − − −
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 440 600 690 690 690 690
690V − − 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5
500V − 7.5/4 18/9 18/9 25/13 25/13
Specifications
440V 7.5/4 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
Specifications
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
Detailed
Detailed
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 400V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
380V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
230V 15/8 15/8 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50
250V − − − − − −
DC
60V − − − − − −
Connection
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 8 8 8 8 8
Installation
Current (*1) AC AC AC AC AC AC
and
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Utilization category A A A A A A
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3
Characteristics
Dimensions
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 36 54 50 75 90 90 90 90
dimensions (mm)
and
b 120 150 160 160 160 160
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page
Accessories
d d d d d d
Cassette-type Installation and
Front (F)
(*2) connections
725
in specifications. Please consult us for details. capacity specified in the shaded cells.
Measuring
Breakers
*3 The standard structure conforms to IP20 (finger protection). 3. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase
*4 The rated ambient temperature for NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU, circuits.
NF125-SVU and NF125-HVU is specified at 40°C also by IEC. Load
3-pole 4-pole
*5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers.
*6 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal
(SL/AMP-N) are available. In this case, a busbar terminal is not
provided on the load side.
*7 These cassette type circuit breakers can be installed by the
Other
US UL Standard 489
UL File No.E167691 Body
UL File No.E108284 Accessories
Image
Rated current In (A) (*5) 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
250 250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (IEC 30°C) 200 225 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3
Rated AC (V) 240 480 480 600Y/347 600Y/347
voltage DC (V) − − − − −
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
600Y/347V − − − 18 18
UL 489 480V − 35 35 50 50
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − − −
240V 35 65 65 100 100
120V − − − − −
DC 60V − − − − −
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690 690 690
690V − 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5
500V 10/5 25/13 25/13 36/18 36/18
440V 15/8 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 18/9 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 400V 18/9 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
380V 18/9 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
230V 35/18 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
250V (*3) 10/5 − − − −
Specifications
DC
Specifications
60V − − − − −
Detailed
Detailed
ca
a a 105 105 105 105 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 185 185 185 185
Overall
Front (F)
External accessories (*2) accessories (*2) connections
and
725
Shunt trip (SHT) d d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 d d d d d
Mechanical interlock (MI) 752 d(*6) − − − −
Handle lock (HL) d d d d d
750
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
device (HL-S) d d d d d
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
External (F) d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d
Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 744 d d d d d
cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 745 − (*4) − (*4) − (*4) − (*4) − (*4)
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 759 − − − − −
CE marking TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 824 826 826
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced Line Line
products that are compatible with both AC and DC. when an order is placed.
*2 These accessories differ from the general products in specifications. 2. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking
Please consult us for details. capacity specified in the shaded cells.
*3 When using a 3-pole circuit breaker, use two poles. When wired as 3. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase
shown right, NF225-CWU can be used at up to 400 V DC. circuits.
*4 Since NF225-CWU comes with a protective cover, it has an IP20 Load
3-pole 4-pole
(finger protection) structure as standard. Other models have IP20
(finger protection) structures as standard.
Display Unit
Breakers
Image
600Y/347V 20 25 20 25
UL 489 480V 35 65 35 65
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − −
240V 65 100 85 100
120V − − − −
DC 60V − − − −
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690
690V 10/10(5/5)(*4) 15/10 10/10 15/10
500V 30/30(25/25)(*4) 42/42 30/30 42/42
440V 42/42(36/36)(*4) 65/65 42/42 65/65
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 45/45(36/36)(*4) 70/70 45/45 70/70
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 400V 45/45(36/36)(*4) 70/70 45/45 70/70
380V 50/50(42/42)(*4) 70/70 50/50 70/70
230V 85/85(65/65)(*4) 100/100 85/85 100/100
250V − − − −
Specifications
DC
Specifications
60V − − − −
Detailed
Detailed
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8
Current AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible
Utilization category A A A A
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3
Connection
Installation
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A
and
ca
a 140 140 210 210
dimensions (mm)
a c
b 257 257 275 275
Overall
Characteristics
Mass of front-face type (kg) 5.7 5.7 9.6 9.6
Dimensions
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page − − − −
Installation and
Front (F)
accessories connections
and
Solderless terminal (SL) d − d(*7) −
Bar (BAR) 716 d(*5) d(*5) d(*5) d(*5)
Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) d(*5) − d(*5) −
Alarm switch (AL)
External accessories Cassette-type
Accessories
725
Shunt trip (SHT) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d d d d
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 d d d d
Mechanical interlock (MI) 752 d(*1)(*2) d(*1)(*2) d(*1)(*2) d(*1)(*2)
Handle lock (HL) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
750
US UL Standard 489
UL File No.E167691 Body
UL File No.E108284 Accessories
Other
dUL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (Harmonic Surge Ready)
Frame (A) 50 100 125 250
Model NV50-SVFU NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU NV125-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU
Image
Rated current In (A) (5) (10) 15 20 60 (70) 75 15 20 30 (40) 15 20 30 (40) 125 150 175 125 150 175
125 125 250 250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C 30 40 50 (80) (90) 100 50 60 75 100 50 60 75 100 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Phase line (*1) 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W
UL 489 120-240 120-240 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480
Rated operational
voltage AC V IEC 60947-2
100-240 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
EN 60947-2
30 50 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500
High-speed
Pickup current, UL 1053 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln
Max. operating time (s) at 5ln (*4) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Earth leakage indication system Display window Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
480V − − 30 30 50 50 35 35 50 50
breaking capacities (kA)
UL 489
AC 240V 14 14 50 50 100 100 65 65 100 100
Rated short-circuit
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Detailed
Detailed
Reverse connection (below 240VAC) − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Utilization category A A A A A A A A A A
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A A A A A A
ca
a a 36 54 75 90 90 90 90 105 105 105 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 120 150 160 160 160 160 185 185 185 185
Overall
Connection
Installation
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
and
ca 90 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page d d d d d d d d d d
Cassette-type Installation and
Front (F)
(*2) connections
Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) − d(*5, *6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
Alarm switch (AL) −
and
d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
Auxiliary switch (AX) − d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
725
External accessories (*2) accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) − d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) − d d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 737 − d d d d d d d d d d
Accessories
Test button module (TBM) 738 d(*9) − d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9)
Mechanical interlock (MI) 752 − − − − − − − − − −
Handle lock (HL) d d d d d d d d d d
750
device (HL-S) d d d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d d d
740
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d d d
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
(IEC) 380/400/415/440V
Measuring
They can be installed with their side faces in close contact with circuit
Breakers
US UL Standard 489
UL File No.E167691 Body
UL File No.E108284 Accessories
Other
Image
Rated current In (A) Adjustable 125-250A Adjustable 200 225 250 Adjustable 300 350 400 Adjustable 400 450 500 500
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (12.5A Step) 300 350 400 500 600 630 600 700 800
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W,
Phase line 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690
690V 8/8 10/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 15/15 10/10 15/15
breaking capacities (kA)
Specifications
Specifications
100V − − − − − − − −
Detailed
Detailed
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8
Current AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection (below 240VAC) − − − −
Number of Without current 25,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
operating cycles With current 10,000 1,000 1,000 500
Connection
Installation
Utilization category A B B B
and
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A
ca
a a 105 140 105 140 140 185 140 185 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 257 275 275
Overall
Characteristics
b c 68 103 103 103
Dimensions
ca 92 155 155 155
and
Mass of front-face type (Breaker mounting) (kg) 1.8 2.3 1.8 2.3 6.2 8 6.2 8 10.7 13.8 10.7 13.8 11.1 14.4 11.1 14.4
MDU installation Breaker mounting, Panel mounting (*1) Breaker mounting, Panel mounting (*2)
Front (F) Page
Installation and
d d d d d d d
connections
Accessories
Alarm switch (AL) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4)
Cassette-type
accessories
d(*9) d(*9)
LC d − − −
Handle lock
HL 750 d d d d
device
HL-S Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
External (F) Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
740
operating handle (V) Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
TC-L d(*8) d d(*8) d Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
Terminal TC-S d(*8) d d(*8) d −
744
cover TTC d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
BTC d(*8) d d(*8) d Available only for the MDU panel mounting type and line side
Rear stud (B-ST) 718 d d(*8) d d − − −
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
MDU measurement specifications See. 36
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 832 834 836 836
Display
Display Unit
Measuring
Measuring
Breakers
Breakers
Notes: *1 In the case of panel mounting, the panel holder plate, the screws and the MDU connection cable (2m) are packed as standard. The MDU connection cable of 0.5m, 3m,
5m and 10m can be specified when ordering. And dimension of the front panel drilling of the breaker is different between breaker mounting and panel mounting.
*2 In the case of panel mounting, the panel holder plate, the nuts and the MDU connection cable (2m) are packed as standard. The MDU connection cable of 0.5m, 3m, 5m
Unit
5VA) is needed. The Output function for alarm output of PAL can set “Self-holding” or “Auto-reset”. Default setup is “Auto-reset”.
*6 For 250AF of electrical operation device, AL is used for the trip indication as standard. The breaker with alarm output contact is not available.
*7 Not isolation compatible.
*8 In the case of breaker mounting, the terminal cover is special type for MDU breaker.
*9 Available only for the MDU panel mounting type.
694
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Measuring Display Unit Breakers
leak current and power factor to realize detailed energy control. They support customers’ energy saving control.
Specifications
Detailed
Detailed
NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU Breaker mounting Panel mounting
and
Note: The size of holes in the face board of the circuit breaker body varies depending
on whether the measuring display unit is installed on the body or the panel.
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers Examples of installation of measuring display unit
Breaker mounting Panel mounting
Applicable models
NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU,
NF630-HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP with MDU, NF800-HEP with MDU
Unit
Display Unit
Measuring
Measuring
Breakers
Breakers
Model list
Model type Type name Remarks
CC-Link communication MDU-AC • The model names do not include .
Electric energy pulse output MDU-AP • When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the body, specify the A frame type in .
No transmission MDU-AN For example, when the circuit breaker NF400-SEP with MDU and the Measuring Display Unit with CC-Link communication
are combined, the model name is MDU-AC400. If 630A frame or 800A frame is used, specify 630 or 800 in .
• When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the panel, specify the cable length (0.5 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m or 10 m) in .
For example, when the Measuring Display Unit with CC-Link communication is installed on the panel with a 3-m cable,
the model name is MDU-AC-PANEL 3M.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 695
Specifications
Specifications
Electric power Present value d − d
Detailed
Detailed
(±1.5%) Demand value (*4) Max. value d d d
Time of occurrence of max. value d d d
Present value d − d
Reactive power Present value d − d
(±2.5%) Demand value (*4) Max. value d d d
Time of occurrence of max. value d d d
Connection
Integrated value
Installation
d d d
Electric energy Amount for last 1 hour d − d
(±2.0%) Value accumulated from previous reset to present
and
(*7) Max. value of amount for 1 hour d d d
Time of occurrence of max. value of amount for 1 hour d d d
Integrated value d d d
Reactive energy Amount for last 1 hour d − d
(±3.0%) Value accumulated from previous reset to present
Max. value of amount for 1 hour
Characteristics
(*7) d d d
Dimensions
Time of occurrence of max. value of amount for 1 hour d d d
Fault current (accuracy: ±15%) d d d Information on fault after previous reset or last fault, and cause of fault
and
Cause of fault (*8)
Cause of fault d d d (continuously monitored)
Present value d − d
Power factor Max. value d d d
(±5.0%)
Time of occurrence of max. value d d −
Frequency (±2.5%) Present value d − d
Accessories
PAL, OVER, The PAL functions are enabled when the MDU breaker with PAL module (option)
Alarm of circuit d − d
IDM_AL, ILA_AL, IUB_AL is used.
breaker (*9)
Neutral line open phase alarm d − − The neutral line open phase alarm is given only on the display.
Tripping state of circuit breaker (AL) − − d On installation of alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
State of ON/OFF state of circuit breaker (AX) − − d On installation of auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
circuit breaker Number of times of tripping of circuit breaker − d d On installation of alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
d d d
Phase and wire type d d d Default: 3-phase 3-wire
Electric energy arbitrary setting d d d
Unit
Specifications
Detailed
Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute) – Max. demand value after previous reset
–
Current value (also reverse power is measured) – – Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable
Electric power Demand value (also reverse power is measured) – – (Same as the present value when 0 min is specified)
(±2.5%) Max. demand value –
Max. demand value after previous reset
Connection
Installation
Electric energy (integrated value) (*5) Value accumulated from previous reset to present
Electric energy Electric energy per time (*5) – – Amount for 1 hour from hour to hour on built-in clock
(±2.5%) Max. value of electric energy per time (*5) –
Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute) – Max. demand value after previous reset
–
Characteristics
Dimensions
Cause of fault Fault current (accuracy: ±15%) (*11) – and cause of fault (continuously monitored)
Power factor
Present value – –
(±5%)
Accessories
Alarm of
PAL, OVER (*6) (*11) – –
circuit breaker LED on
State of Tripping state of circuit breaker (AL) – – – When alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed
circuit breaker ON/OFF state of circuit breaker (AX) – – – When auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
demand time limit, EPAL sensitivity current, PAL pickup current, pulse unit, alarm retention and phase switching settings are stored when they are set, and other values are
Display Unit
Measuring
Measuring
Breakers
Breakers
Each maximum value is the largest value among values obtained from the start of operation (after the previous reset) to the present.
*2 Every time the electric energy is integrated in the pulse unit (the unit can be set to 1 kWh, 10 kWh, 100 kWh, 1000 kWh or 10000 kWh), a pulse is output. Counting can be
performed with a PLC.
*3 The term “each phase” used for load current and harmonic current refers to phase 1, 2, 3 or N. However, the phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers.
The term “between each phase” used for line voltage refers to between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 1, 1 and N, 2 and N or 3 and N. However, voltage between phases 1
and N, 2 and N and 3 and N is applicable only on 4-pole circuit breakers.
The electric energy data is 6-digit data of up to 999999 kWh. The voltage and harmonic current are 3-digit data, and others are 4-digit.
Other
These circuit breakers measure the values every 0.25 sec. Therefore, even when a low order circuit breaker operates, operating current may not be measured.
*4 Each general value indicates the value only of the phase with the maximum value.
*5 The electric energy is not measured in the case of reverse power flow.
*6 When the alarm retention mode has been set to Automatic reset, the PAL alarm LED display on the Measuring Display Unit front panel will be reset automatically. When
the alarm retention mode is Self-retention, the alarm display will be self-retained. In the self-retention mode, the display can be reset through alarm reset operation
(collective reset). OVER will be automatically reset regardless of the mode setting.
*7 The demand time limit cannot be set individually. It is common to the items.
*8 Sum of values of harmonic components in third to 19th orders except fundamental wave component.
*9 The average present value of load current is the average value of current among phases 1, 2 and 3 (the current of the phase N is not included even in the case of a 4-pole circuit
breaker). When the circuit breaker is used on a single-phase 3-wire circuit, the calculated value is displayed. However, ignore it. The average present value of line voltage is the
average value of voltages between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and 3 and 1 (the voltages between phases 1 and N, 2 and N and 3 and N are not included in the case of a 4-pole
circuit breaker).
*10 Setting at the pre-alarm current Ip (which can be set in the range from 70 to 100% of the rated current In in 5% steps) on the circuit breaker body. The Measuring Display
Unit does not have the setting function.
*11 The operating time of PAL is shown below.
PAL Same as pre-alarm operating time Tp on circuit breaker body
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 697
Specifications
Clock No power failure compensation
Specifications
Detailed
Detailed
Clock accuracy Approx. 1 min/month
External dimensions (unit: mm) See Characteristics and Dimensions.
Control power supply Compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz (allowable voltage range: 85% to 110%), 12 VA (*2)
Function for switching phases to be measured to 1-3 and 3-1
Connection
Other functions PAL alarm, self-retention/automatic reset setting function (*3)
Installation
Function for counting number of times of opening and closing of circuit breaker body (*4)
and
Notes: *1 The measurement of fault current of load is enabled when the AL switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed in the Measuring Display Unit
Breaker body.
*2 When the MDU unit control power is turned on, a rush current transitionally flows (maximum rush current: 2A, energizing time: 1ms (240V AC)
*3 The PAL functions are enabled when the MDU breaker with PAL module (option) is used.
Characteristics
Dimensions
*4 The function is enabled when the AX switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed in the Measuring Display Unit Breaker body.
and
dNetwork Specifications for Measuring Display Unit
[Electric energy pulse output] [CC-Link communication]
Accessories
Table 4 Table 5
Item Specification Item Specification
Output Solid state relay (SSR), no voltage a Communication speed 10M/5M/2.5M/625k/156kbps
elements contact (Ca and Cb terminals: no polarity) Communication method Broadcast polling method
station
device station device station device station device station
Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (shielded 3-core twisted pair cables)
Connecting cable
* Cables applicable to Ver. 1.10 supplied by different manufacturers can be used simultaneously.
Note: For more information, visit the website of CC-Link Partner Association (“http://www.cc-Link.org/”).
698
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Measuring Display Unit Breakers
Note: *1 When the MDU unit control power is turned on, a rush current transitionally flows (maximum rush current: 2A, energizing time: 1ms (240V AC)
Table 7 Table 8
and
Dimensions
When a system consists only of Measuring Display Units, up to 42 units can be connected.
Condition 1 for number of connected units
(1×a) + (2×b) + (3×c) + (4×d) q 64
a: Number of units occupying 1 station
b: Number of units occupying 2 stations
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
Number of connected
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Breakers
Breakers
Display
Max. total extension cable length 1200m 900m 400m 160m 100m
When the Measuring Display Unit is installed on the panel, the terminal block on the
panel mounting plate and the terminal block on the Measuring Display Unit are
connected with a CC-Link cable having a one-way length of 15 cm and an entire length
of 30 cm. When connecting the unit in consideration of the following three points.
(1) The one-way length of the CC-Link cable, 15 cm, is included in the distance
between stations.
(2) The entire length of the CC-Link cable, 30 cm, is included in the maximum
transmission distance (total extension distance).
Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (shielded 3-core twisted pair cables)
Connecting cable * Cables applicable to Ver. 1.10 supplied by different manufacturers can be
used simultaneously.
Note: For more information, visit the website of CC-Link Partner Association (HYPERLINK “http://www.cc-Link.org/”).
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 699
Specifications
Specifications
Detailed
Detailed
(1) Connect the breaker as shown in the right figure.
The phase 1 on the load side is charged. Insulate it. Connection on single-phase 2-wire circuit
As measurement data, use the current of the phases 2 and 3 and the voltage
1 2 3
between the phases 2 and 3.
Connection
Installation
Although the current of the phase 1 and the voltage between the phases 1 and 2 Line side
and
and the phases 3 and 1 are measured, ignore the measurements. The Measuring
Display Unit is designed for 3-phase 3-wire and single-phase and 3-wire circuits.
On W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the average values of load
current and line voltage are calculated from the values of the phases 1, 2 and 3
Characteristics
Dimensions
(between the phases). Ignore these measurement values. Load side
and
Also when the breaker is used on a single-phase 3-wire circuit, ignore these values. ATTENTION: Live part
When using any WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker, set the phase and wire Load
type.
Accessories
Phase sequence of Measuring *Phase N is provided only on 4-pole breakers.
Display Unit Breaker Line side
1 2 3 N 3 2 1 N
With phase switching: 3, 2, 1, and N from the left No phase switching (default) With phase switching
Set the phase sequence in accordance with the installation and Busbar 1 2 3
wiring methods. Load side Line side Line side Load side
Notes (1) The phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit
1 1
breakers. 2 2
Notes (2) Note that the position of the phase N is unchanged 3 3
Notes (2) regardless of the phase switching setting.
Measurement phase Measurement phase
The Measuring Display Unit Breakers cannot be connected with the power supply and load sides set reversely.
Unit
(1) In the case of 400, 630 or 800A frame, install the breaker body securing a wiring space of 30 mm or more on the right
side of the breaker to connect the connecting cables and fitting the connecting cable connectors.
(2) In the case of WS-V Series Measuring display Unit Breaker, install the breaker body securing a wiring space of 40 mm
or more on the right side of the breaker to connect the connecting cables.
700
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Measuring Display Unit Breakers
dCautions when using Measuring Display Unit Breaker (For Measuring Display Unit)
Transmission method
(1) One of No transmission, With pulse output and With CC-Link communication should be specified.
(2) W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker with CC-Link communication cannot be manufactured for installing the
Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body.
(3) When With transmission is selected, data which can be transmitted depends on the function of the Measuring Display
Unit Breaker body. The transmission options cannot be installed or changed later. Specify the options when issuing the
initial order.
(4) For the maximum number of connected units and transmission distance for each transmission type, see the following
tables.
<WS-V Measuring Display Unit Breakers>
Tables 4 and 5
<W & WS Measuring Display Unit Breakers>
Tables 7 and 8
(1) When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body installed in the horizontal direction, the direction of the
display can be changed according to the installation direction.
(2) The display direction is set on the display unit.
Characteristics
Dimensions
and
Line side
Accessories
Load side
Default display direction Installation with line side on left Installation with line side on right
Breakers
Breakers
installation direction.
Display
MEMO
702
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Miniature Circuit Breakers
Detailed Specifications
Model BH BH-P
Image
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
Specifications
Specifications
AC230/400V 3 − 3 −
Detailed
Detailed
IEC 60898-1
Rated short circuit
AC400V − 3 − 3
capacity (kA)
− DC125V 1 1
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
and
ca
a c b 95 74
Dimensions
(mm)
b c 57.5 60.5
Characteristics
Dimensions
ca 77.5 79
and
Connection (*1)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Terminal cover d −
Mounting plate d −
Optional
accessories
Terminal base − d
Lock cover d d
Breakers
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 703
Image
Specifications
Specifications
b c 44 44 44
Detailed
Detailed
ca 70 70 70
Type of overcurrent release Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Mounting IEC35mm rail IEC35mm rail IEC35mm rail
Applicable wire size 1 to 25mm2 1 to 25mm2 1 to 10mm2
Connection
Installation
Weight [kg] 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.25 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.12
and
Alarm switch (AL) d d –
Mass
optional Auxiliary switch (AX) d d –
accessories
Characteristics
Shunt trip (SHT) d d –
Dimensions
Terminal connection Solderless Solderless Solderless
and
Based on standard IEC 60898-1 IEC 60898-1 IEC 60898-1
CE marking EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration
CCC GB 10963.1 GB 10963.1 GB 10963.1
Accessories
Notes: *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).
*2 Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
a 18 36
Measuring
ca
Breakers
[mm] a c
b 87
b c 44
ca 70
Type of overcurrent release Thermal-magnetic
Other
Detailed Specifications
RCCB RCBO
Model BV-D Model BV-DN
Image Image
Rated making and breaking capacity Im [A] 500(In 25,40A), 630(In63A) Mass [kg] 0.19
Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc [kA] 6
Automatic tripping device Thermal, magnetic
Rated residual making and breaking capacity Inm [A] 500(In 25,40A), 630(In63A)
Connection
Rated conditional residual short-circuit current Inc [kA] 6 Without current 20,000
Installation
*3 For use to three phase 4-wire type. When using, it be sure to connect the neutral wire to the neutral phase. Not available for use to three phase 3-wire type.
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Isolating switch
Model KB-D
Image
Breakers
AL Alarm switch Electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker.
AX Auxiliary switch Electrically indicates the On/Off status of the circuit breaker.
Equipping of Accessories
Model BH, BH-P, BH-DN,
BH-D6 BH-D10
Specifications
Accessory BV-DN, KB-D, BV-D
Specifications
Detailed
Detailed
AL
AX –
SHT
Connection
Installation
and
: Accessory equipped
–: Accessory not equipped
Characteristics
Dimensions
and
Specifications
AL AX AL+AX AX+AX
Accessories
Type
AL-05DLS AX-05DLS ALAX-05DLS AX2-05DLS
Configuration 1C 1C 2C 2C
Contact
Contact capacity 400VAC, 2A 230VAC, 5A 120VDC, 0.4A 48VDC, 1.5A 24VDC, 4A
SHT
Type
SHTA400-05DLS SHTD048-05DLS
Cut-off switch Equipped
Voltage 110-400VAC 24-48VDC
Display Unit
110VAC 60VA
Measuring
Breakers
24VDC 75VA
Input power requirement 230VAC 250VA
48VDC 300VA
400VAC 750VA
Operating time [ms] < 20
Connection Solderless terminal
Other
Detailed Specifications
Combinations of Accessories
AL
AX
2AX
ALAX
Accessory
SHT
connection combinations
AX+SHT
Specifications
AL+SHT
Specifications
Detailed
Detailed
2AX+SHT
Connection
Installation
ALAX+SHT
and
Dimensions
and
Outline Drawing
AL-05DLS AX-05DLS ALAX-05DLS SHTA400-05DLS
Accessories
AX2-05DLS SHTD048-05DLS
Type
ALAX-05DLS Solderless terminal
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
47.5
44.5
44.5
44.5
87
45
95
45
45
45
92
92
M3.5 screw
17 44
17 44 17 44 9 18 17 44
9 9 M5 screw
70max
70max 70max 70max
Breakers
AL AX AL AX
98 ALa 14 AXa 98 ALa 24 AXa
1
3 Insert
2
4 Click
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 707
Circuit Protectors
Frame (A) 30
Model CP30-BA CP-S
Image
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5 2.5
Rated current (A) 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.75 1 2 2.5 3 5 7 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
AC (V) 250 250 –
Rated voltage (V)
UL 1077 DC (V) 65 125 – 65 –
CSA C22.2 No.235 (*11) AC 2.5kA at 250V 1.5kA at 250V –
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V – 1kA at 65V –
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
Specifications
Specifications
Rated short-circuit IEC 60934 1.5kA at 230V
AC 250
Detailed
capacity (kA)
Detailed
EN 60934 2.5kA at 120V
(Icn) 1kA at 120V
DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V – 1kA at 60V 1kA at 60V
(1kA at 60V) (*7)
Connection
(Icu/Ics)
Installation
DC 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V – –
and
AC-DC common use d – (*1) – (*8)
Reverse connection d –
AC250V 50/60Hz 1500A 0.02s
Rated short time current AC125V 50/60Hz 2500A 0.02s
–
Characteristics
(for switch only type) DC65V 1000A 0.02s
Dimensions
DC125V 1000A 0.02s
and
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 (T40) 25 (T25)
Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD);
Operating characteristics
Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (*2) Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO]
Accessories
Mode of tripping Medium type (M), (MD) Medium type (M), (MD)
Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM] Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM]
Fast type (F) Fast type (F), (FD)
Method of operation S-type (IEC 60934)
Trip-free behaviour Trip-free (IEC 60934)
Operating characteris is
Medium type (M) only.
EN 60934 : TUV approval EN 60934 : The rated current, 0.3A,
CE Marking
EN 60947-2 : Self-declaration (*5) TUV approval (*10) 2A, 3A and 7A are not
applied.
*3 In poles equipped with a shunt tripping mechanism, the overcurrent tripping element is not operative (switched shunt tripping).
*4 For back-face wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with 30A, or 20A or less.
*5 UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products.
*6 It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV.
*7 In case of DC use, only DC65V is available.
*8 Specify if for DC use when ordering.
*9 Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.)
*10 Connection is male tub terminal only.
*11 CP30-BA only.
Remarks: 1. Products for non-standard conditions are special order. (Low temperature, 1st and 2nd-degree moisture fungal treatment, corrosion-resistant)
2. Although a buzzing sound may occur when an instantaneous type becomes 80% or more of the rated current for AC use, performance is not effected. Please take this
point into consideration when selecting units for use in quiet environments.
3. Please use in environments free of high temperatures, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact.
Also, do not use it in a circuit with inrush current or harmonics. Problems may result.
708
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Circuit Protectors
Detailed Specifications
− − − 30 4 3
Detailed
Detailed
− − − 14 5 4
Relay type current trip Remark: 1. When using these switches to a circuit with a minute load (125 V AC, 0.1 A or
Remarks: 1. 30 V DC, 0.1 A or less), designate the application as minute load.
CP-S d d d d d d d −
CP-S d d d d d d d − Ratings
Rated operating voltage (V) Time rating
100-200 Compatible with 100 to 200 V AC and 100 V DC
10 sec or less
24-48 Compatible with 24 to 48 V DC
Characteristics
Switch type
Dimensions
24-48 − 160
100-200 2400 2100
Remarks: 1. The allowable range is 70 to 110% of the rated voltage for AC and 75 to 120%
Remarks: 1. of the rated voltage for DC.
Internal accessories Remarks: 2. The time rating is 10 seconds or less. Configure the circuit on which voltage
Accessories
Breakers
CP30-BA − −
CP-S − − − −
Remark: 1. All accessories should be fitted on the internal accessory terminal block.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 709
Appearance
Installation posture
The operating characteristics of electromagnetic 100%
Specifications
ON
Specifications
medium or low speed) type circuit protector, pay 120% 90%
Detailed
Detailed
attention to the installation angle because the ON
Connection
Generally, it is recommended to use the circuit
Installation
ON
No change in this direction
and
protectors in the vertical direction.
Characteristics
Dimensions
CP30-BA
and
Classification Shape of terminal Electric wire size used (mm2) Applicable screw terminals Tightening torque (N • m)
Accessories
Body
2.63-6.64 R5.5-4 R5.5-5
Cross recessed 30A M5 M5 1.8-2.2
or slotted 6.64-10.52 *8-5NS (made by JST)
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
710
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Detailed Specifications
dLow Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series)
Frame (A) 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000
Model AE630-SW AE1000-SW AE1250-SW AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA AE2000-SW AE2500-SW AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA
Image
AE1600-SW (Drawout type) dSee the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit
Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.
Rated current (CT rating) In (A) 630 (*1) 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 (*1) 2500 3200 4000
315-346.5-378-409.5- 500-550-600- 625-687.5-750- 800-880-960- 1000-1100-1200-1 1000-1100-1200- 1250-1375-1500- 1600-1760-1920- 2000-2200-2400-
Rated current setting Ir (A) (adjustable)
441-472.5-504-535.5- 650-700-750- 812.5-875-937.5- 1040-1120-1200- 300-1400-1500- 1300-1400-1500- 1625-1750-1875- 2080-2240-2400- 2600-2800-3000-
(Rated ambient temperature 40°C)
567-598.5-630 800-850-900- 1000-1062.5- 1280-1360-1440- 1600-1700-1800- 1600-1700-1800- 2000-2125-2250- 2560-2720-2880- 3200-3400-3600-
(For marine use 45°C)
(*1) 950-1000 1125-1187.5-1250 1520-1600 1900-2000 1900-2000 (*1) 2375-2500 3040-3200 3800-4000
Number of poles 3, 4 (*2)
Rated insulation voltage V 1000
Current carrying capacity of neutral pole A 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 AC690V
(ka symmetrical RMS)
65 75
Rated breaking
BS
capacity
Utilization category B
Pollution degree 3
and
Dimensions
30 35 43 44 61
CE Marking Self-declaration
CCC recognition ( Certified)
Marine approval Certified (NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS, DNV, CCS)
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection)
dWhen the MCR is provided, the breaking capacity may be changed. See the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622.
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
dSee the catalog of Low-voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details of the accessories.
Notes: *1 AE630-SW and AE2000-SW having low rating types are available. See the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.
*2 The 4-pole products do not have obtained the marine approval.
*3 4 (HN) means the neutral poles current capacity is 50% of the rated current, for 4poles.
4 (FN) means the neutral poles current capacity is 100% of the rated current, for 4poles.
*4 ( ) shows the value for 4P FN type.
*5 Marine approval value is 138kA.
Features
d Higher reliability by High operating durability (Mechanical) d Various connections
d Increase of rated short-time withstand current Various connections for panel structures
Combination of the Electronic trip relay (ETR) with MCR (*1) enables are available. (See the following figure.)
increase of the choice coordination range.
d Applicability to increase and decrease of load and improvement
Connections
of protection coordination
Display Unit
Measuring
Connections
Breakers
PROFIBUS-DP and MODBUS transmission and helpful in establishing (Standard) (DR-VT) (DR-FT) (DR-VTA) (DR-FTA)
Note: *1 For AE2000-SWA, AE4000-SWA, AE4000-SW, AE5000-SW and
various electrical circuit measurement monitoring systems and energy- AE6300-SW models, vertical terminal only is available.
Image
(Reference)
85
Rated breaking
BS
capacity
Specifications
Ics = % Icu 100%
Specifications
Rated short-time withstand current (kA symmetrical RMS) 1 second 100
Detailed
Detailed
Suitability for isolation Compatible
Reverse connection Possible
Without current 10000 (3P) /5000 (4P)
Number of operating cycles With current
(690 V AC) 1000
Utilization category B
Connection
Installation
Pollution degree 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A
and
Fixed 3-pole product 414×873×290
Outline dimension (mm) type 4-pole product 414×1003×290
Height (H) x width (W) x depth (D) Drawout 3-pole product 480×875×368
type 4-pole product 480×1005×368
Characteristics
Dimensions
Fixed 3-pole product 160 160 160
type 4-pole product 180 180 180
and
Weight (kg) Drawout 3-pole product 233 233 240
(without Accessory) type 4-pole product 256 256 263
Cradle 3-pole product 118 118 125
only 4-pole product 133 133 140
Accessories
CE Marking Self-declaration
CCC recognition ( Certified)
Marine approval Certified (NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS)
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection)
Additional function
Extension module(EX1) Network
BIF-CC
● Main setting module ● Optional setting module ● Power supply Display(DP1) BIF-PR
G1: Ground fault protection P1: AC•DC100-240V Display onto panel board(DP2) BIF-MD
WS1, WB1, WM1, AE630-1600-SW,
Display Unit
Measuring
VT unit(VT)
Breakers
Image
selectable selectable
type
Max. operating time (s) 0.1 0.1
JIS – –
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
Rated sensitivity current mA 100 • 200 • 500 selectable
Delay (200 • 500 • 1000 selectable)
type
Operating time (s) (*4) 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable
Connection
Installation
Inertial non-operating time (s) or longer than (s) 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
and
High
Rated sensitivity current mA 30 50 30 50
speed
Max. operating time (s)
type 0.1 0.1
High
UL/JIS speed Rated sensitivity current mA – – 100 • 200 • 500 selectable 100 • 200 • 500 selectable
• Max. operating time (s) (*4) 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
Characteristics
Delay
Dimensions
type Inertial non-operating time (s) or longer than (s) – • 0.1 • 0.5 – • 0.1 • 0.5
High Rated sensitivity current mA 30 • 50 • 100 selectable 30 • 50 • 100 selectable
and
speed
type Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆n 0.04 0.04
100 • 300 • 500 selectable 100 • 300 • 500 selectable
UL/CE Rated sensitivity current mA – –
Delay 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
type
Accessories
Max. operating time (s) at 2I∆n (*4) 0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
Inertial non-operating time (s) at 2I∆n 0.1 • 0.5 0.1 • 0.5
Earth leakage indication Electric type (LED) Mechanical type (button) Electric type (LED) Mechanical type (button)
Push button Push button
Push button or control power Push button or control power
Resetting method (conbined with earth leakage (conbined with earth leakage
switch off switch off
indicator) indicator)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Conforming
Measuring
Breakers
standard
ZT15B, ZT30B and ZT40B. 2. The relay complies with CE marking conformity
*2 Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and JIS standards are indicated together. For declaration only when used with CE marking type
JIS voltage indications, 100-200V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover is MCCB with a voltage tripping device to interrupt
240-440V changeover, and 460V and 480V are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/ current during ground fault.
JIS”. 3. NV-ZBA/ZSA
*3 Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and CE standards are indicated together. For Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
CE voltage indications, 120-230V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeoever is 120V 80-126V 100 • 110V • 120V
240-440V selectable, which are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/CE”. 240V 160-252V 200 • 220 • 240V
*4 When operating times are 0.3 and 0.45sec, 0.8 and 1.0sec and 1.6sec, the relay operates between 415V 320-484V 400 • 415 • 440V
0.15 and 0.45sec, 0.6 and 1.0sec and 1.2 and 2.0sec, respectively.
*5 Can be combined with an interchangeable ZCT equipped with a primary conductor. Refer to the 4.NV-ZHA/ZLA
next page for details. Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
*6 Not UL-certified. 120V 80-132V 100 • 110 • 120V
240V 160-264V 200 • 220 • 230 • 240V
440V 304-484V 380 • 400 • 415 • 440V
480V 368-528V 460 • 480V
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 713
1f3w Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 250 (556) 500 (842) 725 (1095)
3f3w Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 22 (135) 60 (260) 200 (560) 325 (760) 600 (1140)
Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992)
3f4w
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable – 14 (105) 38 (190) 100 (365) 250 (655) 400 (870)
Specifications
Specifications
Detailed
Detailed
Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors
Type ZTA600A ZTA1200A ZTA2000A
Number of poles 3
Connection
Installation
Rated voltage (VAC) 600
and
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value)
a a 227 227 360
Characteristics
b 256 298 250
Dimensions
ba
b
and
c 42 78 79
c
Accessories
ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors
Frame (A) 600 1200 2000 3200
ZBA NV-ZBA3200
Control voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) Inertial non-operating time (s)
ZBA 120 • 240 (*1) 100 • 200 • 500 (*1)
High-speed type
120 • 240 (*1) 0.1 —
ZSA 100 • 200 • 500 (*1)
240 • 415 (*1)
ZBA 120 • 240 (*1) 100 • 200 • 500 (*1) 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 (*1) 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
Other
100 • 200 • 500 (*1) 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 (*1) – • 0.1 • 0.5
120 • 240 (*1)
ZLA 240 • 440 (*1) 100 • 300 • 500 (*1)
480 0.45 • 1.0 (*1) (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
300 • 500 • 1000 (*1)
Note: *1 Selectable.
714
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Mag only, DC, DSN and 400Hz
Breaking is more difficult with direct currents because the current value never reaches zero. While ordinary DC
breakers are suitable for low voltages, special-voltage DC breakers are recommended for voltages in excess of
Connection
Installation
The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the S Series breakers with the same
designations.
Characteristics
Dimensions
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (VDC) 400 550 440 550 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600
•These
Display Unit
DC side
Measuring
Breakers
breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonard system DC side breakers. They protect the thyristor from short
circuiting when there is a power or communication failure (Mag Only breakers can also be used for this purpose).
Use these breakers in combination with fast fuses for even greater protection.
Other
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Rated voltage (VDC) 250 440 300 500 250 480 250 480 250 480 250 480 250 480
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Max. switching current (AC/DC) 378/155 750/310 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000
Model DSN32-SV DSN63-SV DSN125-SV DSN125-SGV DSN160-SGV DSN250-SV DSN250-SGV DSN400-SW DSN630-SW DSN800-SW DSN1000-SW DSN1250-SW DSN1600-SW
Rated current (A) 32 63 125 125 160 250 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Specifications
Specifications
Rated voltage (AC/DC) 500/250 500/250 690/250 690/300 690/300 690/250 690/300 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250
Detailed
Detailed
Max. switching current (AC/DC) 192/80 378/155 750/310 750/315 960/400 1500/625 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000 6000/2500 7500/3125 9600/4000
Connection
Installation
and
400Hz MCCBs
Characteristics
Dimensions
and
Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 400Hz circuits. When standard MCCBs are used in high-frequency
circuits (eq. 400Hz), the instantaneous characteristics are shifted higher. The 400Hz MCCB is recommended
Accessories
Breakers
• Specifications
The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the
Model NF125-SV NF125-HV NF250-SV NF250-HV NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW (*1) NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
16, 20, 32, 40, 16, 20, 32, 40, 125, 150 125, 150 225, 250 200-350 300-500 400-600 600-800 800-1200
Rated current (A) 400, 500
50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100 175, 200 175, 200 300, 350 adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
690V 8/8 10/8 8/8 10/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 25/13 25/13
500V 18/18 30/23 30/30 50/38 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 65/33 65/33
(kA) 440V 25/25 50/38 36/36 65/65 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 85/43 85/43
Breakers
400V 30/30 50/38 36/36 75/75 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/43 85/43
230V 50/50 100/75 85/85 100/100 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 125/63 125/63
Other
Connection Types
Table 1 Connection
Front connection (F) Rear (B)
Connection type (Code address) Screw terminal Busbar terminal Solderless (BOX) Bar stud Round stud
(AMP-N) (BAR) terminal (SL) (B-ST) (B-ST)
NF30-CS − − −
C • S • H • MB
NF800-SEW • NF800-HEW • NF800-REW • NF800-SDW • NF800-CEW − − −
NF1000-SEW • NF1250-SEW • NF1600-SEW
MCCB
R•U
NF125-UV −
NF125-RGV • NF250-RGV • NF250-UV −
Connection
Installation
NF400-UEW
Connection
Installation
− − −
NF800-UEW
and
NF50-SVFU − − −
NF100-CVFU − −
NF125-SVU
− −
Characteristics
NF125-HVU
Dimensions
UL
NF250-SVU
− −
and
NF250-HVU
NF225-CWU − − −
NF-SKW • NF-SLW − − −
BH-K • BH-C1 • BH-C2 • BV-C1 • BV-C2 − − − −
BH
Accessories
NV250-CV/SV/HV • NV250-SEV/HEV − −
NV400-SW • NV400-SEW • NV400-HEW • NV400-REW • NV400-CW −
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
−
NV800-SEW • NV800-HEW
Kind of terminal screw (A) With insulating base (tube) for
(Circuit breakers having frame size of 1000A and more are not provided with terminal screws (A).) installation of metallic board
The bar stud installation position
Shape can be turned 90° on all models
(except NF800-UEW).
The current-carrying capacity of a
vertically installed bus bar is
Pan-head screw with clamp Pan-head screw Bolt (Hex-socket) Bolt larger than that of a horizontally
Screw size M5 M8 M8 2×M8 M10 installed bus bar even if the bus
bars have the same dimensions.
NF32-SV BH-P NV32-SV NF NV NF NF NV NF
63-CV 63-CV 63-CV(60, 63A) 63-CV(60, 63A) 125-SEV 400-UEW 800-SEW 400-CW
63-SV 63-SV 63-SV(60, 63A) 63-SV(60, 63A) 125-HEV
125-RGV (4P) 800-HEW 400-SW
63-HV 63-HV 63-HV(60, 63A) 63-HV(60, 63A) 125-SGV 800-CEW 400-SEW
50-SVFU(*1) 125-CV 125-CV 125-LGV 800-SEW 400-HEW
125-SV 125-SV 125-HGV 800-HEW 400-REW
160-SGV 800-REW
Display Unit
Remarks
Measuring
160-LGV
125-SEV 125-SEV 160-HGV 800-UEW 630-CW
125-HEV 125-HEV 250-CV 800-SDW 630-SW
100-CVFU 250-SV 630-SEW
125-SVU 250-HV 630-HEW
250-SEV
In case of clamp connection (*3) 125-HVU 250-HEV 630-REW
Type 125-UV 250-SGV NV
Other
250-LGV 400-CW
250-HGV 400-SW
250-RGV
250-UV 400-SEW
qWhen the wire size is 5.5 mm2 or more, divide the 225-CWU 400-HEW
wires, and connect them. 250-SVU 400-REW
250-HVU 630-CW
wWhen connecting wires differing in size, for NV
example, f1.6 wires and 5.5-mm2 wires, connect 125-SEV 630-SW
the two kinds of wires together to a crimp terminal 125-HEV 630-SEW
because the thinner wires easily come off. 250-CV 630-HEW
eDo not tighten directly solid wires and cords 250-SV
250-HV
consisting of thin copper wires used as strands, for 250-SEV
example f1.6 and 1.25-mm2 wires, together. 250-HEV
Note *1 It is impossible to directly connect the wires of 40- and 50-A, NF/NV 50-SVFU.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 717
− − −
− −
− −
− −
− −
Specifications
Detailed
− −
(Except for NF1600-SEW)
− (Except for 4P) −
(Except for 4P) − −
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
− −
(Except for NF800-UEW)
and
− − −
− − −
− − −
Characteristics
Dimensions
− − −
and
− − −
− − −
− − −
Accessories
− −
− −
− −
− −
The circuit breaker can be connected only by pushing it onto the preliminarily wired terminal block. Mounting base for distribution board for electric
Install it tightening the supplied screws through the mounting holes. lamps.
NV400-SW • NV400-SEW • NV400-HEW • NV400-REW • NV400-CW • NV630-SW • NV630-SEW • NV630-HEW • NV630-CW • NV-SKW M12 bolt
ELCB
Connecting Parts
For the connection shown in the table on the previous page, the following parts are available as connecting
parts.
order for
NF160-LGV/HGV
Detailed
the number
ST-4SW2 2 — of circuit
NF400-CW, NF400-SW NV400-CW, NV400-SW breakers.
ST-4SW3 3 NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW ★Bar studs
NV400-SEW
NF400-REW NV400-HEW Insulating bases
ST-4SW4 4 NV400-REW (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
Bar studs
ST-6SW2 2 — (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
and
Number Set of
Type name Applicable models Major included parts
of poles order
NF32-SV
PMDN-05SV2L 2 NF63-CV/SV/HV (3A-50A)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
PMDN-05SV3L 3 NF32-SV
NF63-CV/SV/HV (3A-50A)
sets Plug-in
NV32-SV type terminal block (1 pc)
PMDN-05SV4L 4 Crip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
NV63-CV/SV/HV (5A-50A)
PMDN-05SV2H 2 NF63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)
PMDN-05SV3H 3 NF63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)
PMDN-05SV4H 4 NV63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)
PMDN-1SV2 2 NF125-CV/SV
PMDN-1HV2 2 NF125-HV Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc)
sets Crip terminals
PMDN-1SV3 3 NF125-CV/SV/HV (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
PMDN-1SV4 4 NV125-CV/SV/HV
PMDN-1UV2 2
sets Plug-in type terminal block (2 pc)
PMDN-1UV3 3 NF125-UV Crip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs)
— 4
PMDN-2SV2 2 NF125-SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV
PMDN-2SV3 3 NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc)
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV Plug-in type barriers
PMDN-2SV4 4 NV125-SEV/HEV sets (2-pole: 2 pcs, 3-pole: 4 pcs, 4-pole: 6 pcs)
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
PMDN-4SW2 2 NF400-CW/SW
NF400-CW/SW/SEW
3 NV400-CW/SW/SEW
PMDN-4SW3 Plug-in type terminal block (2 pcs)
NF400-HEW/REW
3 sets Plug-in type barriers (4 pcs)
NV400-HEW/REW Tulip terminals (3-pole: 6 pcs)
NF400-SW/SEW
4
PMDN-4SW4 NV400-SEW
4 NF400-HEW
PMDN-8SW2 2 NF800-SDW
NF800-CEW/SEW
3 NV800-SEW
PMDN-8SW3
sets Plug-in type terminal block (2 pcs)
NF800-HEW/REW
3 Tulip terminals (3-pole: 6 pcs)
NV800-HEW
4 NF800-SEW
PMDN-8SW4
4 NF800-HEW
Note In addition to the circuit breakers shown above, 4-pole and 2-pole circuit breakers are available. We are ready to manufacture such circuit breakers to order. Please consult us.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 719
Rear Screw A
Nut C
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Bar stud
Fig. 2 Insulating base Fig. 3
Specifications
MCCB ELCB
Detailed
Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque
NF30-CS − M4×0.7 1 M6 2 − − − − − − − −
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
NF125-CV, NF125-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV
and
− − − − M6 4 M8 12 M8 6 − −
NF125-HV, NF125-UV NV125-HV
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV
Characteristics
Dimensions
NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV, NF250-UV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV
and
NF250-LGV/HGV, NF250-RGV, NF125-SGV/HGV NV250-CV, NV250-SV
− − − − M6 10 M8 12 − − M8 12
NF125-LGV, NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV/HGV NV250-HV, NV250-SEV
NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NV250-HEV
NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV
Accessories
NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NV400-CW, NV400-SW
NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW − − − − M8 20 M12 45 − − M12 45
NF400-UEW (3P) NV400-REW
– – R-8-5 R-14-5
Detailed
Connection
Installation
NV400-CW, NV400-SW
and
NV630-HEW
800
NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW
1000
NF800-REW, NF800-UEW, NF800-SDW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
1200
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW
1250
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
To connect
one terminal
To connect
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
two terminals
Carefully check the insulating distance between
Connect with the bolt the connecting bus bar, crimp terminal and
head downward. tightening bolt and the ground and the
phase-to-phase insulating distance.
(Fig. a) (Fig. b)
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 721
Reference drawing of
162A 217A 298A 395A 469A 650A
connection type
Tightening Remarks
Screw
26.66 42.42 96.3 117.2 192.6 242.27 torque Shape
size
to to to to to to N•m
42.42 60.57 117.2 152.05 242.27 325
When connecting two crimp
M5 2 to 3 terminals, set the terminals as
shown below if the
AMP #322870 1AF-60 *-marked terminals are used.
JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) M8 5 to 7
NTK R38-8S CB60-S8 M5 • M6 I
R-2-5
R-5.5-5
M5 2 to 3
Specifications
R-2-6
M5 2 to 3 R-5.5-6
Detailed
AMP #322870 1AF-60 M5
JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) M8 5 to 7
NTK R38-8S CB60-S8 M8
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
2AF 2CR-150(*1)
When using 2AF, use a crimp tool
R-38-8 R-60-8 (LN300T920-20) (LN300T920-21) M8 8 to 13 having a nominal size of 100.
CB100-S8 (*1)CB150-S8
Characteristics
Dimensions
and
R-38-12 R-60-12 R-100-12 R-150-12 R-200-12 JST325-12
Fit to a front type bar terminal.
Accessories
M12 40 to 50 Up to two pieces can be fitted to (Fig. b)
one terminal.
R-150-12 R-200-12 JST325-12
R-38-12 R-60-12 R-100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 RD325-12
SD150-12 SD200-12 SD325-12
R8-5 M5 5.3 12.0 23.8 CB100-S8 B M8 8.4 22.0 52.5 20.5 21.0 2.6 96.3 to 117.2
Breakers
6.64
8-5NS M5 5.3 9.0 22.3 9.3 CB150-S8 8.4 22.0 61.0 23.0 27.0 3.2 117.2 to 152.05
A 8.5 1.2 to
R8-6 M6 6.4 12.0 23.8
10.52
R8-8 M8 8.4 15.0 29.8 13.8
Applicable External dimensions Applicable
8-5SC-9 M5 5.3 9 23.8 9.3 8.5 1.2 6.64 to 10.52 Part wire
number Shape screw
R14-5 M5 5.3 12.0 29.8
10.52 size fd2 B L F E N Thickness mm2
14-5NS M5 5.3 9.0 28.3 13.3
Other
A 10.5 1.5 to RD60-12 14.0 22.0 89.0 20.0 18.0 2.0 42.42 to 60.57
R14-6 M6 6.4 12.0 29.8 RD100-12 14.0 28.5 95.5 20.3 21.0 2.6 96.3 to 117.2
16.78
R14-8 M8 8.4 16.0 32.8 14.5 RD150-12 C M12 14.0 36.0 106.0 21.0 27.0 40 3.2 117.2 to 152.05
L330T459-23 M5 5.3 12.0 30.0 RD200-12 14.0 44.0 116.5 23.0 31.5 4.0 192.6 to 242.27
22-5NS M5 5.3 9.5 28.7 12.0 16.78 RD325-12 14.0 50.5 123.8 23.0 35.5 4.5 242.27 to 325
22-S6 A M6 6.4 12.0 30.0 12.0 1.8 to SD150-12 36.0 107.0 29.0 28.0 3.2 117.2 to 152
R22-8 M8 8.4 16.5 33.7 13.5 26.66 SD200-12 C M12 14.0 44.0 108.0 36.0 32.0 32 4.0 192.6 to 242.2
R22-12 M12 13.0 22.0 42.5 19.5 SD325-12 50.5 125.0 38.0 37.0 4.5 242.2 to 325
38-S8 M8 8.4 15.5 38.0 16.0 26.66
R38-8 A M8 8.4 14.0 1.8 to
R38-12 M12 13.0
22.0 42.7 17.7
42.42
Shape A φd2 Shape B φd2 Shape C φd2
Busbar
The size of the conductor can be connected is shown on the outline drawing of each model. The following
special busbars are available. Use them as needed. When using any busbar, isolate it from the bare busbar
on the circuit breaker power supply side with an insulating barrier.
F Conductor 4 A
f 6.5 C A f 9 or f 8.5
F G thickness
Conductor
10
20
t = 10 max.
thickness
10
t = 4 max.
H
H
Nominal
Nominal
diameter of
diameter of
conductor
conductor
tightening
ON tightening
ON screw J
screw J
OFF OFF
H
H
C B D C B
D
Specifications
E E
Detailed
Connection
Installation
Nominal
diameter of
and
conductor
ON tightening
screw J
Characteristics
Dimensions
OFF
and
D C B
Accessories
Fig. 3
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
11
NF32-SV NV32-SV 40.5 .5
NF63-CV (50A or below) NV63-CV (50A or below)
FB-05SV 1 24 24 2 50 75 11.5 − 25 M5×0.8
NF63-SV (50A or below) NV63-SV (50A or below)
2
f 6.5
NF63-HV (50A or below) NV63-HV (50A or below)
f5.5
18
46
NV125-CV
NF125-CV, NF125-SV
FB-1SV NV125-SV 2 24 24 4 60 90 18 15 29 M8
4
Breakers
f 8.5
NF125-SEV
NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV
NV125-SEV
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 20
NV125-HEV 57.5
NF250-UV, NF250-SEV
FB-2SV NV250-CV, NV250-SV 3 24 24 6 70 105 20 − 37 M8
Other
NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV
6
NV250-HV, NV250-SEV f9
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-HEV f9
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 723
Specifications
For the models with insulation barriers supplied as standard, please make sure to use the barriers.
a : clearance specified in standard
Detailed
yD2 : Side-to-side spacing of breakers
While the circuit breakers can basically be installed together without a clearance in between, be sure to observe the following instructions.
It is desirable to install an insulation barrier between the adjacent circuit breakers or insulate the bare-live parts considering the effect of cutoff gas.
Be sure to secure the insulation distance (dimension a) as the minimum, indispensable requirement.
With a leakage circuit breaker and a leakage alarm circuit breaker installed in close contact with the other, a current of 2,500A or higher flowing through one
Connection
of the circuit breakers could cause the other to operate falsely.
Installation
Connection
Installation
Be sure to secure a distance of at least 50 mm in between.
and
A circuit breaker of 400-ampere frame or larger with an SHT or a UVT could operate falsely if a current of 50 kA or higher flows through the adjacent circuit
breaker. Be sure to secure a distance of at least 50 mm in between.
Ceiling plate D2
Characteristics
Dimensions
and
A
C
B1
B2
B1
Side
plate
Accessories
D1
a
Table 8 Insulation distance (mm) (440VAC or below) *Figures in parentheses are for 230VAC or below.
C NF30-CS ON
ON
ON
ON
110% 90%
ON
ON
ON
ON
107% 93%
100%
Specifications
Detailed
Connection
Installation
and
Line Load
The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is as shown
in (a) normal connection on the right.
Characteristics
Dimensions
Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection. This may lead to a
ON ON
and
NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 725
AX (Auxiliary switch)
Power supply
S1
S2
Switch to electrically Power supply
AXc
display the ON-OFF
Specifications
AXa Control
status of circuit power
Detailed
Load AXb supply
Pushbutton switch
Connection diagram
breaker PL1
Load
PL2
Connection diagram
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
Characteristics
Dimensions
and Accessories
Accessories
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
Molded Case Earth Leakage UL 489 Listed
Table 1
Accessory name Nameplate (sample) Accessory name Nameplate (sample)
AL Alarm switch
Earth leakage trip
AX Auxiliary switch EAL alarm switch
Connection
Installation
98/ALa (closed)
S 250 3 2 125 0.4 0.4
and
96/ALb (open)
125 5 3 30 4 3
Trip 95/ALc
460 5 2 250 0.3 0.3
* The terminal numbers 98/ALa, 96/ALb and 95/ALc may vary depending on V 250 10 10 125 0.6 0.6
the number of installed switches and the installation poles. 125 10 10 30 10 6
Accessories
Accessories
14/AXa (open)
12/AXb (closed)
Off or Trip 11/AXc
14/AXa (closed)
12/AXb (open)
On 11/AXc
* The terminal numbers 14/AXa, 12/AXb and 11/AXc may vary depending on
the number of installed switches and the installation poles.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 727
NF63-HV
NF125-HV
NF125-LGV
L NF125-HGV
NF125-RGV NF400-HEW
• NF125-HEV NF400-REW NF800-HEW
H NF63-HV NF160-LGV
NF250-HEV NF630-HEW NF800-REW
• NF160-HGV
R NF250-HV NF630-REW
NF250-LGV
NF250-HGV
NF250-RGV
Specifications
Num U NF125-UV NF400-UEW(4P)
Detailed
ber NF400-UEW(3P)
of p NF250-UV NF800-UEW
A L ol e
(sta and s 2 or 3 poles 2 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles 3, 4 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles
nda
rd) AX
swit
che S V
Accessory s
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
(*3) (*7)
and
AL 1 2 1 2
Characteristics
Dimensions
(*3) (*7)
1 1 1 1 3 1 5 3 1 3
and
AX 2 2 2 4
2 3 3 2 4 2 6 4 5 6
Accessories
SHT
Accessories
(*6) (*6)
or
UVT
PAL
(contact output) Option for NF800-CEW, SEW, Option for NF1000-SEW and
Option for NF400-SEW, HEW, REW
and UEW and NF630-SEW, HEW and HEW and REW and NF1250-SEW and
REW NF800-UEW NF1600-SEW
Notes *1 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*2 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body.
Other
*3 Although the lead wires are normally drawn out laterally, those with lead wires drawn out toward load are available. (Only for front connection type)
*4 PAL (contact output) can be installed together with AL and AX on the left pole side. (It cannot be installed together with SHT or UVT.)
The standard type is provided with SLT. PAL control voltage (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC) is necessary.
*5 SHT and UVT can be installed on the left side.
*6 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. (The reset preventing UVT must be installed on
the left pole side.)
*7 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is
installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order.
*8 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately.
*9 SLT is provided as standard. A control power supply (100 to 200 V AC) is required. (In this case, other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side.)
Remarks: 1. For electrically operated automatic reset type circuit breakers having a frame size of 400A or above, the numbers of AL switches which can be installed are smaller
by 1 than the values shown above.
2. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
728
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories
NV63-CV
NV400-CW
C NV125-CV
NV630-CW
NV250-CV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV NV400-SW
NV125-SV NV400-SEW
S NV125-SEV NV630-SW NV800-SEW
Model
NV250-SV NV630-SEW
NV250-SEV
NV63-HV
H NV125-HV NV400-HEW
• NV125-HEV NV400-REW NV800-HEW
R NV250-HV NV630-HEW
NV250-HEV
U
Nu m
ber
of p
oles
Sw
itch 2, 3, or 4 poles 3 poles
Accessory S
(*6)
AL
Specifications
Detailed
(*6)
1
AX 2
Connection
Installation
AL + AX
and
Dimensions
(*5) (*5)
AL + or (*6) (*6)
UVT
AX + or
Accessories
(*6) (*6)
UVT
Notes *1 The standard type is provided with SLT. Only in the case of 24 V DC, specify the control voltage.
*2 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body.
*3 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*4 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVF voltage module must be separately installed.
*5 When the accessory is provided with UVT, the UVT voltage module has a vertical lead wire terminal block. The UVT is not provided with a cassette.
*6 SLT to be used when three or more accessories are installed on the left pole is manufactured to order.
Remarks: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
2. TBM can be installed regardless of the number of installed AL, AX, SHT and UVT.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 729
NF125-SVU
NF50-SVFU NF50-SVFU NF125-HVU NF400-SWU NF630-SWU
MCCB NF225-CWU
Model
(*4)
AL 1 2 1 2 1 2
(*4)
1 1 1 1 3 1 5 3 1 1
AX 2 3
2
3
2 1 2
2 4 2 6 4 2 2
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*3) (*6) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*6) (*1)
SHT
or
Specifications
UVT
Detailed
(*2) (*2) (*6) (*6) (*2) (*2)
1 2 1 2 1 2
AL + AX 1 2 1 2 1 2
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*3)
(*4) (*5) (*4) (*5)
SHT
AL + or
UVT
Characteristics
Dimensions
(*1) (*3) (*1) (*3)
and
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*1)
(*4) (*5) (*4) (*5)
SHT 1 1 1 3
AX + or 2 2 2 4
5
UVT 3
1 3 1
2 4 2
Accessories
Accessories
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*1) (*1)(*3) (*1)(*3)
(*4)(*5) (*4)(*5)
SHT
AL + AX + or
UVT
Notes *1 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*2 SHT cannot be installed.
*3 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so.
*4 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is
installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order.
*5 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately.
*6 UVT of NF50-SVFU and NV50-SVFU are not provided with cassettes.
*7 The standard type is provided with SLT. Only in the case of 24 V DC, specify the control voltage.
Remarks: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
2. AL and AX for minute load can be manufactured to order. (These switches have been certified only by UL and CSA. They have not been certified by TUV.)
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
730
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories
MDU Breakers AL AX
AL for
transmission
with MDU
AX for
transmission
with MDU SHT or UVT TI
Table 8-1 Table of maximum number Outgoing direction of
Handle of PAL
of internal accessories circuit breaker lead wires
1 3 15 3 (*1)
AX
2 4 26 4
(*2) (*2)
SHT
(*3) (*3)
UVT (*4) (*4)
(*1) (*1)
AL + AX
(*1) (*1)
(*2) (*2)
AL + SHT
Specifications
Detailed
13 5 (*1)
(*1)
24 (*2)
(*2)
AX + SHT 3 1
3 1
4 2
2
Connection
Installation
(*1)
Connection
Installation
(*1)
(*2)
(*2)
AL + AX + SHT
and
(*1) (*1)
(*3) (*3)
Characteristics
AL + UVT (*4)
Dimensions
(*4)
(*5) (*5)
and
13 5 (*1)
(*1)
24 (*3)
(*3)
AX + UVT 3 1 (*4) 3 1 (*4)
4 2 (*5)
2 (*5)
Accessories
Accessories
(*1)
(*1)
(*3)
(*3)
AL + AX + UVT (*4)
(*4)
(*5)
(*5)
(*6) (*6)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
PAL
EPAL
(*6) (*6)
TI
With contact outputs for PAL and OAL With contact outputs for PAL and OAL
Notes *1 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is
installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order.
*2 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. (The reset preventing UVT must be installed on the left pole side.)
*3 The UVT voltage module is installed externally. UTV is not provided with a cassette.
*4 UVT is normally installed on the right pole. If you intend to install it on the left pole, specify so.
*5 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately.
*6 The standard model has a terminal block. A 5-VA control power supply (compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC) is required. (In this case, another internal accessory
cannot be installed on the right pole.)
Remark: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 731
Specifications
Note *1 To transmit signals from AL, AX or AL and AX, AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU are installed on the left pole side. In this case, the lead wires of AL and/or
Detailed
AX for transmission with the MDU installed on the left pole side cannot be drawn out to the outside or fitted to the terminal block.
AL for AX for
AL AX transmission transmission
with MDU with MDU SHT or UVT
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
Handle of PAL Outgoing direction of
lead wires
and
circuit breaker
Left pole Right pole are cassette type accessories.
Characteristics
of po
Dimensions
swit le s
ch 3 or 4 poles
and
Accessory S
AL 1 2
Accessories
1
Accessories
AX 2
3
1 2 (*1)
AL + AX 1 2
SHT (*2)
or
(*2)
AX + SHT
(*2)
AL + AX + SHT
(*2)
AL + UVT
(*2)
AX + UVT
(*2)
AL + AX + UVT
AL for transmission
with MDU
(*3)
AL for transmission
with MDU AX
Display Unit
Measuring
(*3)
Breakers
AL for transmission
with MDU AL + AX
(*3)
AL for transmission with
MDU AL + AX + AL
(*3)
AL for transmission with
MDU AL + AX + AX
Other
(*3)
AL for transmission with
MDU AL + AX + AL + AX
(*3)
Notes *1 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body.
*2 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*3 To transmit signals from AL, AX or AL and AX, AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU are installed on the left pole side. In this case, the lead wires of AL and/or
AX for transmission with the MDU installed on the left pole side cannot be drawn out to the outside or fitted to the terminal block. In the case of 225A frame circuit
breakers, AL for transmission with the MDU must be installed for fault current measurement.
Remark: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
732
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories
NV63-CV~NV250-CV, NV32-SV~NV250-SV
Detailed
NV63-HV~HV250-HV
NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV, NV125-HEV, NV250-HEV
ELCB NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU
NV50-SVFU, NV400-CW, NV630-CW
NV400-SW, NV630-SW, NV400-SEW~NV800-SEW –
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
NV400-HEW~NV800-HEW, NV400-REW
and
Dimensions
and Accessories
Accessories
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
1. Press the trip button (PTT) 2. Loosen the cover screws. 3. Open the cover. 4. Install the cassette type 5. Close the cover, and
to trip the circuit breaker. accessory. (*2) tighten the screws.
(*1)
Notes *1 When installing any cassette type accessory, set the circuit breaker to the tripped state.
*2 If the inner lid or another accessory has been installed, remove it before installing the accessory.
When any circuit breaker supplied with the inner lid is used without an accessory, fit the inner lid without fail.
Failure to do so may affect the short-circuiting performance.
Models with inner lid: NF125-SV, NF125-HV, NF125-UV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-UV
NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV250-HEV
Display Unit
Measuring
NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU
Cautions when installing
Before installing or removing any cassette type accessory, set the circuit breaker and accessories to the no-voltage state.
Never install a cassette type accessory while the handle is in the ON or OFF position. Doing so may damage the accessory.
When installing an accessory with lead wires drawn out, apply the supplied nameplate to the circuit breaker side face.
When installing an accessory with lead wires drawn out for a frame size of 400 to 800 A, secure the lead wires along the
circuit breaker side face with the supplied lead wire retainers.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 733
SHTA240-03SVUR
SHTA440-03SVUR
For right AL-03SVU AX-03SVU ALAX-03SVU SHTD100-03SVUR –
NF50-SVFU pole AL-03SVURS AX-03SVURS ALAX-03SVURS SHTA240-03SVURS
SHTA440-03SVURS
SHTD100-03SVURS
For left pole
SHTA240-03SVUL
SHTA440-03SVUL
AL-03SVU AX-03SVU ALAX-03SVU SHTD100-03SVUL –
For left AL-03SVULS AX-03SVULS ALAX-03SVULS SHTA240-03SVULS
NV50-SVFU pole SHTA440-03SVULS
SHTD100-03SVULS
Specifications
SHTA550-05SVUR UVTNA250-05SVUR UVTSA250-05SVUR
For right AL-05SVU AX-05SVU ALAX-05SVU SHTD125-05SVUR UVTNA480-05SVUR UVTSA480-05SVUR
Detailed
NF100-CVFU
NF125-SVU/HVU pole AL-05SVURS AX-05SVURS ALAX-05SVURS SHTA240-05SVURS UVTNAD130-05SVURS UVTSAD130-05SVURS
NF250-SVU/HVU SHTA550-05SVURS UVTNA250-05SVURS UVTSA250-05SVURS
SHTD125-05SVURS UVTNA480-05SVURS UVTSA480-05SVURS
For left pole UVTNAD130-05SVUL UVTSAD130-05SVUL
SHTA240-05SVUL
SHTA550-05SVUL UVTNA250-05SVUL UVTSA250-05SVUL
NV100-CVFU AL-05SVU AX-05SVU ALAX-05SVU SHTD125-05SVUL UVTNA480-05SVUL UVTSA480-05SVUL
Connection
Installation
For left AL-05SVULS AX-05SVULS ALAX-05SVULS SHTA240-05SVULS
Connection
Installation
NV125-SVU/HVU UVTNAD130-05SVULS UVTSAD130-05SVULS
pole SHTA550-05SVULS UVTNA250-05SVULS UVTSA250-05SVULS
NV250-SVU/HVU
and
SHTD125-05SVULS UVTNA480-05SVULS UVTSA480-05SVULS
Characteristics
NF630-HEW, NF630-REW For right pole SHT-4SWRFS –
– – –
Dimensions
(4 poles) SHT-8SWRFS
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW For left pole
and
(2, 3 or 4 poles)
NV400-CW, NV400-SW
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW AL-4SWL AX-4SW ALAX-4SWL SHT-4SW
AL-4SWLS AX-4SWLS –
NV400-REW For left pole AL2-4SWLS AX2-4SWLS ALAX-4SWLS SHT-4SWLS
NV630-CW, NV630-SW (2, 3 or 4 poles)
Accessories
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
Accessories
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
AX-4SWU
AX-4SWURS SHT-4SWU
NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU For right pole – – SHT-4SWURS
AX2-4SWURS –
NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU
For left pole AL-4SWUL AX-4SWUL ALAX-4SWUL SHT-4SWU
Remarks: 1. For the possibility of installation of accessories and the installation pole, refer to the tables of maximum numbers on pages 727 to 731.
Installation positions
ON Accessory L1 L2 L3 R2 R1 L1 L2 L3 L4 R4 R3 R2 R1
AL – – – – – – – –
L1 L2 L3 L4 R4 R3 R2 R1
AX – – – (*1)
OFF
AL + AX – – – – – – – – –
SHT – – – – –
Other
(*1)
* Accessories only for Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (NV-C, S and H), Earth Leakage Alarm Breakers (NF-Z) and single-phase 3-wire circuits (NF-N and NV-N) cannot
be installed to R1, R2, R3 or R4.
Note *1 It is impossible to simultaneously install AX on R2 and SHT on R3 or R4.
734
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories
Connection
Installation
AC100-240
NF50-SVFU 380-440
NV50-SVFU 60
DC100
Characteristics
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV
and
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV AC100-240
380-550 50
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 120 15 or less
NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV DC100-125
NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU
Accessories
Accessories
AC100-240
NF225-CWU Provided 380-480 60
DC100-125
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW 100V 20
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 100V 10
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW Compatible with 200V 50
100 to 450 V AC and 5-15
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 380V 120
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 100 to 200 V DC 200V 35
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU 450V 170
AC100-120 200 70 7-15
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW 200-240
NF1600-SEW/SDW 380-450
DC100 300 100 15-25
Notes *1 Ensure that the voltage of the operating power supply for SHT is not dropped below the allowable operating voltage (70% of the rated minimum voltage value) by the input power.
*2 The operating time is the time from when the rated voltage is applied to the shunt tripping device until the main contact of the circuit breaker starts opening.
Remark: 1. The accessory is usable at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
with AC/DC
Breakers
Model
24 25-27 24-48 48 50-55 60 440- 380- 440- 500-
480 550 550 550 12 24 24-36 36 36-48 48 60 110 125 220 200- 220-
250 250 24-48
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, F160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
Other
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV
NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV
NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV
NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU
NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU
NF225-CWU − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW − − − − − − − − − − − − −
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 735
Specifications
NF1600-SEW
Switching between 110/125DC
Detailed
NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU (*4) – 380 to 415 and 440 to 480 AC 5-30
Switching between
Switching between (*3)
100 and 110 DC
24/48 AC
NF225-CWU – Switching between
30 or less
24/48DC
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
Switching between
110/125DC
and
Notes *1 Some special voltage models vary in voltage range.
*2 The operating time is the time from when the undervoltage tripping device is set to the no-voltage state until the main contact starts opening.
*3 The accessory is usable at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
*4 If UVT is turned on without excitation, the circuit breaker instantaneously opens and immediately trips.
Characteristics
Dimensions
*5 Only for installation on the left pole
and
(2) Reset type and non-reset type UVT
Accessories
Accessories
Reset type (Refer to Table 12.)
The reset type UVT has a structure which does not trip a circuit breaker even if the UVT coil is not excited
when the circuit breaker handle is in the OFF or reset position. Therefore, it keeps the circuit breaker in the
AC24/48
AC100−120/200−240/380−450 AC380−450/460−550/600−690
Switching among
U-05W AC220−250/380−450/460−550 (Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
0.1, 0.3 and 0.5 s DC24/48
(Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
DC100−110
AC100−120/200−240/380−450
Switching among
U-30W AC220−250/380−450/460−550 −
0.5, 1 and 3 s
(Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
736
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories
C
3
4
2 1
84 (Terminal cover)
84 (Terminal cover)
90
100
100
90
57
80
80
57
1 2
4
3
f4.5 C f4.5
3
92.5 (Terminal cover)
12
Connection
Installation
100
110
100
110
90
55
90
55
and
5 1
12
4 2
3
Characteristics
Dimensions
7 10 Terminal cover 8
44.5 29.5 Terminal screw M3.5 8
and
lExamples of connection
Accessories
1 D1/P1 Control power supply terminal (COM) 1 D1/P1 Control power supply terminal (COM)
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
2 D2/P2 Control power supply terminal (rated voltage) 2 D2/P2 Control power supply terminal (rated voltage Lo)
3 J1/UC1 UVT coil connecting terminal 3 D3/P3 Control power supply terminal (rated voltage Hi)
4 J2/UC2 UVT coil connecting terminal 4 J1/UC1 UVT coil connecting terminal
Remarks: 1. When the UVT voltage module is installed on the 5 J2/UC2 UVT coil connecting terminal
body (standard), the UVT is supplied with J1/UC1
and J2/UC2 terminals connected with the UVT coil. Remarks: 1. When the UVT is used at the rated voltage Lo,
2. When the UVT is installed on the left pole side, the connect the control voltage to D1/P1 and D2/P2
UVT module terminal positions are reversed (on the terminals.
power supply and load sides). Carefully connect the When the UVT is used at the rated voltage Hi, connect
terminals. the control voltage to D1/P1 and D3/P3 terminals.
(Ex.) 100 to 110/120 to 130 V AC
(Rated voltage Lo/rated voltage Hi)
2. When the UVT voltage module is installed on the body
Examples of connection Examples of connection (standard), the UVT is supplied with J1/UC1 and
J2/UC2 terminals connected with the UVT coil.
3. When the UVT is installed on the left pole side, the
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 UVT module terminal positions are reversed (on the
power supply and load sides). Carefully connect the
terminals.
Table 13 Installation on right pole side Table 14 Installation on left pole side
Display Unit
Measuring
Reference Reference
Model drawing Model drawing
A B C D
NF50-SVFU 11 7.5 NV125-CV/SV/HV Fig. 2 20.5 7.5
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV 20.5 7.5 NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV Fig. 5 38 7.5
NF100-CVFU 20.5 7.5 NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF125-CV/SV/HV 20.5 7.5 NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF125-SVU/HVU 41.5 7.5 NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
Other
Specifications
30 to 800A frames except indicated on each lead
0.5mm2
Detailed
above models wire with a ring mark.
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
Lead Wire Terminal Block
Characteristics
(1) Vertical lead wire terminal block (SLT)
Dimensions
and
The lead wire terminal blocks for plug-in terminal blocks are available (P-LT).
The drilling size of these terminal blocks differs from the standard size. Consult us for details.
For a flush plate type circuit breaker, a terminal block will be installed on the circuit breaker rear face. (Specify
Accessories
Accessories
as FP-LT.)
Note *1 When the circuit breaker body is equipped with internal accessories and electrical operation device of motor-driven type (2) or
spring charge type (2), the circuit breaker is normally provided with a lead wire terminal block.
E
B
NF125-SEV/HEV/RGV, NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV 7 44 54 86.5 44 7 14 26 38
25
D
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF50-SVFU 7 27.5 54 86.5 27.5 7 14 26 38
NF100-CVFU 7 28.5 54 86.5 28.5 7 14 26 38
NF125-SVU/HVU 7 47.5 54 86.5 47.5 7 14 26 38
NF225-CWU 7 37 54 86.5 37 7 14 26 38
F NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-SWU/HWU
A C 79.5 54 86.5 79.5 7 14 26 38
Display Unit
12.5 NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 41
Measuring
Breakers
J
Note *1 The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.
Remark: 1. Terminal screw tightening torque: M3.5 … 0.9 to 1.2 N·m
H
Other
G 8
13.5
738
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories
ELCB
Table 17-2 Table of variable dimensions
Terminal cover 18 Model A B C D E F G H J K L M
(transparent) NV50-SVFU 16.5 17 54 86.5 16.5 17 54 86.5 6 10.5 22.5 34.5
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 7 26.5 54 86.5 7 26.5 54 86.5 7 14 26 38
10.5
NV100-CVFU 7 36.5 54 86.5 7 36.5 54 86.5 7 14 26 38
F
B
H
NV250-SVU/HVU 7 54 54 86.5 7 54 54 86.5 7 14 26 38
D
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
41 79.5 54 86.5 26.5 79.5 52 92 7 14 26 38
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW (*1) 41 88.5 54 86.5 26.5 88.5 52 92 7 14 26 38
Note *1 The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.
Remarks: 1. Terminal screw tightening torque: M3.5 … 0.9 to 1.2 N·m
J
A C 2. The lead wire terminal block for TBL is provided on the right pole side. However, the lead wire terminal blocks for TBL
12.5
of NV30-FA and NV50-FA are provided on the left pole side.
Terminal screw M3.5
G
L
K 8
E
13.5
14-terminal SLT
SLT for installing three or more
Specifications
Table 17-3
Detailed
NF400-HEW/REW
NV400-HEW/REW 20 60
Connection
9
Installation
Connection
NF630-CW/SW/SEW
Installation
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
11
11
NF630-HEW/REW
and
41
NV800-SEW/HEW 20 69
NF800-HEW/REW
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW − 117 116
Characteristics
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW
− 35 154
Dimensions
7 NF1600-SEW
Remark: 1. The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.
and
Terminal 17
screw M3.5
A 75
Accessories
Accessories
l The test button is kept pressed while control input voltage is applied to the button.
(When ELCB of time delay type is used, apply voltage for 2 seconds or more.)
l The test button module is supplied with voltage through a circuit isolated from the main circuit. It can share the control
sequence with SHT of a molded case circuit breaker.
l Unlike TBL, the test button modules can be connected in parallel.
l The module is normally provided with a vertical lead wire terminal block (SLT).
Table 18
NV32-SV NV400-CW/SW
18 18
NV63-CV/SV/HV NV630-CW/SW
NV125-CV/SV/HV NV400-SEW~NV800-SEW
Display Unit
NV125-SEV/HEV NV400-HEW~NV800-HEW
Measuring
Breakers
TBM1
NV100-CVFU
TBM2
NV125-SVU/HVU
10.5
TBM1
(10.5)
86.5
NV250-SVU/HVU
(10.5)
10.5
For a flush plate type with 250A frame or below, the external dimensions
of the flush plate type differ from the standard dimensions.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 739
2min
P2
1min
30s
20s Pre-alarm setting Pre-alarm setting
knob knob
10s
Pre-alarm operation Pre-alarm operation
Specifications
5s Pre-alarm current Ip indicating LED indicating LED
Inx (0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-
Detailed
2s 0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10% Reset button Reset button
1s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp
0.5s TL
133
Tp= ±20%
2
0.2s (at200%) Pre-alarm output
0.1s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 PALa
Current
Connection
Installation
Connection
(% to rated current In)
Installation
Terminal screw M3.5
PALc
and
d Pre-alarm LED indication
When the load current exceeds the preset current value, the LED lamp on the pre-alarm module front panel starts blinking. When the pre-
alarm output is given, the lamp stops blinking and turns on.
Characteristics
d Pre-alarm current setting (IP setting)
Dimensions
The pre-alarm current can be set to the rated current In × 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95 or 1.0 with the knob on the pre-alarm module front panel.
and
j 400 A frame or above
d Solid state relay (SSR) output (PAL lead)
The lead wires are drawn out. On the right pole side, only internal accessories with lead wires drawn out can be installed. A control power supply is unnecessary.
Table 19-2
Accessories
Accessories
Switching capacity
Model Resetting method
Solid state relay (SSR) – Non-contact output
NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW When the load
NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW current becomes
Pre-alarm characteristics Detailed drawing of pre-alarm module Pre-alarm module output rating
Display Unit
AC
Measuring
10h
Breakers
Pre-alarm operating
5h
characteristics Voltage Current (A)
2h V Resistive load Inductive load
1h
200 3 2
30min
20min PALOUT LED 100 3 2
14min
Long time delay RESET
A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC)
Operating time
2min
100s
242 V AC.) The required volt-ampere is 10 VA.
1min 60s PALa Vertical lead wire terminal block
Pre-alarm output
30s
20s P2
12s Control power supply PALa
10s Pre-alarm current Ip P1
Inx (0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85- (PALc)
5s 0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10% Indicating lamp (example)
Pre-alarm operating time Tp 18
2s TL
Tp=
2
(at200%) P2 Control power supply
1s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000
Current P1 PALc
(% to rated current In)
F-Type Operating Handle Operating handle of breaker mount type to be installed to circuit breaker body
DAppearance
D (Color: Munsell N1.5)
DDThe handle provides an isolating function in combination with the circuit breaker body
Dust-proof packing (optional)
(except F10SW and above). Type
name
Operating handle
type name
Delivery
category
DDIt has a safety device which prevents the circuit breaker turning on while the door is open.
DDIt can be locked in the OFF position. (Up to 3 commercially available padlocks (35 mm PFL F10SW~F120UR
and 40 mm) can be fitted. A type which can be locked in the ON or OFF position can 114
be manufactured. Specify the type if required.) On circuit breakers with a frame size 104
of 1000A or above, the handle can be locked in the ON or OFF position. (If it is
necessary to lock the handle only in the OFF position, specify so.)
DDIt is in protection class IP54 (IEC 60529). (For circuit breakers with a frame size of
11
1000A or above, the protection class (IEC 60529) is IP3X (IP5X when dust-proof
packing is provided).
DOutline
D drawings � Center of hinge and breaker
Center of
operating handle
Release knob
Decorative
board
Packing Operating handle Interlock engaging part
� The left drawing
Packing
Front
plate
Front
plate F(N) Front plate shows the
Trip
K
ED
ON
IPP
ED
ON
Handle relationship
P
TR
button
TR
150
150
B
O FF
OFF
H
ET N
T
SE
R RE
Trip
G
button Left hinge Right hinge
M
N
Trip
Thickness: 150
f20
Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2 Circuit breaker viewed from the
1.2 to 3.2
Trip
button
B button
35 A±2
83
Release
knob
Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2
Auxiliary handle (Note) 50 A 2 load side of the
41 A±2 L
150
circuit breaker.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 X1 X2
Note Auxiliary handles are provided with F10SW, F10SW4P and F120UR as standard.
Auxiliary handles (F-HT) are provided for F-4S ~ F-6SUL as option.
Center of hinge and circuit breaker
DDimensional
D drawings of front plate drilling Hinge on left side Hinge on right side
Specifications
H X1 H X2
Center of circuit Center of circuit Center of circuit Center of circuit Center of circuit
Detailed
breaker handle and breaker handle and breaker handle and breaker handle and breaker handle and Less than 10 170 or more
operating handle 4-f12 operating handle 4-f12 operating handle 4-f12 operating handle
4-f15
operating handle For 30 to 250 A (5H+85)
Circuit breaker
4-f15 0 or more (5H+120)
Circuit breaker frames or more 10 or more
or more
F
65
18
0
0
f
F
18
f9
f9
f1
f1
112
0 or more 0 or more
62
78
78
112
Center of
circuit
Center of
circuit
Center of
operating
Center of
circuit Center of frames or more or more
breaker breaker handle breaker operating
handle
Connection
handle 62 handle 78 78
handle
112 0 or more 0 or more
112 frames or more or more
and
(b)
J
(a) (b)
Center of
DDoor
D lock withstand load
D
operating
D
handle
F
C C C
Accessories
E E E F-4~F-8 68
(f) (g) (h)
models.
Breakers
on the model.)
Handle r Install the operating handle with the
2 poles (Load supplied operating handle mounting
side) screws.
3 poles Center of operating
handle and center
4 poles of circuit breaker
Circuit breaker cover
Installation position of screws (Remove.)
operating handle with respect
to circuit breaker (Note 1)
Operating handle mounting screw (2 pcs.) (b)
In the case of F-05SV2, F-1SV2,
(Installation procedure) Handle Operating section
F-05SRUL2, F-05SUL2 and F-1SUL2
q Install the circuit breaker on the panel mounting screw 3 poles
with the two circuit breaker mounting Tighten the circuit breaker and operating handle (supplied)
4 poles
screws through the holes (a). together with the supplied two operating handle
w Install the operating handle with the
(In the case of F-4S to F-6SUL) Installation position of
mounting screws. The operating handle mounting screws are tapping screws
supplied two operating handle mounting operating handle with respect
screws through the holes (b).
without washers or spring washers. to circuit breaker
Note *1 In the case of F-05SRUL2, the center of the operating handle is the same as the center of the circuit breaker.
Specifications
B
Drill holes in the door according
Detailed
C Padlock Dimensions
to the drilling size shown on the Interlock lever
Use commercially available padlocks. (mm)
Applicable
previous page, and tighten the Interlock engaging
part model
A (Nominal size) B C
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
Packing
40 22 or 23 5.5
countersunk screws. In the (for 800A frame or below)
A
and
case of 800A frame or below, fit Front plate (door)
Dimension C: Maximum 8mm.
Characteristics
d Door locking mechanism
Dimensions
The panel door can be opened only when the operating handle
and
is operated to open (reset). (On F-4S to F10SW, the door lock is
held in the released state even if the handle is returned to OFF.)
The door can be opened when the handle is in the ON
Accessories
position if the release knob is operated with a tool.
Accessories
d Operation locking mechanism
Circuit breakers with a frame size of 800A or below can be locked by
setting the handle in the OFF position. (Operating handles which can
Power
F – 1 SV UL E 2
“Z” (horizontal installation with power 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
supply on the right) at the end of the model 1) F: Operating handle type name
2) 1: Circuit breaker group (0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8)
name. (Ex.: F-4S Y) 3) SV: Classification of circuit breaker (S, SV, H, U, UV, SR or SG)
4) UL: Blank···General product UL···UL 489 listed product
d Sealing of release knob 5) E: Blank···Standard E···For emergency stop
The use of an optional part, 6) 2: Blank···3P or 4P 2···2P
Release Protection “F-RCS”, Release F-RCS
(2) For 1000A frame or above
can prevent the panel door knob F 10 SW 4P
1) 2) 3) 4)
being opened by operating the 1) F: Operating handle type name
release knob. (800A frame or When F-RCS is not used When F-RCS is used (sealed state) 2) 4: Circuit breaker A frame (10 or 120)
below) 3) SW: Series name
4) 4P: Number of poles (4P) * Not indicated for 3P
742
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers External Accessories
V-Type Operating Handle Operating handle of door mount type consisting of operating section to be
mounted on circuit breaker body and operating handle on panel door
DAppearance
D (Color: Munsell N1.5)
� The handle provides an isolation function in combination with the circuit breaker body.
� Conforming to the safety regulations of EN Standard (EN 60204-1)
� Protection class (IEC 60529) IP65 as standard
� The handle can be locked only in the OFF position with up to three commercially available padlocks
(35 mm or 40 mm).
� The panel door can be opened in the OFF position. In the ON and trip positions, the panel door is
locked and cannot be opened. However, the door can be opened even in the ON and trip positions by
operating the release part with a tool.
DOutline
D drawings � Center of hinge and breaker
Front Front
plate plate F(N)
Front
plate
ON
ON
Front plate
ED
PP
ED
I
TR
PP
TRI
140
90
70
H
H
OF F
OFF
ET
T
ES
SE
R RE
K
Trip
12 button Thickness:
Thickness: A B 90 1.2 to 3.2
67 1.2 to 3.2 Thickness:
L A B 140 A B
70 54 C±2 N 1.2 to 3.2 Right hinge
Trip M C (stationary type) ±2 Left hinge
button Trip Trip 54 62 C (stationary type) ±2
M N
button D (adjustable type) ±2 D (adjustable type) ±2
Trip Trip button Circuit breaker
button button
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Note Auxiliary handles (F-HT) are provided for V-4S ~ V-6SUL as option. X X
Center of circuit
breaker handle and
Center of circuit Center of circuit operating handle H X
breaker handle and breaker handle and 4-ø10
operating handle
Center of
operating handle
ø9 Center of For 30 to 250 A 5H+100
ø9 circuit breaker circuit breaker frames or more
0 or more
8H+150
E
Connection
E
Installation
operating
104
operating
40
frames
54
ø5
40 Center of 54 3
the load side.
0
operating
handle 104
(a) (b)
(c)
DDoor
D
Dimensions
and
Center of
Center of Center of circuit breaker and Center of F(N)
Center of Center of Center of circuit circuit breaker handle circuit breaker Center of
circuit breaker circuit breaker and circuit breaker circuit handle circuit breaker 4 poles
Center of circuit breaker handle handle breaker
handle circuit breaker breaker
Center of
Center of
circuit 3 poles CL 30 to 800A frames 200
circuit breaker C
L
Circuit breaker handle Circuit
breaker breaker
Center of Center of Center of
Accessories
Accessories
F J F J F/2
J Center of Center of F/2
F F F Center of F
operating operating
handle J handle F F J circuit breaker
and operating
handle
(d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (j)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Projection
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)
Specifications
Operating handle section mounting screw
to the dimensional drawing for 2-pole external type
Detailed
Operating
(250A frame or below: 2 pcs. section
front plate drilling given on the 400A frame or above: 4 pcs.) circuit breakers. If it Joints
Connection
Installation
Washer (2 pcs.)
Connection
Installation
procedure. positions may not
and
· Tighten the operating handle be correctly Shaft Warning mark Joint clamp screw
section from the back of the displayed.
front plate. Temporarily tighten
the screws to center the Make adjustments with the adjusting unit as stated below.
Characteristics
Dimensions
section in the hole. qExternal dimension drawing wCalculation of shaft cutting allowance
· Set the handle of the operating
and
Handle Front plate
Front Front
handle section to the OFF plate plate
state, tighten the front plate, and make sure that the
handle can be smoothly turned to the ON and OFF
Accessories
Accessories
positions.
Turn the handle to the right and left in the OFF state, and Thickness:
make sure that OFF is displayed. If OFF is not displayed, 1.2 to 3.2
move the operating handle section up and down and to Min P
Max
the right and left for adjustment. (Take care that the
V-1SV
d Door locking mechanism V-1SVUL
The operating handle is provided with an V-1SUL 162 300 X
opening in the ON and TRIP positions. In V-2SUL (Cutting allowance)(P max)(panel size)
X = 300 mm - P
the OFF position, the door can be opened. V-2SGUL 180 318
However, the door can be opened in the
10
V-4S Shaft
ON or TRIP position by pressing the Release knob
d Operation locking mechanism Note The unit is applicable to operating handles for emergency stop (E).
Operation lock can be set only in the OFF Position. Up to The user must prepare padlocks.
three commercially available padlocks (A = 35 or 40 mm) The dimensions of the padlocks are the same as those
can be fitted. Lockout hasps (scissors locks) can be used. shown on page 752.
When the operating handle section is locked with padlocks,
also the door is locked. d How to order
Specify the model name of the operating handle.
Other
w Operating section For adjustable type, place an order for the adjustment unit.
The operating section can be locked Locking hole (One lot includes 1 pc.)
so that the circuit breaker will not be Operating
section
250A frame or below: V-AD3S
turned on carelessly when the Padlock 400 to 800A frames: V-AD3L
inside of the panel is inspected with d Interpretation of model name
the panel door open. Fit a padlock
through the hole in the operating (1) For 800A frame or below
section of the operating handle. V – 1 S UL E 2
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
d Adjusting unit 1) V: Operating handle type name
The height from the circuit breaker mounting surface to the 2) 1: Circuit breaker group (0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8)
panel door can be adjusted by fitting the optional adjusting 3) S: Classification of circuit breaker (S, SV, H, U, UV)
4) UL: Blank···General product UL···UL 489 listed product
unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L. Cut the shaft of the adjusting unit 5) E: Blank···Standard E···For emergency stop
according to the height. 6) 2: Blank···3P or 4P 2···2P
744
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers External Accessories
Terminal Covers
The terminal covers are used to avoid exposure of live parts. Many kinds of terminal A C
covers, including large terminal covers (TC-L), small terminal covers (TC-S),
transparent terminal covers (TTC), rear terminal covers (BTC) and plug-in terminal
covers (PTC), for various models and applications are available, and they are helpful.
(The terminal covers cannot be fitted to electrically operated circuit breakers of spring
B
charged type (2) and motor-drive type (2). The standard terminal covers can be used
for the spring charged type (1). For the motor-drive type, special terminal covers can
be manufactured. Consult us for details.)
d Quick terminal covers ON
These covers are very convenient because they can be fitted only by inserting them into
the mounting holes in the circuit breaker body. To remove the terminal cover, shift the
projections of the terminal cover with the tip of a slotted screwdriver or finger, and
draw it out. TC-L TC-S TTC
DTable
D of variable dimensions
Table 22 Large terminal covers (TC-L)
Number Applicable model Dimensions (mm) Contents
Color
of poles Cover
Type name of circuit Number mounting Sealing Appearance Remarks
MCCB ELCB A B C
breaker of covers screw plate
TCL-03CS2W White 2 − (*1) 43.5 25 30.5 2 − 2
NF30-CS
TCL-03CS3W White 3 − 67 25 30.5 2 − 2
NF32-SV
TCL-05SV2 (*2)(*8) White 2 − 50 25 65.5 2 − 2
Specifications
NF63-CV/SV/HV
TCL-05SV2L NF32-SV
Detailed
White 2 − 50 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)(*9) NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF32-SV
TCL-05SV3 White 3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
NF63-CV/SV/HV 75 25 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*8)
White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
TCL-05SV3L White 3 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-HV
75 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*9) White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV
Dimensions
NF125-SEV/HEV
White 3 (*6)
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV
TCL-2SV3L
White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 50 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*11)
Accessories
Accessories
Breakers
(Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)
TCL-2SWU3L Quick type
White 3 NF225-CWU − 105 50 65.5 2 − −
(*3)(*11) (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)
TCL-4SWU White 3 NF400-SWU/HWU − 171 110 99.5 2 − 2 Quick type
Use in
combination
TCL-6SWU Transparent 3 NF630-SWU/HWU − 224 155 103.5 2 4 − Screw type
with insulating
barrier.
Notes *1 For 2-pole NV, use TC-L for 3-pole circuit breaker. *8 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 75A or less (max. wire size 25 mm2)
*2 For a circuit breaker with F or V type operating handle, specify the model name *9 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 125A or less (max. wire size 60 mm2)
with F at the end. *10 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2)
(F or V type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) *11 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 250A or less (max. wire size 150 mm2)
*3 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type Operating (Applicable to UL wire 300MCM)
Handles. Remarks: 1. The wire sizes shown in the above notes *10 to *13 are those of the
*4 The dimension C is the size on the power supply side and load side. 600-V vinyl insulated wires.
*5 When a crimp terminal applicable to wires with a size of 117.2 to 152.05 mm2 2. Insulate the exposed live parts of crimp terminals with insulating tape or
(Model 2CR-150 or CB150-S8) is used, TC-L cannot be fitted. Insulate the the like.
terminal from TC-S with insulating tube or taping. 3. When protection from the power supply and load sides is necessary,
*6 In the case of installation on the body, specify the model name with-MDU at the end. separately consult us.
*7 It cannot be installed in the case of installation on the body.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 745
Color
of poles
Type name
of circuit Number Cover Sealing Appearance Remarks
MCCB ELCB A B C of covers mounting plate
breaker screw
TCS-03CS2W White 2 − 43.5 5 30.5 2 − 2
NF30-CS
TCS-03CS3W White 3 − 67 5 30.5 2 − 2
Specifications
Table 24 Transparent terminal covers (TTC)
Detailed
Number Applicable model Dimensions (mm) Contents
of poles Cover Sealing
Type name Number mounting Appearance Remarks
of circuit MCCB ELCB A B C
breaker of covers screw plate
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
NF30-CS
and
TTC-03CS3 3 − 67 25 30.5 2 − 2
NF32-SV
TTC-05SV2 (*1) 2 − 50 25 65.5 2 − 2
NF63-CV/SV/HV Transparent
NF32-SV
3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
TTC-05SV3 NF63-CV/SV/HV
Characteristics
75 25 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)
Dimensions
2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
and
TTC-1SV2 (*1) 2 NF125-CV/SV − 60 40 65.5 2 − 2
3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV
TTC-1SV3 (*2) 90 40 65.5 2 − 2
2, 3 NF125-HV/UV −
Accessories
Accessories
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV
TTC-2SV3 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV 105 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)(*3)(*5)
NF125-SEV/HEV
3 − −
<BTC> <PTC>
D
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 C
A C A C A
B
B
ON ON
of poles
Type name
of circuit Number Cover Sealing Appearance Remarks
MCCB ELCB A B C of covers mounting plate
breaker screw
Cover for
connection block
BTC-03CS2W White 2 − 43.5 6.5 30.5 2 − 2 in the case of
simple rear
NF30-CS connection
case of rear
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV
Detailed
connection
BTC-2SV3 White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 6.5 65.5 2 − 2 type
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-SEV/HEV
NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW
White 2, 3 Quick type
NF630-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW 140 42 (*2) 99.5 2 −
NF400-SEP with MDU (*5) (*5) The cover can be
BTC-4SW3 2
sealed with the
Connection
Installation
Connection
White 3 132.5/
Installation
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW
NV400-SEW/HEW
BTC-4SW4 (*3) Transparent 4 NF630-SW/SEW/HEW 185 42 (*2) 97.5 2 6 −
NV630-SEW
NF400-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5)
Transparent 2, 3 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW
NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) 210 32 (*2) 97.5 2 8 −
Characteristics
−
BTC-8SW3 (*3) NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5)
Dimensions
Transparent 3
146/
NF800-UEW (*4) − 210 32 (*2) 2 4 −
and
194.5
NF800-SEW/HEW
NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) (*5) 280 32 (*2) 97.5 2 10 −
BTC-8SW4 (*3) Transparent 4 NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5)
146/ Screw type
NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW (*4) − 280 32 (*2) 2 6 −
194.5
Accessories
Accessories
Notes *1 For 2-pole ELCB, use BTC for 3-pole circuit breaker. Remarks: 1. PTC-4SW3 can be used as the back terminal covers for NF400-HEW/REW,
*2 Dimension B in Fig. 2 NF630-HEW/REW, NV400-HEW/REW and NV630-HEW.
*3 The covers can be used for plug-in type circuit breakers. Other models 2. For terminal covers for 4-pole circuit breakers not listed above, consult us.
are designed only for rear connection type.
*4 The dimension C is the size on the power supply side and load side.
*5 In the case of installation on the body, it can be fitted only on the power
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
supply side.
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
of poles
Type name
of circuit Number Cover Sealing Appearance Remarks
MCCB ELCB A B C D
breaker of covers mounting
screw plate
NF32-SV
PTC-05SV2 White 2 − 50 6.5 65.5 72 2 2 −
NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF32-SV
White 3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
NF63-CV/SV/HV
PTC-05SV3 75 6.5 65.5 72 2 2 −
White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
Breakers
plug-in type
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV
PTC-2SV3 White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 6.5 65.5 78.5 2 4 − Screw type
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-SEV/HEV
NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW
PTC-4SW3 (*2) Transparent 2, 3 140 42 97.5 − 2 4 − Same as screw type of BTC
NF400-HEW/REW (*1) NV400-HEW/REW (*1)
NF630-HEW/REW (*1) NV630-HEW (*1)
Other
Notes *1 For 2-pole NV, use a terminal cover for 3-pole circuit breaker. Remark: 1. The terminal covers for UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers can be normally combined with
*2 Only for F and V Type Operating Handles (screw type) F Type Operating Handles.
*3 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 75A or less (max. wire size 25 mm2)
*4 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 125A or less (max. wire size 60 mm2)
*5 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2)
Specifications
*6 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 250A or less (max. wire size 150 mm2)
Detailed
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
Insulating Barriers
Characteristics
The insulating barrier enhances the insulation between the
Dimensions
phases of circuit breaker terminals. It also prevents accidents
and
due to conductive foreign matter and dust, and secondary
accidents when isolating a fault current.
Accessories
Accessories
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
Molded Case Earth Leakage UL 489 Listed
DThe
D insulating barrier is available for the models listed in the table below.
Table 28 (“” denotes optional)
Applicable model Connecting method
MCCB ELCB Front Rear Flush plate Plug-in
NF32-SV, NF63-CV NV32-SV, NV63-CV
– – –
NF125-CV, NF100-CVFU NV125-CV, NV100-CVFU
NF63-SV/HV NV63-SV/HV Standard
attachment – – –
NF125-SV/HV NV125-SV/HV
NF125-SEV/HEV, NF125-ZEV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV Standard Standard
NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV attachment – – attachment
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU
Display Unit
Measuring
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
Breakers
NF400-SWU/HWU Standard
– attachment – – –
NF630-SWU/HWU
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW Standard Standard
– attachment – – attachment
NF1600-SEW/SDW Standard
– attachment – – –
Always mount the insulating barrier when it comes with the circuit breaker.
748
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers External Accessories
DInsulating
D Barrier-Front (BA-F)
Table 29 Summary of dimensions
Applicable model Dimensions (mm) Quantity per breaker
Type name Reference diagram
MCCB ELCB A B 2P 3P 4P
NF32-SV NV32-SV
NF63-CV NV63-CV
NF125-CV NV125-CV 1
BAF-05SV 50 59.5 2 3
(*2)
NF63-SV/HV NV63-SV/HV
NF125-SV/HV/UV NV125-SV/HV
NF125-SEV/HEV A
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
BAF-2SV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV 100 59.5 2 4 6
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV/SEV/HEV
NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU
B
NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU
BAF-05SVU 50 59.5 2 4 −
NF125-SVU NV125-SVU
NF125-HVU NV125-HVU
NF250-SVU NV250-SVU
BAF-2SVU 100 59.5 − 4 −
NF250-HVU NV250-HVU
BAF-2SWU NF225-CWU − 100 59.5 − 4 −
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
BAF-4SW 110 98.5 2 4 6
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
132/
BAF-4UW (*1) NF400-UEW(3P) − 110 − 4 −
98.5
BAF-8SW NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 110 98.5 1 2 3
NF400-UEW(4P)
BAF-10SW NF800-UEW, NF1000-SEW − 110 132 1 2 3
NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF400-SWU/HWU − 110 98.5 − 4 −
BAF-4SWU
NF630-SWU/HWU(less than 600A) − 110 98.5 − 2 −
Specifications
Notes *1 The barriers BAF-4UW for the power supply and load sides vary in the dimension B.
*2 Not supplied with ELCB.
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
DInsulating
D Barrier-Rear (BA-B)
Characteristics
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW
A
BAB-8SW NF400-UEW(4P) NV800-SEW/HEW 140 74.5 − 4 6
NF800-UEW B
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Drilling size for use of BA-B (in the case of 3-pole circuit breaker)
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW
NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
Power supply side Note The dimensions in brackets are those for NF400-UEW. Note The dimensions in brackets are those for NF800-UEW.
6-f48
6-f35
5
24 24
24 24
8
10
4 screws M6 or f7 4 screws M6 or f7
225[265]
194[234]
243[290]
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
24 24
24 24
11 11
11 11
44 8 screws M4 70
Other
8 screws M4
Make these eight threaded holes 140
87 Make these eight threaded holes
in addition to the standard holes.
in addition to the standard holes.
Load side
The drilling size drawings show the dimensions viewed from the rear side.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 749
A
NF400-CW/SW NV400-CW/SW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
BAP-4SW 178 74.5
NF630-CW/SW NV630-CW/SW B
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NV630-SEW/HEW 4 6
NF800-CEW/SEW
NV800-SEW/HEW 172 74.5 −
NF800-HEW/REW
BAP-8SW
A
NF1000-SEW
− 215 74.5
NF1250-SEW
B
DEarth
D fault preventing barriers (BA-G)
Specifications
Detailed
Table 32 Summary of dimensions
Applicable model Dimensions (mm) Quantity per breaker
Type name Reference diagram
MCCB ELCB A B 3P
NF32-SV NV32-SV
BAG-05SV3 30 75
NF63-CV/SV/HV NV63-CV/SV/HV
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
BAG-1SV3 NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV 40 90
B
and
NF125-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
BAG-2SV3 NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV 63 105
NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU
A
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
BAG-4SW3 63 164
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
Characteristics
Dimensions
BAG-4UW3 NF400-UEW − 63 164 1
and
BAG-8SW3 NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 110 210
Accessories
BAG-10SW3 − 98 210 Earth fault preventing barrier (3 poles)
Accessories
NF1250-SEW/SDW
BAG-16SW3 NF1600-SEW/SDW − 150 300
Also the earth fault preventing barriers for 2- and 4-pole circuit breakers are available.
handles and Model HL-S to be secured on circuit breaker covers are available. (Use a a 25 11 4
commercially available padlock having the nominal size shown in the right table. If a padlock in b 35 19 5
another size is used, the device may not lock correctly.) c 40 22 or 23 5.5
Table 33 HL
Applicable model Reference
Type name Padlock
MCCB ELCB diagram
C B
HL-05FH NF30-CS − Fig. 4
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF125-SEV/HEV
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
HLN-05SV NV125-CV/SV/HV, NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV A
NF250-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU
Detailed
−
HLF-2SWU NF225-CWU −
HL-4CW (*1) NF400-CW NV400-CW
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW Fig. 2 Fig. 3
HL-4SW (*1) NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW Fig. 2
c
Connection
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV800-SEW/HEW
Installation
Connection
Installation
Notes *1 When a padlock is not used, the device can be used as Remarks: 1. One lot of HL-4CW and HL-4SW contains one piece, and
a lock cover (LC). one lot of others contains 10 pieces.
*2 Place an order for a circuit breaker body combined with 2. HLF types are used for OFF lock, and HLN types for ON
Characteristics
Dimensions
Fig. 4
Table 34 HL-S
Accessories
Accessories
b
Measuring
32
HLS-05SVU (*1) NF100-CVFU 3P NV100-CVFU 3P 32 75 75 − Fig. 5
NF125-SVU/HVU 2P, 3P NV125-SVU/HVU 3P 86
HLS-05SVU (*2) NF125-SVU/HVU 2P, 3P NV125-SVU/HVU 3P 75 86
− 32 Fig. 5
HLS-2SVU (*1) NF250-SVU/HVU 3P NV250-SVU/HVU 3P 32 84 100
HLS-2SWU (*1) NF225-CWU 3P − 3P 84 100 − 32 Fig. 6
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW HEW/REW
HLS-4SW (*3) 2P, 3P, 4P 3P, 4P − − − − − −
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/ Fig. 7
HEW
HLS-4UW (*3) NF400-UEW 3P − − − − − − − −
HLS-8SW (*3) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P, 4P NV800-SEW/HEW 3P, 4P − − − − − −
NF400-UEW 4P Fig. 8
HLS-8UW (*3) − − − − − − − −
NF800-UEW 3P, 4P
Notes *1 For locking in OFF position
*2 A, B, C and D in Figs. 5 and 6 are drilling sizes in front plate.
*3 Terminal covers cannot be fitted.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 751
36 Circuit
Pan head Pan head breaker
1
1
R
R1
F
B
B
cL cL cL
E
A
A
F
B
f5.5
B
B
cL
E
D
C C C
A
A
Load side
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
86 Circuit breaker
72 Circuit breaker
cL cL
Spacer 36
20 Circuit breaker
20
cL cL Pan head screw
116.5
115.5
73.5
71
Line side
109.5
109.5
cL cL
40
48
Specifications
103
cL
128.5
Detailed
E
22.5 Load side
22.5
138 43.5
210 43.5
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
and
Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Fig. 9
Characteristics
Dimensions
and
N
O
(2) Lock Covers (LC) (3) Auxiliary Handles (HT)
Lock Cover is a plug-in lock for indicating These handles facilitate opening and closing circuit
Accessories
Accessories
easily without using padlocks that it is breakers.
prohibited to operate the circuit breaker. Table 36 HT Auxiliary Handles
A “Caution” tag can be hung on it. Dimensions Outline dimension
Type name Applicable model
The covers are red resin moldings. LC-05SW to LC-2SW
A B C D E drawing
HT-4CW
Table 35 LC NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
fD
LCBH1
LC03CS NF30-CS − NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF32-SV NV800-SEW/HEW
E
NF63-CV/SV/HV NF1000-SEW A C
NV32-SV screw
NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV HT-10SW NF1250-SEW/SDW 62 118 34 45 M4
NV63-CV/SV/HV
NF125-SEV/HEV NF1600-SEW/SDW
NV125-CV/SV/HV
LC-05SV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NV125-SEV/HEV LCBH2, 3 Notes *1 HT can be supplied separately. The user can fit it to the circuit breaker. (One lot contains 1 piece.)
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-CV/SV/HV *2 1-pole circuit breakers with 800A frame and 4-pole NF400-UEW come with auxiliary handles as
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV
NV250-SEV/HEV standard accessories.
NF250-SEV/HEV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
LCBH1R (red)
BH-P(1P) −
LCBH1Y (yellow)
LCBH2R (red)
BH-P(2P) −
LCBH2Y (yellow)
(4) Card Holders (CH)
Display Unit
LCBH3R (red)
Measuring
Breakers
BH-P(3P) −
LCBH3Y (yellow)
Cards showing the circuit breaker name and
Remark: 1. One lot of LCBH, LCBL and LCNVL contains 50
pieces, and one lot of other models contains 10
circuit number can be inserted to the card
pieces. holder.
Fit the card holder to the circuit breaker body
or the flush plate in the flush frame. (Although
Other
NV250-SV or below
NF400-SW or above
C
DFront,
D rear and plug-in types
Front, rear and plug-in types Front, rear and plug-in types Breaker mountiong (front) Terminal covers cannot be fitted.
(Panel mounting) (Panel mounting) Type name J Type name F G H Type name F G P
MI-05SVFB2 47.5 MI-05SVFB3 25 111 61 MI-4SWFB3 44 194 190
These interlocks can be locked with padlocks. MI-05SWHFB3 25 111 75
MI-1SVFB2 45 MI-1SVFB3 30 111 61 MI-8SWFB3 70 243 260
MI-2SVFB3 35 126 61
44(55)
22(30)
Center of
mechanical interlock
Mechanical
44
22
Center of Center of
mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock
Mechanical
E
A thickness
Stroke (t1 to 3.2) (*1) (Gap between circuit
breaker and panel)
B
Outside Dimension Diagram 4f (f5.5 and f7.5 Machine this part according to the
43.5
43.5
countersunk (rear) front plate drilling dimensions
45
use M50.8 flat of the main breaker
countersunk head screws (*2)
94.5
H
61
4f (f5.5 and f7.5 countersunk (rear)
15.5 (20)
use M50.8 flat countersunk head screws Machine this part according to the
(*2) front plate drilling dimensions Center of Outside Dimension Diagram
Specifications
CL CL CL CL Circuit breaker
15.5
Center of circuit
31
Center of mechanical
breaker
interlock
50
C
50(80)
CL CL CL
111
G
Center of circuit
breaker
P
D
P
Connection
Installation
Connection
Drilling Dimension Diagram Drilling Dimension Diagram Drilling Dimension Diagram (breaker mount)
Dimensions
Notes *1 For 400A frame or above, use a panel 1.6 to 3.2 thick.
and
*2 When the panel is 2.3 or more thick, countersink the panel (rear side) in f9.5 for the four f5.5 holes.
Breaker mount
diagram (3P)
Reference
Reference
Applicable model Pitch (P) (*1) Dimensions (mm)
diagram
(*3)
Standard Semi-standard Standard Type name
MCCB ELCB (*6) t A B C D E
Type name 2P 3P 3P Type name 4P 2P•3P
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV − 120 − − − − − 15 33 63 47.5 58 MI-05SVFB2
MI-05SV3
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
120
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV − 120 − 130 MI-05SV4 15 33 63 − 58 MI-05SVFB3
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
(*4) (Fig. 3)
NF125-CV/SV − 120 − − − − − 15 33 63 45 58 MI-1SVFB2
NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV MI-05SV3 130 15 33 63 58 MI-1SVFB3
− 120 130 150 MI-1SV4 −
NF125-UV − (*4) 15 33 32.5 58 − −
NF125-SEV/HEV (*2)
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV −
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-CV/SV/HV 120 150 63 MI-2SVFB3 (Fig. 3)
NF250-CV/SV/HV, MI-05SV3 150 180 MI-2SV4 15 33 − 58
NV250-SEV/HEV (*4) (*4)
NF250-SEV/HEV (Fig. 1)
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NF250-UV − 25.5 − −
120
NF225-CWU − MI-05SWU3 − − − − − 15 33 63 − 58 − −
(*4)
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
190 MI-4SW4 250 83.5 MI-4SWFB3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW MI-4SW3 − 210 47.5 33 − 74
NF400-UEW (3P) − − 190 − − (*2) 83.5 −
(Fig. 3)
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 220 − 83.5 MI-8SWFB3
NF400-UEW (4P) MI-8SW3 − 240 MI-8SW4 290 47.5 33 − 74
− − 220 60 −
NF800-UEW
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Appearance
(*1) (*1)
NF30-CS 2, 3P NFS-03CS – – –
2P NFS-05SV2 (*5) –
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV – NFI-05SV
3P NFS-05SV NFW-05SV
2P NFS-1SV2 (*5) –
NF125-CV/SV
3P – NFI-1SV NFW-1SV
NFS-1SV
NF125-HV 2, 3P NFW-1HV
NF125-SGV/LGV
MCCB (*2)
NF160-SGV/LGV
NF250-SGV/LGV NFS-2SV
– NFI-2SV NFW-2SV
NF250-CV/SV, NF125/250-SEV
NF125/160/250-HGV
2, 3P –
Specifications
NF250-HV, NF125/250-HEV
Detailed
NF400-CW – – NFI-4CW NFW-4CW
NF400-SW/SEW – – NFI-4SW NFW-4SW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW – – NFI-6SW NFW-6SW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW – – NFI-8SW NFW-8SW
2P NFS-05SV –
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV
Connection
– NFI-05SV
Installation
Connection
Installation
3P NFS-05SV NFW-05SV
and
NV125-CV/SV NFS-1SV NFW-1SV
– NFI-1SV
NV125-HV NFS-1SV NFW-1HV
ELCB (*2)
Characteristics
NV400-CW – – NFI-4CW NFW-4CW
Dimensions
NV400-SW/SEW – – NFI-4SW NFW-4SW
and
NV630-CW/SW/SEW – – NFI-6SW NFW-6SW
NV800-SEW – – NFI-8SW NFW-8SW
Operating method Direct operation of circuit breaker handle Operation through operating handle mechanism
Standard paint color Box: Munsell 5Y7/1 Operating handle: Munsell N1.5
Accessories
Accessories
Protection class (IEC 60529) IP3X IP4X (*3) IP65 (*4)
Notes *1 The window frame varies depending on the model.
*2 For 1-pole circuit breakers, boxes are not manufactured.
*3 The protection class of NFI-1SV and NFI-2SV is IP3X.
*4 The protection class of NFW-4CW, NFW-4SW, NFW-6SW and NFW-8SW is IP54.
*5 The circuit breaker body is a 2-pole external type.
E
A
E
A
F D
Screw M6 B C
Earth terminal
F D
Earth terminal
B C NFI-05SV
··············································2 pcs. on bottom
K, hole NFI-1SV,NFI-2SV
630A or below: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom
K, hole ···2 pcs. on bottom NFI-4CW to NFI-8SW······ 800A: 3 pcs. on each of top and bottom
H
J
H
J
Fig. 1 Type S Fig. 3 Type I
4 mounting holes fG
3 mounting holes fG (key slot) 4 mounting holes fG
A
E
A
E
A
Specifications
Detailed
Screw M6
Earth terminal F D
F D F D
B C B C
B C
Connection
Installation
H
J
J
H
Dimensions
and
Table 40 Table of variable dimensions (Boxes for 4-pole circuit breakers are not manufactured.) Note) The sockets are applicable to thick steel duct (JIS C 8305) and conduit tube thread.
Accessories
Accessories
NFS-1SV2 NF125-CV/SV
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
NF250-CV/SV/HV, NF125/250-SEV/HEV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NFW-2SV 4 550 355 264 210 510 315 11 75 – 54
W NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
NFW-4CW NF400-CW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 – 70
NFW-4SW NF400-SW/SEW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 – 70
Other
4 mounting holes fG
E
A
E
A
E
A
D
F Earth terminal
C
B F D
F D K, hole
B C
B C Earth terminal NFI-05SV
NFI-1SV ········2 pcs. on bottom
NFI-2SV K socket
630A or below: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom 630A or below: 1 pc. on each of
NFI-4CW to NFI-8SW······· 800A: 3 pcs. on each of top and bottom top and bottom
H
800A: 2 pc. on each of top and
J bottom
H
H
J
J Earth terminal
K, hole: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom
Specifications
E
Detailed
Screw M6
Earth terminal
F D
B C
F D
Connection
B C
Installation
Connection
Installation
K, hole: 2 pcs. on bottom
and
H
Characteristics
Dimensions
K socket, 1 pc. on each of top and bottom
and
Table 41 Table of variable dimensions (Boxes for 4-pole circuit breakers are not manufactured.) Note) The sockets are applicable to thick steel duct (JIS C 8305) and conduit tube thread.
Accessories
Accessories
Box Variable dimensions
Type name Applicable Model
type Fig. A B C D E F G H J K
NFS-05SV2
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 2 260 178 98 78 202 100 7 34 100 28, 35, 44
NFS-05SV
S NFS-1SV2 NV125-CV/SV
2 310 178 98 78 252 100 7 34 100 28, 35, 44
Spring charge type (1) Spring charge type (2) Motor-drive type (2)
Standard paint color: Munsell 5Y7/1 Standard paint color: Munsell 5Y7/1
(1) Specifications
DElectrically
D operated circuit breakers
Table 42 Specify the electrical operation device together with the circuit breaker body.
Electrically operating method Spring charge type (1) Spring charge type (2) Motor-drive type (2)
NF125-SV, NF125-HV
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-SW, NF400-SEW
NF1000-SEW NF1000-SEW
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW
NF1250-SEW NF1250-SEW
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NF630-SW, NF630-SEW
Class S, H and R NF1250-SDW NF1250-SDW
NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW
Specifications
NF1600-SEW NF1600-SEW
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW
Detailed
NF1600-SDW NF1600-SDW
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW
MCCB NF125-RV, NF250-RV
NF400-CW NF400-CW
NF125-CV
Class C NF630-CW − NF630-CW −
NF250-CV
NF800-CEW NF800-CEW
Connection
Connection
Installation
Class U − −
NF250-UV NF800-UEW NF800-UEW
and
NV630-HEW, NF800-SEW
Dimensions
( ): Starting AC
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
current ON 8 8
200/220V 0.5 (2.5) 2.0(4.5) 3.5(7.0)
OFF 0.5 (1.5) 0.5 (1.5)
ON 0.05~0.1(*2) 0.05 0.07 0.3 or less
Operating (self-holding type)
s OFF 0.6 or less (self-holding type)
time 3 or less (self-holding type)
Charge 1.2 or less (self-holding type) − −
Required transformer capacity VA 150 700 400 700
Endurance voltage 1500V 1500V
Notes *1 When the rated operating voltage is 24 V DC or 48 to 60 V DC, specify the voltage. If the voltage is not specified, the circuit breaker will be manufactured for 100 to 240 V
AC and 100 to 250 V DC.
*2 For 24-V DC circuit breakers, the operating time at a voltage of 100% or more is shown.
*3 Models for special voltage (125 V DC or 240 V AC) are not provided with the test button.
Remarks: 1. Flush plate type circuit breakers can be manufactured to order.
2. The models with voltage in parentheses are special voltage products.
3. For the spring charge type (1), use an ON-OFF operating switch for minute load.
4. For the spring charge type (1) The circuit breaker of 3 pole can be used TC-S, TC-L, TTC, BTC and PTC.
In case of 125A frame 4 pole can be used only TC-L.
In case of 250A frame 4 pole can be used TC-S, TC-L, TTC, BTC and PTC.
5. When the body of the spring charge type (1) breaker is an earth leakage alarm breaker, the reset button cannot be pressed. Provide such a circuit breaker with an
external reset or automatic reset system (except for the electronic type).
6. When the body of the motor-drive type (2) or spring charge type (2) has internal accessories, they are normally provided with lead wire terminal blocks.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
7. The types other than the spring charge type (1) do not provide an isolation function.
8. When placing an order for a CE marked product of the spring charge type (1) or spring charge type (2), specify the model name with CE.
9. The switching durability of electrically operated circuit breakers conforms to JIS.
DElectrical
D operation The following models of Electrical Operation Devices are supplied also as separate devices. The user can install
them to the circuit breaker body.
devices (Front connection, rear connection and plug-in types)
Other
(When requiring a motor breaker or a CE marked product, place an order for it together with the circuit breaker body.)
Table 43
Electrically operating method Spring charge type (1)
Applicable NF125-SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
models NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV/HV
Rated NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV/SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV
operating voltage NF250-UV
Compactible to
MDSAD240-NF1SVE MDSAD240-NV1SVE MDSAD240-NF2SVE MDSAD240-NV2SVE MDSAD240-NVE2SVE
100-240VAC/100-250VDC
Specifications
trips. Therefore, when the circuit breaker trips, it is
Detailed
automatically reset. DDCautions for use
However, when the circuit breaker thermally trips, it may q To the ON or OFF operation switch (to be prepared by
not be automatically reset. the user), current only of 24 V DC and 15 to 30 mA
If an automatic reset spring charge type (1) is required, the flows. Use a switch for minute load.
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
user must wire the device in accordance with the external w Operate the operation switch for 0.1 s or more to turn on
and
connection diagram shown in Fig. 1 in (3). and for 20 ms or more to turn off. If it is operated for less
than the time, it may not function.
(2) Installation and connection The wire to the operation switch shall be less than 100 m.
Characteristics
Dimensions
(List of manufacturable) e The power supply module has a built-in switching power
and
Table 44 supply. Therefore, it may interfere with communication
Installation and connection Front Rear Plug-in type devices near the module. In such a case, install a noise
method connection connection
Frame (A) type type (*1)
filter on the input side.
Accessories
Accessories
50~250 (*2)
400~800
r For the automatic reset type, purchase a circuit breaker
1000, 1250 with alarm switch (for minute load), and connect the
1600 − signal circuit (among the terminal numbers S1, S2 and
Notes *1 For ELCB, only 3-pole circuit breakers with a frame size of 125 to 400 A can be
manufactured. S4) as shown in Fig. 1.
JSpring
J charge type (1) AL “a” (alarm switch for minute load)
DDElectrical operation
· When the ON operation switch is closed, the relay will Operation circuit
operate, the motor will be driven, the latch mechanism Electrical
will be released, and the closing spring force will Power supply module operation base
SW1
instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. Operating P1 Power MANUAL/AUTO
selection switch
power
· When the OFF operation switch is closed, the relay will supply
Uc
P2
supply
circuit
M
SW2
Display Unit
Charge/Discharge
Breakers
JMotor-drive
J type (2) Therefore, configure the circuit in such a way that power is
DDElectrical operation disconnected from the electrical operation device before
Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball the circuit breaker is tripped by the non-reset type UVT.
screw to switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset). w Current of about 0.2 A will flow to the ON-OFF switch.
DDManual operation Use an appropriate switch.
The manual operation handle can be used to switch the e Do not apply ON and OFF operation signals
breaker ON and OFF directly. continuously.
DDCautions for use An interval of 0.5 sec or more is necessary between ON
q In the case of a circuit breaker with UVT, if the circuit and OFF signals.
breaker trips owing to the operation of UVT, the r In the case of the automatic reset type device, it will
procedure for re-closing the circuit breaker varies perform the reset operation with an interval of 0.5 sec
depending on the condition of the electrical operation after NFB performs the tripping action.
device before the circuit breaker trips. t The electrical operation device has a built-in pumping
• Tripping in ON state: Reset (OFF). → Turn on. preventing circuit. Therefore, it can operate to turn off the
• Tripping in OFF state: Turn on (idle tripping). → circuit breaker while the ON operation switch is held in
Reset (OFF). → Turn on. the closing state, but it cannot turn on continuously after
(If the circuit breaker cannot be turned on (idle tripping), turning off. To turn on, once turn off the ON operation
reset (OFF) it, and turn on.) switch, and turn on the switch. Do not apply the ON
• When an automatic reset system is configured on a operation signal continuously.
non-reset type circuit breaker with UVT, if UVT is set to y The manual operating handle moves at a high speed
the no-voltage state, the operations to turn off (reset), during electrical operation. Pay attention to the handle.
trip, turn off (reset) and trip are repeated. Keep the operation circuit power supply off during
manual operation.
u In the manual operation, surely turn the manual operating
handle to the position indicated on the nameplate.
Specifications
Detailed
DDOperation circuit ···· For the automatic reset type, the connections indicated with the dashed lines are added.
Operation circuit 1 Operation circuit 2
NF400-CW~NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW
NV400-CW~NV800-HEW
Connection
Installation
Connection
Installation
Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off) Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off)
G (Earth terminal) G X2
and
Z2 (Earth terminal)
(DC-) A1 R3 R4 (DC-) A1
M
Operating R1 R2
Z1 Operating
power power T1
supply LS
supply
A2 Z A2 X4 Y2
X X1 Y1 X1
T1
Characteristics
Y
Z4a Z4b Y1 Y4
Dimensions
ON B T1b
X3 Z1 Z2
T2 M
Z3 R T2 ON B
and
OFF Y2a Y3
Reset C
Z
OFF X
ALa D Reset C T1b LS
Y
D T2a
Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
T2
ALa Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
Accessories
Accessories
JSpring
J charge type (2)
DDElectrical operation
When the ON operation switch is closed, the closing coil will
be excited to release the latch mechanism, and the closing
spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker.
When the OFF operation switch is closed, the relay will
operate to start the motor, turn off (reset) the circuit breaker
and, at the same time, charge the closing spring.
DDManual operation
• Press the ON button, and the latch mechanism will be
released, and the closing spring force will Internal structure of
instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. spring charge type Internal structure of motor-drive type
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
25 25
125A 14~50mm2
75
87
250A 22~125mm2
25
25
A
75
Mtg. holes 4.5 dia. A
75
4.5
75
37.5
Solderless
terminal for 86.5
wire size
22~60mm2
21
154
21
164
Specifications
6 BPA-1106 BPA-2106 – BPA-3106 – NT-06
Detailed
9 BPA-1109 – – – – –
12 BPA-1112 BPA-2112 – BPA-3112 – NT-12
15 BPA-1115 – – – – –
18 BPA-1118 BPA-2118 BPA-2218 BPA-3118 BPA-3218 NT-18
Connection
Installation
Connection
24 – BPA-2124 BPA-2224 BPA-3124 BPA-3224 NT-24
Installation
30 – – BPA-2230 – BPA-3230 NT-30
and
36 – – BPA-2236 – BPA-3236 NT-36
42 BPA-3242 NT-42
Characteristics
DMounting
D plate (for BH)
Dimensions
and
5.5ø mtg. holes BH MCB (mm) 14
13.5 16 38.5 11
Breakoff undercut
(63.3) 36
Line side
11
5
13
9.5
22.5
11
33
34
Accessories
Mounting pitch 102
Accessories
( ) : 3P 10
86
57
116
102
a) Lock cover for b) Lock cover for c) Handle cap d) Handle cap for
1-pole units 2-pole, 3-pole for 1-pole 2-pole units
22.5
Line side
Breakers for such circuits can be locked by simply installing Lock cover in place Lock cover in place
a lock cover on the handle. (1-pole unit) (2-pole unit)
Table 45 DExternal
D dimension
Number of poles Applicable model IEC 35-mm rail
Type name Fig. mounting adapter
of circuit breaker MCCB ELCB
DIN-03CS 2, 3 NF30-CS – Fig. 1
3
(Note1)
100
35
35
NF32-SV NV32-SV
DIN-05SV 2, 3 Fig. 2
NF63-CV/SV/HV NV63-CV/SV/HV 3.5
NF30-CS Model
Rated current In (A)
Number of poles 2
NF30-CS
3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500
Rated short-circuit
500V −
IEC 60947-2
AC 415V 1.5/1.5
(Icu/Ics)
380V 1.5/1.5
240V 2.5/2
Standard Attached Parts
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 (2pcs)
(Front connection)
NF30-CS
Operating Characteristics
Specifications
Detailed
3h
2h
1h Types
NF30-CS
40min
20min
Connection
Installation
10min
and
6min
4min
2min
Characteristics
Characteristics
1min
Dimensions
Dimensions
40s
30s
and
Max.
20s
Operating time
10s
6s
4s
Accessories
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s Min.
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.2s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
×100% of rated current
300
temperature
change rate (%)
250
Operating time
200
2-pole
Display Unit
150
Measuring
Breakers
100
3-pole 80
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: 1. Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be Ambient temperature (°C)
produced upon request.
Other
External Accessories
Accessories Type name
Terminal cover
76.5
84
64
54
96
f8.5
f5.5
f5
6
10
23.5 47 23.5
12.5 (max.)
28
45 67.5
49 2-pole 3-pole
Conductor thickness t=3 max.
2-pole 3-pole 3 52 Drilling plan
Busbar drilling for
67 direct connection
Rear connection
3-pole
M40.7 taps 2-pole
or f5 Breaker
Mtg plate t max. =3.2 Breaker
R2
Specifications
Detailed
20
45 (min)
25 (min)
76.5
76.5
84
5
18
38.5
58.5
23.5 23.5 20
Connection
ø14
Installation
55 47
Mounting base Front-plate cutout
and
8
Breaker mtg
M6 screw
M40.7 screw 2-pole 3-pole 1mm clearance on
each side of handle
2-pole 3-pole
Drilling plan
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
IEC Rail Mounting Adapter
35mm IEC-rail adapter
for installation
Accessories
5
100
35
52
Installation utensil
for 35mm IEC-rail 55
2-pole 3-pole 58
70
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
762 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF32-SV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF32-SV NF63-CV NF63-SV NF63-HV
3 4 (5) 6 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 10 (15) 16 20 25
Rated current In (A) (15) 16 20 25 16 20 25 (30) 32 16 20 25 (30) 32 (30) 32 40 50
NF63-CV
(30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 40 50 (60) 63 (60) 63
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 690
NF63-SV
690V – – – 2.5/2.5
500V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
NF63-HV
Rated 440V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8
short-circuit AC 415V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 10/8
capacity
(kA) 380V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 10/8
230V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
DC 250V (*1) 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) (*2)
Notes *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown at the bottom of page 672.
*2 Supplied with NF63-SV and NF63-HV.
NF63-SV
Specifications
Operating Characteristics
Detailed
4h 4h 4h
2h Operating characteristics 2h 2h
Operating characteristics
NF32-SV 3A-6A
1h 1h NF32-SV 10A-32A 1h Operating characteristics
NF63-CV 3A-6A
NF63-CV 10A-32A NF63-CV 40A-63A
Connection
NF63-SV 3A-6A
Installation
and DC850±A170A.
Characteristics
Max.
Dimensions
Operating time
Operating time
Dimensions
Operating time
30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
Max. total breaking time Max. total breaking time
and
AC
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
AC DC
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
DC AC
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
DC
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
120
2-pole 110
100
3, 4-pole 90
(Rated ambient 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
temperature 40°C)
Breakers
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
2P F-05SV2 2, 3P MI-05SV3
F Mechanical interlock MI
Other
3, 4P F-05SV 4P MI-05SV4
Operating handle
2P V-05SV2 2P TCS-05SV2
V Small TC-S
3, 4P V-05SV 3P TCS-05SV3
LC LC-05SV TCL-05SV2
2P
HLF-05SV TCL-05SV2L
Handle lock device HL (*1)
HLN-05SV Large TC-L TCL-05SV3
3P
HL-S HLS-05SV TCL-05SV3L
Terminal
Note *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. 4P TCL-05SV4
cover
2P TTC-05SV2
Skeleton TTC
3P TTC-05SV3
2P BTC-05SV2
Rear BTC
3P BTC-05SV3
2P PTC-05SV2
Plug-in PTC
3P PTC-05SV3
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters DIN-05SV
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 763
50
Applicable wire size:
2
f1.6 to 22mm
(for M50.8 screw)
111
130
112
84
50
f4.5
f5.5
Trip button (f8.5 for 60A and 63A)
22 25 45
8
25
f8.5
Neutral pole 25
25 50 75 61
12.5 max.
50 75 100 68
(16 max. for 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
(Conductor
4 72 60A and 63A) thickness
90 t=4 max.)
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling Drilling plan
for direct connection
Specifications
Rear connection
Detailed
2-pole 4-pole
Connection
Installation
Mounting plate M40.7 taps 3-pole
Mounting base or f5
and
t = 3.2 max.
43 (44 for 60A and 63A) Breaker Breaker
Characteristics
27 min.
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
8
112
112
111
R1
and
52
8
Accessories
27 min. f14
25 25 50 70
68 42 25 50 75
(46 for 60A and 63A) 1.0mm clearance on each side
72 of the handle frame
Plug-in
3-pole 4-pole
Mounting
plate 80 105
M50.8 Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in
Terminal block mounting screw 50 75
terminal block
25
54
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
54
7
Other
25
M6 screw
25 50
21 55 f6.5 f6 hole
57 82 107
89 30 or M50.8 taps
Details of
terminal Conductor drilling
2-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 2-pole and 3-pole models are available for NF32-SV and NF63-CV.
764 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF125-CV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF125-CV NF125-SV NF125-HV
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 (15) 16 20 (30) 32
50 (60) 63 (75) 80
Rated current In (A) 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 40 50 (60) 63 (75)
100 125
NF125-SV
80 100 125 80 100 125
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690
NF125-HV
690V – 8/8 10/8
500V 7.5/4 18/18 30/23
Rated 440V 10/5 25/25 50/38
short-circuit AC 415V 10/5 30/30 50/38
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 10/5 30/30 50/38
capacity
(kA) 380V 10/5 30/30 50/38
230V 30/15 50/50 100/75
DC 250V (*1) 7.5/4 40/40 –
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(front connection) (*2) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Notes *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products.
If wired as shown at the bottom of page 672, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively.
*2 Supplied with NF125-SV and NF125-HV.
NF125-SV
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Connection
Installation
2min 2min
Dimensions
Operating time
Operating time
30s
and
30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
Max. total breaking time Max. total breaking time
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s Min.
2s 2s
Max. total breaking time
Accessories
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
AC AC
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
DC DC
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
AC
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
DC
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 6070 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
120
2-pole 110
100
3, 4-pole 90
(Rated ambient 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
temperature 40°C)
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
Other
2P F-1SV2 2, 3P MI-05SV3
F Mechanical interlock MI
3, 4P F-1SV 4P MI-05SV4
Operating handle
2P V-1SV2 2P TCS-1SV2
V Small TC-S
3, 4P V-1SV 3P TCS-1SV3
LC LC-05SV 2P TCL-1SV2
HLF-05SV Large TC-L 3P TCL-1SV3
Handle lock device HL (*1)
HLN-05SV 4P TCL-1SV4
Terminal
HL-S HLS-05SV 2P TTC-1SV2
cover Skeleton TTC
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. 3P TTC-1SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage. 2P BTC-1SV2
Rear BTC
3P BTC-1SV3
2P PTC-1SV2
Plug-in PTC
3P PTC-1SV3
Electrical operation device (*2)
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 765
Insulation barrier
Mounting hole (removable) Solderless terminal
M8 screw for wire size
24 Breaker
14 to 2/0AWG CU/AL
50
Wire connection
111
130
112
84
50
f4.5
f8.5
8
Trip
button 30 30
f8.5
30 22 30 45
61 M40.7 taps
60 60 90
Neutral pole 68 or f5
19 max.
90 120 4 72 Comb conductor 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
16.5 max.
90
(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Rear connection
Detailed
4-pole 4-pole
Connection
Installation
Mounting base 3-pole 2-pole 3-pole
and
Breaker Breaker
102 Stud can be 2-pole
Mounting plate
52 rotated 90°
t = 3.2 max.
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
R1
R1
112
111
52
and
8
112
15 connection
allowance
16
30 28
30 30 30
Accessories
f18 57 86
8.5
5 60 90
2.5 M8 bolt M40.7 breaker
mounting screw
60 M40.7 taps 1.0mm clearance on each side
15 2.5 or f5
Insulation of the handle frame
90
Plug-in
3-pole 4-pole
Mounting M50.8 95 125
plate Terminal block mounting nut Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in 60 90
or screw mounted directly
terminal block
30
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
56
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
20 max.
5.5
85
12
Other
56
30 30 60
M8 screw
21 f8.5
65 67 97 127
89 30
2-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Details of f6 hole
Conductor drilling
terminal or M50.8 taps
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. The 2-pole models of NF125-HV are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2-and 3-pole models are available for NF125-CV.
766 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF125-UV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF125-UV
15 20 30 40 50
Rated current In (A)
60 75 100 125
Number of poles 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
690V 10/10
Rated short-circuit
440V 200/200
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 200/200
(Icu/Ics) 400V 200/200
380V 200/200
230V 200/200
DC 250V −
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(front connection) M4×0.7×73 (2 and 3P: 2pcs)
NF125-UV
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Connection
1h Operating characteristics 1h 1h
Installation
Operating characteristics
NF125-UV 15A-30A Operating characteristics
30min 30min 30min NF125-UV 125A
NF125-UV 40A-100A
and
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
and
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG
direction
130
Rated ambient
temperature
120
110
100
90
(Rated ambient 80
temperature 40°C) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
Other
F F-1UV 2, 3P MI-05SV3
Operating handle Mechanical interlock MI
V V-1UV 4P MI-05SV4
Lock cover LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 3P TCS-1SV3
HLF-05SV 3P TCL-1SV3
HL (*1) Large TC-L
Handle lock device HLN-05SV Terminal 4P TCL-1SV4
HL-S HLS-05SV cover Skeleton TTC 3P TTC-1SV3
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Rear BTC 3P BTC-1SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage.
Plug-in PTC 3P PTC-1SV3
Electrical operation device (*2)
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 767
Breaker
Mounting hole M8 screw
24
61
f8.5
173
191
172
84
50
130
8
Trip 22 30 45 19 max. (Comb conductor 30 30
f4.5
f8.5
button 16.5 max.)
60 90 61 (Conductor thickness t=4 max.)
M40.7 taps
90 120 Neutral pole or f5
68
Conductor drilling
4 72 for direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
3-pole 4-pole
90 Drilling plan
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
4-pole
Breaker
Connection
Installation
102 3-pole
Mounting plate 4-pole
and
t = 3.2 max. 52 Stud can be
rotated 90° Breaker
3-pole
Characteristics
Characteristics
4.5
Dimensions
Dimensions
173
172
Mounting base
and
173
52
R1
8
15 Connection
allowance
16
28
Accessories
30 30 f18
86
8.5
5 60 30
2.5 M8 bolt
60 M40.7 breaker 90
15 2.5 mounting screw M40.7 taps 1.0mm clearance on each side
90 or f5 of the handle frame
68 54.5 15
Plug-in
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
11
16.5 max.
144.5
231
141
115
177
12
56
Other
5.5
21 60 30
f8.5 f6 hole
M8 screw
95 97 or M50.8 taps
89 30
Conductor drilling
Drilling plan
Details of
terminal
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
768 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF250-CV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF250-CV NF250-SV NF250-HV
(*1) (100) (*1) (100)
125 150 160 175
Rated current In (A) 125 150 175 200 125 150 160 175
200 225 250
NF250-SV
225 250 200 225 250
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690
NF250-HV
690V – 8/8 10/8
500V 10/8 30/30 50/38
Rated 440V 15/12 36/36 65/65
short-circuit AC 415V 25/19 36/36 70/70
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 25/19 36/36 75/75
capacity
(kA) 380V 25/19 36/36 75/75
230V 36/27 85/85 100/100
DC (*1) 250V 15/12 20/20 (300V) 40/40 (300V)
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Note *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products.
If wired as shown at the bottom of page 672, three-pole NF250-CV can be used for up to 400VDC, three-pole NF250-SV
and NF250-HV up to 500VDC and four-pole products up to 600VDC.
NF250-SV
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
2h Operating characteristics 2h
Connection
Operating characteristics
Installation
2min 2min
Max. Max.
Dimensions
Dimensions
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
and
20s 20s
Max. total breaking time Max. total breaking time
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
Accessories
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
AC
0.2s 0.2s
AC
0.1s 0.1s
DC DC
0.05s 0.05s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.02s 0.02s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
direction 130
temperature
Current rating (%)
110
100
90
(Rated ambient 80
temperature 40°C) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Display Unit
Breakers
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
Other
F F-2SV 2, 3P MI-05SV3
Operating handle Mechanical interlock MI
V V-2SV 4P MI-2SV4
LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 2, 3P TCS-2SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Handle lock device HL (*1) 2, 3P
HLN-05SV Large TC-L TCL-2SV3L
Terminal
HL-S HLS-2SV 4P TCL-2SV4
cover
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Skeleton TTC 2, 3P TTC-2SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage.
Rear BTC 2, 3P BTC-2SV3
Plug-in PTC 2, 3P PTC-2SV3
Electrical operation device (*2)
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 769
30
M8 bolt
Insulation barrier (hex-socket) 24
(removable) Breaker
Mounting hole
Solderless terminal
100
for wire size
125-175A 14-95mm2
200-250A 70-125mm2
Wire connection
144
165
102
126
.5
50
f8
f4.5
10
1
C
C
1
Trip button 25 max.
f8.5
100
45 Or 35 35
22 35 .5
61 f8
M40.7 taps
Neutral pole or f5
70 105 68
9
4 72 25 max. 3-pole 4-pole
105 140
92 (Conductor thickness
3-pole 4-pole t=7 max.)
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
4-pole
Connection
Mounting base
Installation
4-pole 3-pole
and
Mounting plate Stud can be
rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
t = 3.2 max. 3-pole
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
8
144
144
126
52
R
Connection
22 allowance
20
Accessories
M40.7 breaker
mounting screw 32.5
6 f24 35
15
35 35 100
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps
Insulation
M8 bolt tube or f5
Plug-in
4-pole 145
3-pole 110
Plug-in
Mounting terminal block
34.5
Connection
Display Unit
Measuring
56.5
Breakers
allowance
24
190
165
80
144
54
11
70
6
151
56.5
Other
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105 f6 hole
terminal block 3-pole 70
31 107 142 or M50.8 taps
mounting screw Insulation
4-pole 105 Stud attachable in this
89 30 barrier direction only
112 3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2-pole and 3-pole models are available for NF250-CV.
770 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF250-UV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF250-UV
125 150 175
Rated current In (A)
200 225 250
Number of poles 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
690V 15/15
Rated short-circuit
440V 200/200
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 200/200
(Icu/Ics) 400V 200/200
380V 200/200
230V 200/200
DC 250V −
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (2 and 3P: 2pcs)
(front connection)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NF250-UV
Specifications
Operating Characteristics
Detailed
4h 4h
2h 2h
Connection
1h
NF250-UV 125A-225A NF250-UV 250A
30min 30min
and
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
Max. Max.
Characteristics
Characteristics
1min
Dimensions
1min
Dimensions
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
and
20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
Accessories
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
Max. total Max. total
0.1s breaking time 0.1s breaking time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of rated current × 100% of rated current
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG 130
direction
Rated ambient
temperature
120
110
100
90
(Rated ambient 80
temperature 40°C) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
External Accessories
Other
M8 bolt
Insulation barrier
(hex-socket)
Mounting hole (removable) 24 Breaker
28
100
75
75
219
240
201
f8.5
102
50
165
165
f4.5
10
100
f8.5
45
Trip button 35 35
23 max. M40.7 taps
22 35 61
or f5
Neutral pole (Conductor thickness t=7 max.)
70 105 68
3-pole 4-pole
4 72 Conductor drilling
105 140
for direct connection Drilling plan
92
3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
4-pole
Connection
Installation
t = 3.2 max. base Breaker Breaker
rotated 90°
and
4-pole
3-pole
73
11.5
Characteristics
108
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
219
201
219
8
and
Connection
R1
52
allowance
20
22
Accessories
15 6 M40.7 breaker f24 35 32.5
mounting screw
15 f9 70 100
35 35
M8 bolt
68 71 Insulation tube M40.7 taps
105 70 105 1.0mm clearance on each side
or f5
72 106 of the handle frame
Plug-in
Connection allowance
34.5
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
M5
24
terminal block
219
155
129
265
mounting screw
11
70
151
6
56.5
20
15
Other
21 f9
f6 hole or M5 taps
28
70 M8 bolt 70
31 Insulation
89 30 barrier 105 Stud attachable in this 107
direction only
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
772
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Detailed
(front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 672, three-pole models can be used for up to 500VDC, and four-pole
models for up to 600VDC.
Connection
Installation
and
Operating Characteristics
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
4h 4h 4h 4h
Operating Characteristic Curves
Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristic Curves
2h 2h 2h 2h Thermal-Adjustable types
Thermal-Adjustable types Thermal-Adjustable types Thermal-Adjustable types NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV
Current setting Ir = 70-100A(Rated current In=100A)
1h 1h 1h 1h Current setting Ir = 80-125A(Rated current In=125A)
NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-RGV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV Current setting Ir = 90-125A(Rated current In=125A)
30min Current setting Ir = 16-20A(Rated current In=20A) 30min Current setting Ir = 32-40A(Rated current In=40A) 30min Current setting Ir = 40- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) 30min NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV
Current setting Ir = 35-50A(Rated current In=50A) Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A)
20min Current setting Ir = 20-25A(Rated current In=25A) 20min 20min Current setting Ir = 45- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) 20min NF250-SGV NF250-LGV NF250-HGV
NF125-RGV 14min
14min Current setting Ir = 25-32A(Rated current In=32A) 14min Current setting Ir = 32-40A(Rated current In=40A) Current setting Ir = 56- 80A(Rated current In= 80A) 14min Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A)
10min 10min Current setting Ir = 40-50A(Rated current In=50A)
10min Current setting Ir = 63-100A(Rated current In=100A) 10min Current setting Ir = 140-200A(Rated current In=200A)
Current setting Ir = 160-250A(Rated current In=250A)
lnstantaneous trip NF125-RGV Current setting Ir = 175-250A(Rated current In=250A)
6min
Accessories
6min current 6min Current setting Ir = 50- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) 6min NF125-RGV
4min AC DC 4min lnstantaneous trip
current 4min Current setting Ir = 63- 80A(Rated current In= 80A) 4min Current setting Ir = 80-100A(Rated current In=100A)
Current setting Ir = 100-125A(Rated current In=125A)
600A±120A 850A±170A NF250-RGV
2min 2min AC DC
2min 2min Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A)
Max. 600A±120A 850A±170A
Max. lnstantaneous trip Current setting Ir = 160-200A(Rated current In=200A)
Current setting Ir = 200-250A(Rated current In=250A)
1min 1min 1min current ratio
1min
AC DC
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
lnstantaneous trip
xln(%) xln(%)
30s 30s 30s 1000±200 1300±260 30s current ratio
AC DC
20s 20s 20s 20s xln(%) xln(%)
Max. 1000±200 1300±260
10s 10s 10s 10s
Min. Min. Min.
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Max. total
breaking time
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
2s 2s 2s 2s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s Max. total 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
breaking time
AC AC Max. total AC Max. total
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s breaking 0.2s breaking
AC DC DC time DC time
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
DC
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
110
100
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
90
80
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient temperature 40°C)
Other
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-2SV 2, 3P MI-05SV3
Operating handle Mechanical interlock MI
V V-2SV 4P MI-2SV4
LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 2, 3P TCS-2SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Handle lock device HL (*1) 2, 3P
HLN-05SV Large TC-L TCL-2SV3L
Terminal
HL-S HLS-2SV 4P TCL-2SV4
cover
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Skeleton TTC 2, 3P TTC-2SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage. Rear BTC 2, 3P BTC-2SV3
Plug-in PTC 2, 3P PTC-2SV3
Electrical operation device (*2)
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 773
30
Insulating barrier 24
M8 bolt
(removable) Breaker
(hex-socket)
Mounting hole
100
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125-175A 14-95mm2
200-250A 70-125mm2
Wire connection
144
165
102
126
50
.5
f8
f4.5
10
1
C
Thermal
C
1
Trip button Adj
f8.5
25 max.
100
Button 45 35
Or
35
22 35 61 .5 M40.7 taps
f8
70 Neutral pole 68 or f5
105
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
9
105 140 25 max.
92
(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling Drilling plan
for direct connection
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
4-pole
Connection
Installation
Mounting 4-pole 3-pole
and
Stud can be
base Breaker Breaker
Mounting plate rotated 90°
3-pole
t max. = 3.2
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
8
144
144
126
52
R
Connection
22 allowance
20
M40.7 breaker
Accessories
mounting screw
f24 32.5
6 35
15
f9 35 35
15 70 Insulating tube 100
M8 bolt M40.7 taps
or f5
Plug-in
4-pole 145
24 connection allowance
Mounting plate
Display Unit
Measuring
56.5
Breakers
190
165
80
144
54
11
70
6
151
56.5
Other
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105 f6mm hole
terminal block 3-pole 70 or M50.8 taps
31 mounting screw 107 142
Insulating 4-pole 105 Stud attachable in this
89 30
barrier direction only
112 3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
774 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF125-SEV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV
Rated current In (A) 32 63 125 32 63 125 160 250 160 250
NF125-HEV
16-32 32-63 16-32 32-63 80-160 80-160
Current setting Ir (A)
63-125 63-125 125-250 125-250
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
NF250-SEV
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690
690V 8/8 10/8 8/8 10/8
500V 30/30 50/38 30/30 50/38
NF250-HEV Rated
short-circuit
breaking
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
440V
415V
36/36
36/36
65/65
70/70
36/36
36/36
65/65
70/70
NF125-SEV
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
Connection
Installation
and
10h 10h
5h Operating characteristics 5h Operating characteristics
1h 1h
Dimensions
30min 6
LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 32-63 63A 30min 6
LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 125-250 250A
20min 63-125 125A 20min 670s (TL = 100s set)
14min 670s (TL = 100s set) 14min
and
10min 540s (TL = 80s set) 10min 540s (TL = 80s set)
6min 400s (TL = 60s set) 6min 400s (TL = 60s set)
4min 80s (TL = 12s set) 4min 80s (TL = 12s set)
2min 2min
1min LTD operating time TL 1min LTD operating time TL
Operating time
Operating time
6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20%
30s (at 200%) 30s (at 200%)
Accessories
20s 20s
6 6
I t OFF I t OFF
10s 10s
STD pickup current Is STD pickup current Is
5s Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 5s Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4
–5–6–7–8–10) ±15% –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.5s STD operating time Ts
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.3±0.06s 0.3±0.06s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
130
temperature
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT 120
direction
100
Breakers
External Accessories
Other
30
Insulation barrier M8 bolt
(removable) (hex-socket) 24 Solderless terminal
for wire size Breaker
Mounting hole
125-175A 14-95mm2
100
200-250A 70-125mm2
Wire connection
Trip button
.5
f8
10
144
165
102
126
50
1
C
f4.5
C
1
25 max.
Trip characteristics
100
Or
45
f8.5
selector f8.5 35 35
22 35
9
61
Neutral pole M40.7 taps
70 105 68 or f5
4 72 25 max.
105 140 3-pole 4-pole
92 (Conductor thickness
t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling
for direct connection Drilling plan
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
4-pole
Connection
Installation
Mounting plate Mounting Stud can be 4-pole 3-pole
and
t=3.2 max. base rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
3-pole
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
8
and
144
126
144
52
R
22 connection
allowance
20
M40.7 breaker
Accessories
mounting screw 35 32.5
15 6 f24
35 35
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps 100
Insulation
M8 bolt 70 or f5
68 71 tube 105
105 1.0mm clearance on each side
Plug-in
24 connection allowance
4-pole 145
Plug-in 3-pole 110
34.5
Breakers
190
165
54
80
11
144
70
6
151
56.5
Other
15
20
28
21 M5 f9 70 105
M8 bolt f6 hole
terminal block 3-pole 70 or M50.8 taps
31 mounting screw 107 142
Insulation 4-pole 105
89 30 barrier Stud attachable in this
3-pole 105 4-pole
112 direction only 3-pole
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
776 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF400-CW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF400-CW NF400-SW
Rated current In (A) 250 300 350 400
NF400-SW
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690
690V − 10/10
NF400-SW
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
Specifications
2h 2h
Detailed
4min 4min
and
2min 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Max. Max.
30s 30s
Characteristics
20s 20s
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
10s 10s
and
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
Accessories
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max. total 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Rated ambient
120
110
100
(*1)
90
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Other
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-4S 2, 3P TCL-4SW3
Operating handle Large TC-L
V V-4S 4P TCL-4SW4
2, 3P MI-4SW3 Terminal 2, 3P TTC-4SW3
Mechanical interlock MI Skeleton TTC
4P MI-4SW4 cover 4P TTC-4SW4
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4CW, HT-4SW 2, 3P BTC-4SW3
Rear BTC
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker 4P BTC-4SW4
unit. HL HL-4CW, HL-4SW
Handle lock device
HL-S HLS-4SW
3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
4P
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 777
94.5
Insulating barrier (removable)
44
28
Conductor thickness 8 4-pole
t=8 max.
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
47
92
f12.5
Trip button
f7
25
39
f10.5
44 M6 tap or f7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
f14 97 Conductor drilling
56
M12 bolt 103 for direct connection
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each side of the
112 185 3-pole 4-pole handle frame.
140 196 155 (NF400-SW) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134 (NF400-CW)
3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Rear connection barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
Stud can be rotated 90° 4-pole Line side
Breaker Groove for reducing
Mounting plate
Connection
Installation
3-pole heat by overcurrent 6-f35
and
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or f7
allowance 4-M6 tap or f7
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
Characteristics
Characteristics
25 20 20
Dimensions
Dimensions
26
83
128
24 24
and
M6 screw for
mounting breaker f35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
f13 Add these tapped holes in
113 M12 bolt 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 130.5 87
Accessories
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block 3-pole
Breaker
35
55
225
135
163
mounting screw
24
24
8
79
55
Display Unit
Measuring
160
Breakers
f10
15
28
28
Drilling plan
Other
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
778 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF400-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW
200-400
Rated current In (A)
adjustable
NF400-REW
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
Front Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Standard attached parts
Rear
Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
connection
NF400-SEW
Specifications
Detailed
NF400-SEW
2h NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
1h
Current setting Rated Current
LTD operating time Ir: 200-400A In: 400A
30min (*1)
Characteristics
at 125%
Characteristics
20min (Adjustable)
Dimensions
Dimensions
mounting.
Accessories
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip
2s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
Continuous load current (%)
Rated ambient
130
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
temperature
Current (% of Ir) 70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)
Ambient temperature (°C)
External Accessories
Display Unit
Measuring
Rear BTC
Notes *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the 4P BTC-4SW4 (*3)
breaker unit. HL HL-4SW
*2 This is for NF400-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NF400-HEW/REW, use Handle lock device
PTC-4SW3. HL-S HLS-4SW
*3 This is for NF400-SEW/HEW. 3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
4P
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 779
94.5
Insulating barrier (removable)
44
28 Conductor thickness
8 4-pole
t=8 max.
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
59
92
f12.5
f7
Trip button
25
39
f10.5
44 M6 tap or f7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
f14
97 Conductor drilling
56
M12 bolt 103 for direct connection
51 168 5 107
3-pole 4-pole 1.0mm clearance on each side of
112 185 155 the handle frame.
140 196
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
4-pole Groove for reducing Line side
Connection
Installation
Stud can be Breaker heat by overcurrent
Mounting plate rotated 90° 3-pole 6-f35
and
8
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or f7
allowance 4-M6 tap or f7
194
225
225
225
194
265
Characteristics
Characteristics
14
Dimensions
Dimensions
25 20 20
26
83
and
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker f35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
f13 Add these tapped holes in
113 M12 bolt 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
8 positions to standard boring.
Accessories
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 3-pole Breaker
35
55
225
135
163
mounting screw
24
Display Unit
Measuring
24
Breakers
8
79
55
160
f10
15
28
28
18 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181
87
f13 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Other
Drilling plan
780 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF400-UEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF400-UEW
200-400
Rated current In (A)
adjustable
Number of poles 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Front Mounting screw: M6×65 (2pcs), M6×174 (2pcs)
Standard attached parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (2pcs), M6×181 (2pcs)
connection
NF400-UEW
30min (Adjustable)
Installation
at 125%
20min
14min 1000s(TL=150s set)
and
1min Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side
Dimensions
Operating time
Dimensions
30s mounting.
and
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
130
Rated ambient
Continuous load current (%)
0.05s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-4U Large TC-L 3P TCL-4SW3
Operating handle Terminal
V V-4U Skeleton TTC 3P −
cover
Mechanical interlock MI MI-4SW3 Rear BTC 3P BTC-4SW3
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW HL HL-4SW
Handle lock device
Display Unit
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker HL-S HLS-4UW
Measuring
Breakers
t=8 max. 8
Breaker
43
f7
26
Mounting hole
f12.5
R6
47
31
297
11.5
234
257
102
92
156
f12.5
f7
Trip button
25
39
f10.5
43
44 M6 tap or f7
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
141 118
16
191.5
f14 Conductor drilling
51 194
M12 bolt for direct connection 1.0mm clearance on each side
28 200
of the handle frame.
112 5 204 3-pole
140 3-pole 252 Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
Groove for reducing Line side
Connection
Breaker
Installation
Mounting plate heat by overcurrent
Stud can be rotated 90° 6-f35
and
8
24 24
8
M6 screw or f7
Connection 4-M6 tap or f7
234
265
allowance
Characteristics
305
Characteristics
265
234
265
Dimensions
Dimensions
25 20 20
and
14
24 24
26
83
128
11 11
8-M4 screw
M6 screw for f35 Add these tapped holes in
10 44
f13 mounting breaker 44 8 positions to standard boring.
210 8
Accessories
M12 bolt 87
87
87 Insulation tube
Load side
3-pole Drilling plan
Plug-in
Mounting angle
35
Mounting angle
max. 203
Connection
320
297
265
175
160
28
f10
15
28 Stud attachable
18 in this direction only
44
218 f13 87 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 3-pole
3-pole Drilling plan
Other
782 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF630-CW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF630-CW NF630-SW
Rated current In (A) 500 600 630
NF630-SW
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690
690V − 10/10
NF630-SW
Operating Characteristics
Specifications
4h 4h
Detailed
2h 2h
10min 10min
Installation
6min 6min
and
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Max. Max.
Characteristics
Characteristics
30s 30s
Operating time
Operating time
Dimensions
Dimensions
20s 20s
and
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
Accessories
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max.total 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time interrupting time
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.05s 0.05s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
AL AX SHT or UVT
temperature
direction
Current rating (%)
110
(*1) 100
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
90
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Ambient temperature (°C)
Other
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-4S 2, 3P TCL-4SW3
Operating handle Large TC-L
V V-4S 4P TCL-4SW4
2, 3P MI-4SW3 Terminal 2, 3P TTC-4SW3
Mechanical interlock MI Skeleton TTC
4P MI-4SW4 cover 4P TTC-4SW4
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 2, 3P BTC-4SW3
Rear BTC
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker 4P BTC-4SW4
unit. HL HL-4SW
Handle lock device
HL-S HLS-4SW
3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
4P
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 783
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL Conductor 4-pole
thickness 44
28
t=10 max. 8 30 3-pole
f10.5
CL
110
Breaker
16
Conductor thickness t=10 max. CL
Conductor drilling
43
for direct connection
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
CL CL
102
92
59
f12.5
Trip button
f7
39
CL
194
Neutral pole 44 118
97
f14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or f7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
3-pole heat-reducing slit
Connection
rotated 90° 6-f35
Installation
CL CL
24 24
and
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or f7 4-M6 tap
or f7
225
265
CL
194
225
225
194
CL
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
14
25 20 20
Dimensions
and
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13
Accessories
Insulating tube 87 Add these tapped
113 M12 bolt 87 43.5
44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center and
neutral poles
3-pole 4-pole Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance
225
280
CL M8 terminal block CL
163
135
25
mounting screw
25
Display Unit
Measuring
10
93
Breakers
55
28
160
f10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
784 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF630-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW
300-630
Rated current In (A)
adjustable
NF630-REW
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
Front Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Standard attached parts
Rear
Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
connection
NF630-SEW
Specifications
Detailed
5h Operating characteristics
NF630-SEW
and
2h NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
1h
LTD operating time
Current setting Rated Current (*1)
30min Ir: 300-630A In: 630A
at 125%
20min
Characteristics
(Adjustable)
Characteristics
1000s(TL=150s set)
Dimensions
14min
Dimensions
670s(TL=100s set)
10min
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min (*1) (*1) (*1)
and
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
30s
Accessories
20s
10s
5s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75
STD pickup current Is
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
Current Reducing Curve
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Pre-alarm
Rated ambient
Continuous load current (%)
TL 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s 120
0.2s 2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 110
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 100
Current (% of Ir) 70
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-4S 3P TCL-4SW3 (*2)
Display Unit
Breakers
*2 This is for NF630-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NF630-HEW/REW, use Handle lock device
PTC-4SW3. HL-S HLS-4SW
*3 This is for NF630-SEW/HEW. 3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
4P
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 785
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL Conductor 4-pole
thickness 44
28
t=10 max. 8 30 3-pole
f10.5
CL
110
Breaker
16
Conductor thickness t=10 max. CL
Conductor drilling
43
for direct connection
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
CL CL
102
92
59
f12.5
Trip button
f7
39
CL
194
Neutral pole 44 118
97
f14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or f7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-f35
Connection
rotated 90° CL CL
Installation
8
24 24
8
and
Connection M6 screw
allowance or f7 4-M6 tap
or f7
225
265
CL
194
225
225
194
CL
Characteristics
Characteristics
14
Dimensions
25 20 20
Dimensions
and
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13
Accessories
Insulating tube 87 Add these tapped
113 M12 bolt 87 43.5
44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center and
neutral poles
3-pole 4-pole Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance
225
280
CL M8 terminal block CL
163
135
25
mounting screw
25
Display Unit
Measuring
10
93
Breakers
55
28
160
f10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
Drilling plan
786 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF800-CEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW
400-800
Rated current In (A)
adjustable
NF800-HEW
Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
NF800-REW
AC 440V 36/18 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 36/18 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 85/85 100/100 150/75
Front Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Standard attached parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
Mounting screw: M6×40 (4pcs)
connection
NF800-SEW
Specifications
Detailed
Operating handle
10h Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
AX SHT or UVT PAL
Operating characteristics mounting mounting direction
5h
NF800-CEW
Characteristics
Characteristics
NF800-SEW
Dimensions
Dimensions
2h NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
and
1h
30min
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current (*1) (*1)
at 125% Ir: 400-800A In: 800A
20min
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
14min
10min 670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
(*1) (*1)
Accessories
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
30s
20s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
10s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp 130
0.3 ± 0.06s
temperature
TL ±20%
0.2s Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2 120
ambient
0.1s
0.06 ± 0.02s 110
0.05s
100
INST pickup current II
0.02s x4-x12 ±15% Max. total
(Magnification to In) breaking time 90
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 80
Current (% of Ir)
70
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
External Accessories
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
t=12 max. 46
4-pole
8 Breaker 3-pole
110
87
Breaker
32
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
Terminal dimension for R6
directly connecting
243
102
275
conductor
15
92
32
f8
f8.5
8
f14
8
14 87
32
51
12
46 70 M6 tap 70
22 or f7 172
Trip button
15
51 70 97
40
40 210 103
Neutral pole 1.0mm clearance on each
140
280 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.) 3-pole 4-pole side of the handle frame.
210 f14
M12 bolt 155 Conductor drilling Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole 217 for direct connection
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
M6 tap or f7
Connection
Stud can be rotated 90°
Installation
Connection allowance
25 Breaker Groove for reducing
and
Mounting plate heat by overcurrent 6-f48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or f7
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
243
295
243
Dimensions
243
12.5
and
13
45
24 24
10
8 70
8 32 15 70
140 11 11 8-M4 screw
70
Accessories
113 110 f13 Add these tapped holes in
M6 screw for 140 f48 70
M12 bolt 210 8 positions to standard boring.
mounting breaker
140
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
20
Connection allowance
155
187
243
301
13
Display Unit
Measuring
10
Breakers
8
112
56
32
25
15
40 70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw f10
140 f13 208 278
126
M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
Other
Drilling plan
788 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF800-SDW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF800-SDW
Rated current In (A) (700), 800
Number of poles 2
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
NF800-SDW
4h Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
2h AX SHT or UVT direction
Operating characteristics mounting mounting
1h NF800-SDW
30min
Connection
700A,800A
Installation
20min DC
14min
and
10min
(*1) (*1)
6min
Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps)
Max.
Dimensions
Dimensions
1min. Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Operating time
Lo 2600±520
2 3900±780
30s
and
3 5200±1040
20s Hi 6500±1300
10s
2s
Adjustment
range
1s 700A
Rated ambient
0.5s 130
temperature
Adjustment
Current rating (%)
0.2s range
800A 120
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.1s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
% of rated current
Ambient temperature (°C)
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-8S 2, 3P TCL-8SW3
Operating handle Large TC-L
V V-8S 4P TCL-8SW4
2, 3P MI-8SW3 Terminal 2, 3P TTC-8SW3
Mechanical interlock MI Skeleton TTC
4P MI-8SW4 cover 4P TTC-8SW4
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
46 4-pole
t=12 max.
3-pole
8 Breaker
110
87
32
Auxiliary handle
(removable) Terminal dimension for R6
directly connecting 70 M6 tap or f7
conductor
3-pole
102
275
92
15 f8.5
12
N
f8
8
22
f14
8
32
87
14 51
32
40 172
46
243
15
Trip button 51 70 97
1.0mm clearance on each
40 210 103 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Neutral pole side of the handle frame.
140
280 5 107 Conductor drilling
210 f14 Front-panel cutout
M12 bolt 155 for direct connection 70
3-pole 4-pole 217
4-pole
Drilling plan
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
M6 tap or f7
Connection allowance Stud can be rotated 90°
Connection
Installation
25 Breaker Groove for reducing heat
Mounting plate
and
by overcurrent 6-f48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or f7
Characteristics
Characteristics
243
295
243
Dimensions
243
Dimensions
12.5
13
and
45
24 24
10 8
70
70
8 32 15 140 11 11 8-M4 screw
70 Add these tapped holes in
f13
Accessories
M6 screw for 140 f48
113 110 M12 bolt 210 70 8 positions to standard boring.
mounting breaker
140
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
20
13
155
187
243
301
Display Unit
8
Measuring
112
Breakers
56
32
25
15
40
70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw f10
140 f13 208 278
M12 bolt
126
3-pole 4-pole
Other
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF800-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
790 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF800-UEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF800-UEW
400-800
Rated current In (A)
adjustable
Number of poles 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Mounting screw: 3P: M6×35, M6×132 (2pcs each)
Front
Standard attached parts 4P: M6×35 (3pcs), M6×132 (2pcs)
connection
(4-pole models are provided Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
with auxiliary handle.) Rear Mounting screw: 3P: M6×40, M6×137 (2pcs each)
connection 4P: M6×40 (3pcs), M6×137 (2pcs)
NF800-UEW
Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
10h AX SHT or UVT PAL
mounting mounting direction
5h Operating characteristics
NF800-UEW
2h
Connection
1h
Installation
Current setting
LTD operating time Ir: 400-800A Rated Current
(*1) (*1)
30min
and
at-125%
20min (Adjustable) In: 800A
14min 1000s(TL=150s set)
10min 670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min 80s(TL= 12s set)
(*1) (*1)
4min
LTD operating time TL
Characteristics
Characteristics
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
and
30s
20s
10s
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
STD operating time Ts
Continuous load current (%)
0.5s 130
Rated ambient
operating time Tp
0.3 ± 0.06s
temperature
TL ±20%
Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s 120
0.2s 2
(at 200%)
0.1 ± 0.03s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.1s 110
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
100
Current (% of Ir) 70
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-8U 3P TCL-8UW3
Operating handle Large TC-L
V − 4P TCL-8UW4
3P MI-8SW3 Terminal 3P −
Mechanical interlock MI Skeleton TTC
4P MI-8SW4 cover 4P −
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
87
Auxiliary handle
f14
(removable)
f7
27.5
15 Terminal dimension for
322
directly connecting
275
102
112 conductor
f8.5
f7
N
12
8
f14
8
14 22
87
32
143 4-pole
40
Trip button 51 194 3-pole
70
15
200 Breaker
40 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
210 Neutral pole 5 204
140
210 280 252 Conductor drilling
f14
for direct connection
22.5
M12 bolt 314 R6
3-pole 4-pole
143
92
Conductor
Insulating barrier (removable) thickness 97
Mounting hole t=8 max.
6.5
70
Specifications
Auxiliary handle
110
f14
Breaker (removable) 51
Detailed
f7
48
172
27.5
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
15
322
290
Front-panel cutout
275
102
112
Connection
Installation
f7
and
N
16
48
f14
70 70 Trip button
6.5
M6 screw or f7 51 35
4-pole
Characteristics
3-pole
Characteristics
Neutral pole 141
Dimensions
Dimensions
Drilling plan 70
f14 194
and
210 M12 bolt
200
280
5 204
252
NF400-UEW 4-pole
Accessories
314
24 24
10
8
10
4-M6 tap or f7
290
290
290
342
290
342
12.5
13
26
45
24 24
11 11 8-M4 screw
8 32 15 70 20
70 Add these tapped holes in
10 10 10 70
70 8 positions to standard boring.
f13 f48 f13
210 110 140 M6 screw for 140 210 83
Display Unit
mounting
breaker
3-pole 4-pole NF400-UEW 4-pole
Drilling plan
Other
792 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF1000-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW
500−1000 600−1250
Rated current In (A)
Adjustable Adjustable
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43 85/43
230V 125/63 125/63
Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
Front
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
Rear
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
NF1250-SEW
Operating Characteristics
10h 10h
Specifications
5h 5h
Operating characteristics Operating characteristics
Detailed
NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW
2h 2h
Current setting Rated Current Current setting Rated Current
1h 1h LTD operating time
LTD operating time at-125% Ir:500-1000A In:1000A Ir:600-1250A In:1250A
1000s(TL=150s set) at-125%
30min (Adjustable) 30min (Adjustable)
670s(TL=100s set) 1000s(TL=150s set)
20min 400s(TL= 60s set) 20min 670s(TL=100s set)
14min 80s(TL= 12s set) 14min 400s(TL= 60s set)
10min 10min
Connection
6min 6min
and
4min 4min
Operating time
Characteristics
30s 30s
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
20s 20s
and
1s 1s
Accessories
130
Rated ambient
temperature
100
90
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Other
External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW
Operating handle F
4P F10SW4P Handle lock device HL HL ()
3P MI-10SW3 3P TCL-10SW3
Mechanical interlock MI Large terminal cover TC-L
4P MI-10SW4 4P TCL-10SW4
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker 3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
unit. 4P
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 793
110
Mounting Breaker
hole
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
346
406
375
f9.5
13
15 32 8
f17.5
80
18.5
Neutral pole 70 M8 tap or f10 70
15 44
43 70 133.5
140 210 17 140
3-pole 4-pole
f13 M12 bolt 210 280 190
280 Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
3-pole Breaker
M8 screw for mounting breaker Breaker
35.5
Stud can be rotated 90°
86
Specifications
R11.5
109
269
Detailed
97
18 Connection
273
39.5
81.5
allowance
f13
22
Conductor thickness
13
86
45
t=62pcs max.
Bolt M1245 70 70 80
12
Connection
Installation
8 32 15 140 230 300 1.0mm clearance on each
Insulation cover
and
140 97 M8 tap or f10 side of the handle frame.
(removable)
3-pole 4-pole Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block Breaker
M10 terminal block mounting screw
Accessories
28.5
Stud can be rotated 90°
136
269
105
100.5
13
28.5
225
30
15 32 8
104
136
Connection
12
allowance f12
f13
Conductor thickness 43
Insulating 70 140
t=62pcs max. 140
barrier 204 274
68
Bolt M1245
208 134
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
794 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF1250-SDW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF1250-SDW
Rated current In (Amp.) 1000, 1250
Number of poles 2
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
NF1250-SDW
Operating Characteristics
3h 3h
Specifications
2h 2h
Detailed
1h 1h
40min Operating characteristics 40min Operating characteristics
NF1250-SDW NF1250-SDW
20min 1000A 20min 1250A
Max.
10min 10min
Max.
Connection
Installation
6min 6min
4min 4min
and
2min 2min
1min 1min
40s 40s Adjustable range of
Characteristics
Characteristics
30s 30s
Operating time
Dimensions
Operating time
3 5600±700 Hi 7000±700
1s 1s
Hi 7000±700
0.6s 0.6s
0.4s 0.4s
0.2s 0.2s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.1s 0.1s
Max. total breaking time Max. total breaking time
0.06s 0.06s
0.04s 0.04s
Time-delay Time-delay
0.02s 0.02s
trip trip
Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100125 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 100125 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
4000 4000
Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
130
1000A
Rated ambient
Lead wire
temperature
1200A, 1250A
Breakers
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Other
External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
2, 3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW
Operating handle F
4P F10SW4P Handle lock device HL HL ()
2, 3P MI-10SW3 2, 3P TCL-10SW3
Mechanical interlock MI Large terminal cover TC-L
4P MI-10SW4 4P TCL-10SW4
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker 2, 3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
unit. 4P
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 795
110
Mounting
hole
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
406
375
346
Trip
f9.5
button 13
15 32 8
f17.5
80
18.5 70 M8 screw 70
15 44 or f10
43 70 133.5
140 210 17 140
f13 M12 bolt 3-pole 4-pole
210 280 190
280
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
35.5
18 Stud can be turned 90°.
Specifications
86
Detailed
187.5
R11.5
109
375
97
233
Connection allowance
22 f13
13
Conductor thickness
86
Connection
Installation
45
and
Bolt M1245
70 70
20.5
18 12 80
140 230 300
8 32 15 Insulation cover
M8 screw or f10 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame
140 97 (removable)
Characteristics
Characteristics
3-pole 4-pole
Dimensions
Dimensions
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
and
Differing in external dimensions from NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
Plug-in
Accessories
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
Breaker
M10terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be turned 90°.
318
375
48
13
74.5
30
104
8
30
32
Connection allowance
12
Conductor thickness
15
43 70
68 25.5 t=62 pcs. max. f13 140 204
208 146.5 f12
Bolt M1245 Insulation barrier
3-pole
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF1250-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
796 Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF1600-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF1600-SEW
Adjustable
Rated current In (A)
800−1600
Number of poles 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43
230V 125/63
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Front
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Standard attached parts Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Rear Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
connection Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
NF1600-SEW
10h
Detailed
5h
Operating characteristics
NF1600-SEW
Operating handle
2h
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
Current setting Rated Current AX SHT or UVT direction PAL
1h LTD operating time at-125% Ir:800-1600A In:1600A
mounting mounting
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
30min 670s(TL=100s set)
Connection
Installation
10min
6min
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min
12-60-100-150s ±20%
Characteristics
Characteristics
(at 200%)
1min
Dimensions
Operating time
Dimensions
30s
and
20s
2s
1s 130
Rated ambient
Continuous load current (%)
temperature
0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp 120
0.3 ± 0.06s
TL ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s Tp= 110
2
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
(at 200%)
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW
Operating handle F
4P F10SW4P Handle lock device HL HL ()
3P MI-16SW3 3P
Mechanical interlock MI Electrical operation device NFM (*1)
Display Unit
Measuring
4P MI-16SW4 4P
Breakers
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 797
(185.5)
Auxiliary handle Breaker
(removable)
406
97
346
375
f17.5
f9.5
N
115
80
130 M8 tap or f10
20 49.5 70 70
203 133.5 1.0mm clearance on each side
101.5
263 304.5
Neutral pole
17 140 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
364.5 190
280
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Rear connection
Detailed
Connection 15 38 15
allowance
38
60
Connection
Installation
106 106
18
and
318
212
Characteristics
Characteristics
Conductor thickness Mounting angle Conductor thickness
Dimensions
Mounting angle
Dimensions
t=6W75 max. t=6W75 max.
160 min.
and
20
20
269
100 max.
109
109
273
273
15 Connection
81.5
allowance
18
Accessories
38
70 M8 tap or f10 70
60
36
54
15
140
38 38 f11 70 f11 3-pole 4-pole
125 15 BM1050 bolt 210 140 125 M1050 bolt
3-pole 140 200 4-pole Drilling plan
NF1600-SDW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF1600-SDW
Rated current In (Amp.) 1600
Number of poles 2
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
NF1600-SDW
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
3h
2h
Connection
Installation
1h
Operating characteristics
and
40min
of NF1600-SDW,
magnetic trip only,
20min 1600 A
Max. allowable current carrying time
Characteristics
10min
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
6min
and
4min
2min
1min
Accessories
40s
30s Adjustable range of
Operating time
4s
L0 3200±800
2s 2 4800±800
1s
3
Hi
6400±800
8000±800
Internal Accessories
0.6s
0.4s
0.02s
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100125 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
4000
Current (% of rated current)
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
Other
38 15
M1065 Breaker
(185.5)
(185.5)
406
346
375
97
f17.5
Trip
f9.5
button
115
80
130
M8 screw
20 49.5 70 70
or f10
203 101.5 133.5 1.0mm clearance on each side of the
263 304.5 17 140 handle frame
364.5 190 3-pole 4-pole
280 Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
38
60
106 106
18
Specifications
318
Detailed
212
Connection
Installation
175 or more 160 or more
20
20
and
109
109
375
Connection allowance
233
233
15
36
60
38
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
140 f11 70 70
38 15 Bolt M1050 M8 screw
38 15
Stud can be turned 90°. Stud in horizontal direction. or f10
125 140 125
140 200
It cannot be turned 90°. 3-pole 4-pole
Accessories
Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF1600-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
NV32-SV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV32-SV NV63-CV NV63-SV NV63-HV
(5) 6 10 (15) 16 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (15) 16 20 25 (30)
Rated current In (A)
20 25 (30) 32 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60) 63
Phase line
3
3f3W,
1f2W
2
1f2W
3
3f3W,
1f2W
1f2W
2 3
3f3W,
1f2W
3f3W,
1f2W
3
30
100-440
15 30
100/200/500
100-240
(15)
100-440
(15) 30
100/200/500
100-440
(15) 30
100/200/500
NV63-HV
30
selectable selectable selectable selectable
High-speed type
at IΔn 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Max operating time (s)
at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) − − − −
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) − − − −
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) − − − −
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 5/5 − 2.5/2.5 − 7.5/7.5 10/8
415V 5/5 − 2.5/2.5 − 7.5/7.5 10/8
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 5/5 − 5/5 − 7.5/7.5 10/8
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 10/10 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
capacity (kA)
200V 10/10 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
100V 10/10 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (2pcs) (*1) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs)
Note *1 Attached to NV63-SV and NV63-HV.
NV63-SV
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h Operating Characteristics 2h 2h
Operating Characteristics
Connection
Installation
NV32-SV 6A
1h 1h NV32-SV 10A-32A 1h Operating Characteristics
NV63-CV 16A-32A NV63-CV 40A-63A
30min
and
Max.
Dimensions
Operating time
Operating time
1h SHT or UVT
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting
30min
TBM
10min Lead-wire
direction
UL 489 Listed Earth
4min
Rated nonoperating current
2min
1min
10s
5s
2s Test button
1s 130
Rated ambient
temperature
0.5s
Current rating (%)
120
Load side
ZCT
Line side
0.2s
110
0.1s
Display Unit
0.05s
Measuring
100
Breakers
0.04s
0.02s
90 Magnetic Senstivity
0.01s
device selector
80
50 100 500 1000 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-05SV Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SV3
Operating handle
V V-05SV Small TC-S TCS-05SV3
LC LC-05SV TCL-05SV3
Large TC-L
HLF-05SV Terminal TCL-05SV3L
Handle lock device HL (*1)
HLN-05SV cover Skeleton TTC TTC-05SV3
HL-S HLS-05SV Rear BTC BTC-05SV3
Note *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Plug-in PTC PTC-05SV3
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters DIN-05SV
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 801
Insulation barrier
(removable) M50.8 screw
Mounting hole (M8 for 60 and 63A) M40.7 taps
Applicable wire size: or f5
f1.6 to 22mm2
(for M50.8 screw) Breaker
24
50
Sensitivity current
selector
f5.5
111
130
112
84
50
Leakage (f8.5 for 60 and 63A)
f4.5
indication button
8
Test button
45
Trip button
22 f8.5 12.5 max.
61 25
(16 max. for
50 68 60A and 63A)
75 4 72 (Conductor thickness t=4 max.)
90 Conductor drilling
for direct connection Drilling plan
Specifications
Rear connection
Detailed
Connection
Installation
and
M40.7 taps
Mounting plate
or f5
t = 3.2 max.
Mounting base Breaker
43 (44 for 60A and 63A) Breaker
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
8
R1
112
111
112
52
8
Accessories
50 M40.7 breaker
mounting screw
M6 screw f14
27 min.
25 70
Earth Leakage
Plug-in
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
85
5.5
Other
16.5 max.
54
7
21 25
M6 screw
89 30 82 f6 hole
f6.5 or M50.8 taps
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
802 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV125-CV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV125-CV NV125-SV NV125-HV
(15) 16 20 30 32 40 50 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
Rated current In (A) (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 (*2) (60) 63 75 80 100 125 (*2)
Phase line
3f3W,
1f2W
3 3
3f3W,
1f2W
3f4W
4
3f3W,
1f2W
3
3f4W
4
30
100/200/500 selectable
200-440 100-440
(30)
100/200/500 selectable
200-440
selectable
High-speed type
at IΔn 0.1 0.1 0.1
Max operating time (s)
at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 10/5 25/25 50/38
415V 10/5 30/30 50/38
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 10/5 30/30 50/38
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 30/15 50/50 100/75
capacity (kA)
200V 30/15 50/50 100/75
100V 30/15 50/50 − 100/75 −
NV125-SV Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) (*1) Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Notes *1 Attached to NV125-SV and NV125-HV.
*2 In case of time delay type, rated current is produced with 20 amp. or more.
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics
1h 1h Operating Characteristics 1h
Connection
NV125-CV 60A-100A
NV125-HV 15A-30A 30min 30min NV125-SV 125A
30min NV125-SV 40A-100A
20min 20min 20min NV125-HV 125A
NV125-HV 40A-100A
and
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s
Dimensions
Dimensions
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
10min
Rated current sensitivity
Rated current sensitivity
Rated nonoperating current
4min
UL 489 Listed Earth
2min
1min
10s
5s
2s
Test button
1s
Inertial 130
0.5s
Rated ambient
nonoperating time
temperature
Inertial
Load side
Current rating (%)
Line side
0.01s
Measuring
90 Magnetic
Breakers
Senstivity
50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
device selector
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
Ambient temperature (°C)
External Accessories
Other
Solderless terminal
Insulation barrier for wire size
Mounting hole (removable) 14-2/0AWG CU/AL
M8 screw
Operating time 24 Breaker
50
50
selector
(for time-delay type)
112
130
112
111
84
50
Leakage f8.5
f4.5
indication button
8
Test button
30 30
f8.5
Trip button 22 30 45
61 19 max. M40.7 taps
60 90
Neutral pole 68 Comb conductor or f5
120 4 16.5 max. 3-pole 4-pole
90 72
(Conductor thickness
90
t=4 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling
for direct connection Drilling plan
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
Connection
Installation
4-pole
and
4-pole
3-pole 3-pole
Mounting base
Breaker Breaker
102 Stud can be
Mounting plate
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
rotated 90°
Dimensions
t = 3.2 max. 52
and
111
112
R1
52
8
112
15 connection
allowance
16
Accessories
30 28
30 f18 30
M40.7 breaker 86
8.5
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Plug-in
3-pole 4-pole
Mounting M50.8
95 125
plate terminal block mounting nut Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in or screw mounted directly 60 90
Display Unit
terminal block
Measuring
Breakers
30
54
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
Other
20 max.
5.5
85
12
54
M8 screw 30 60
21 f8.5
97 127 f6 hole
89 30 Conductor drilling or M50.8 taps
Details of
terminal 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
NV250-CV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV250-CV NV250-SV NV250-HV
125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
Rated current In (A)
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 250
Phase line
3f3W,
1f2W
3 3
3f3W,
1f2W
4
3f4W
3f3W,
1f2W
3
3f4W
4
100/200/500 selectable
(30)
100-440
100/200/500 selectable
200-440 100-440
(30)
100/200/500 selectable
200-440
2h 2h
Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics
1h NV250-CV 125A-225A 1h NV250-CV 250A
and
4min 4min
Characteristics
30min
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
2min 2min
2min
Operating time
Operating time
10s
10s 10s
5s
5s 5s 2s
1s
Min. Min. Inertial
2s 2s 0.5s nonoperating time
Accessories
Inertial
0.2s nonoperating time
1s 1s 0.1s
0.05s Inertial
0.5s 0.5s 0.04s nonoperating time
0.02s
0.01s
0.2s 0.2s
50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.1s 0.1s
Max. total Max. total Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
0.05s 0.05s
breaking time breaking time
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
Leakage Molded Case
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
direction 120
Load side
Line side
100
Magnetic Senstivity
90 selector
device
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Breakers
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-2SV 3P MI-05SV3
Other
30
Insulation barrier
(removable) M8 bolt
Mounting hole (hex-socket) 24 Solderless terminal
for wire size Breaker
Operating time 125-175A 14-95mm2
100
100
Sensitivity current
.5
f8
selector
10
102
126
144
165
50
165
144
1
Leakage
C
f4.5
indication button
C
1
Test button 25 max.
Or
100
45 .5
f8.5
f8 35 35
Trip button
22 35 61
M40.7 taps
Neutral pole 68 or f5
70
9
105
25 max.
4 72
105 140 (Conductor thickness 3-pole 4-pole
92
t=7 max.)
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
Mounting 4-pole
Connection
Installation
base
and
3-pole
Mounting plate Stud can be 4-pole
Breaker
rotated 90° Breaker
t = 3.2 max. 3-pole
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
8
1
144
126
144
52
22 connection
20
allowance
Accessories
M40.7 breaker
mounting screw 35 32.5
6 f24
15
35 35 100
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps
Insulation or f5
M8 bolt
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Plug-in
24 connection allowance
4-pole 145
Plug-in 3-pole 110
Mounting terminal block
34.5
plate
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
56.5
190
165
144
54
80
11
70
6
151
56.5
Other
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105
terminal block f6 hole
3-pole 70
31 mounting screw 107 142 or M50.8 taps
Insulation Stud attachable in this
4-pole 105
89 30 barrier direction only
3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
112
4-pole 140 Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for the model of NV250-CV.
806 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV125-SEV
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
Rated current In (A) 125 125 250 250
Current setting Ir (A) 63-125 63-125 125-250 125-250
3f4W
3f3W,
1f2W
3
3f4W
4
3f3W, 1f2W
3
3f3W, 1f2W
3
NV250-HEV
Rated current sensitivity (30) (30) (30) (30)
(mA) 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable
High-speed type
Max operating at IΔn 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
time (s) at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 36/36 65/65 36/36 65/65
415V 36/36 70/70 36/36 70/70
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 36/36 75/75 36/36 75/75
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
capacity (kA)
200V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
100V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NV250-SEV
Specifications
Detailed
5h 5h Operating Characteristics
Operating Characteristics
NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
2h NV125-SEV NV125-HEV 2h
and
Operating time
and
6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 1min
30s (at 200%) 30s (at 200%) 30s
Operating time
20s 6
20s 6
I t OFF I t OFF 10s
10s 10s 5s
STD pickup current Is STD pickup current Is
5s Ir(2 – 2 .5 – 3 – 3 .5 – 4 5s I r(2–2. 5–3–3. 5–4 2s
– 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 1 0 )±1 5 % –5–6–7–8–10)±15% 1s
2s 2s 0.5s
Inertial
nonoperating time
Inertial
Accessories
0.01s 0.01s
Leakage Molded Case
Rated ambient
130
temperature
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT
direction
120 Test button
Current rating (%)
80 CT
70 CT
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(Note *1) (Note *2) CT
Magnetic Senstivity
Display Unit
Notes *1 For the 24VDC TBM only instruct us of a control voltage. Ambient temperature (°C) device selector
Measuring
Breakers
(The standard shared voltage is 100-240VAC/100-240VDC.) The rated current does not have thermal
*2 SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (100-200VAC) characteristics. Reduce the current as shown Leakage indication button
is necessary. in the curve on the left chart if the ambient
temperature exceeds 40°C.
External Accessories
Other
30
Insulation barrier Solderless terminal
for wire size
(removable) M8 bolt
Mounting hole 24 125-175A 14-95mm2
(hex-socket)
200-250A 70-125mm2 Breaker
Operating time
Wire connection
selector
100
100
.5
f8
10
Sensitivity current
1
C
selector
126
165
144
102
144
165
50
C
Leakage
f4.5
1
indication button 25 max.
Test button
Or
Trip characteristics .5
f8
100
45
f8.5
selector 35 35
Trip button 22 35 61
M40.7 taps
9
70 Neutral pole 68 or f5
105 25 max.
4 72
105 140 (Conductor thickness 3-pole 4-pole
92 t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling
for direct connection Drilling plan
Specifications
Detailed
Rear connection
4-pole
Connection
Installation
3-pole
and
Mounting plate Mounting Stud can be 4-pole
t = 3.2 max. base rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
3-pole
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
8
144
126
144
52
R
22 connection
allowance
20
Accessories
M40.7 breaker
mounting screw 35 32.5
15 6 f24
35 35
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps 100
Insulation
M8 bolt
tube 70 or f5
68 71 105
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Plug-in
24 connection allowance
4-pole 145
Plug-in 3-pole 110
Mounting terminal block
34.5
plate
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
56.5
144
190
165
54
80
11
70
6
151
56.5
Other
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105
terminal block f6 hole
3-pole 70 or M50.8 taps
31 mounting screw 107 142
Insulation 4-pole 105 Stud attachable in this
89 30
barrier direction only
3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
112
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for the model of NV250-SEV and NV250-HEV.
808 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV400-CW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV400-CW NV400-SW
Number of poles 3
NV400-SW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (A) 250 300 350 400
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
Time-delay Max. operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
type
Inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
NV400-SW
2h
Detailed
Operating characteristics
1h NV400-CW
NV400-SW
30min 4h
20min High-
2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
14min speed
10min 1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
type
30min
Rated nonoperating current
6min
Rated current sensitivity
10min
Installation
2min 4min
and
2min
1min
Operating time
Max. 1min
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
10s
Characteristics
Characteristics
10s 5s
Dimensions
Dimensions
NV400-CW
5s 2s
and
Min. 1s
2s Inertial
0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
1s 0.2s
nonoperating time
NV400-SW 0.1s
0.5s Inertial
0.04s nonoperating time
Accessories
0.02s
0.2s
0.01s
0.1s
Max. total breaking time 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
130
Operating handle Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Test button
F F-4S Auxiliary handle HT HT-4CW, HT-4SW
Operating handle
V V-4S Large TC-L TCL-4SW3
Terminal
Mechanical interlock MI MI-4SW3 Skeleton TTC TTC-4SW3 ZCT
cover
Line side
Load side
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Rear BTC BTC-4SW3
Order in combination with the breaker unit. HL HL-4CW, HL-4SW
Handle lock device
HL-S HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device (*1) Sensitivity
Magnetic
device selector
16
110
t=8 max.
CL Breaker
43
39
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector
R6
Mounting hole (Time-delay type) CL
92
102
CL 257 CL
194
12
Leakage indication button 47
f12.5
f7
Trip button Test button
25
39
f10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44 M6 tap or f7 118
44
f14 97 Conductor drilling
M12 bolt 103 for direct connection 1.0mm clearance on each
51 5 107 side of the handle frame.
112
140
155(NV400-SP) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134(NV400-CP)
Specifications
Boring dimensions for rear connection
Rear connection
Detailed
type barriers (3-pole)
Connection
Installation
Line side
Breaker
and
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90° Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent 6-f35
C
L
8
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or f7
4-M6 tap or f7
Characteristics
allowance
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
and
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 f35 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
f13 M12 bolt Add these tapped holes in
Accessories
113 87 87 44
Insulation tube 8 positions to standard boring.
87
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
810 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV400-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3
NV400-HEW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (A) 200-400 adjustable
NV400-REW
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
Time-delay Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) (0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
NV400-SEW
5h
Detailed
Operating characteristics
NV400-SEW
2h NV400-HEW
NV400-REW
1h 4h
LTD operating time Current setting Rated current High-
30min
at 125%
2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
20min
Ir: 200-400A In: 400A speed
1000s (TL=150s set) (Adjustable) 1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
14min type
30min
Connection
10min
Operating time
30s
Characteristics
30s
Characteristics
Dimensions
20s
Dimensions
10s
10s 5s
and
0.5s
operating time Tp
STD operating time Ts Inertial
0.04s nonoperating time
TL 0.3 ± 0.06 s
0.2s Tp= ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04 s 0.02s
2
(at 200%) 0.01s
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03 s
0.06 ± 0.02 s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
x 4 - x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In) breaking time
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
110
100
90
80
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. Ambient temperature (°C)
Load side
94.5 4-pole
Insulating barrier (removable)
CL 3-pole
28 44
Conductor thickness 8
t=8 max. Breaker
CL
16
110
CL Breaker CL
43
Sensitivity current
selector
39
Operating time selector
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
R6
257
CL CL CL
102
194
92
12
Leakage indication
59
f12.5
button
f7
Trip button Test button
25
39
f10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Neutral pole 44 M6 tap or f7 44
44
97
Conductor drilling 118
f14 for direct connection
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each
112 185 side of the handle frame.
155
140 196 3-pole 4-pole
3-pole Front-panel cutout
4-pole Drilling plan
Specifications
Boring dimensions for rear connection
Rear connection
Detailed
type barriers (3-pole)
Connection
Installation
Stud can be Breaker Groove for reducing
Mounting plate 3-pole
rotated 90° C heat by overcurrent C 6-f35
and
L L
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or f7
allowance 4-M6 tap or f7
194
225
Characteristics
225
265
CL
194
C 225
Characteristics
L
14
Dimensions
Dimensions
25 20 20
26
and
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 11 11
44 f35
10 8 8-M4 screw
f13 Add these tapped holes in
113 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
M12 bolt 8 positions to standard boring.
Accessories
130.5 87
130.5
Drilling plan
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
812 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV630-CW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV630-CW NV630-SW
Number of poles 3
NV630-SW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (A) 500 600 630
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) −
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) −
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Time-delay Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Earth-leakage indication system Button
NV630-SW
2h
Detailed
1h Operating characteristics
NV630-CW NV630-SW
30min 4h
20min
2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
14min
10min 1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
6min 30min
4min
Installation
10min
2min
and
4min
2min
1min
Max. 1min
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
Operating time
Characteristics
10s
Characteristics
Dimensions
10s 5s
Dimensions
5s 2s
and
Min. 1s
2s 0.5s
Inertial
Inertial nonoperating time
1s 0.2s
nonoperating time
0.1s
0.5s Inertial
0.04s
Accessories
nonoperating time
0.02s
0.2s
0.01s
0.1s
Max. total breaking time 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current
130
Operating handle
Current rating (%)
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Test button
F F-4S Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW
Operating handle
V V-4S Large TC-L TCL-4SW3
Terminal
Mechanical interlock MI MI-4SW3 Skeleton TTC TTC-4SW3 ZCT
cover
Line side
Load side
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Rear BTC BTC-4SW3
Order in combination with the breaker unit. HL HL-4SW
Handle lock device
HL-S HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device (*1) Sensitivity
Magnetic
device selector
94.5
Conductor
28 thickness 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
t=10 max. 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
Sensitivity
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
f10.5
R6
Leakage-indicator 59
92
button
Trip 30
f7
button Test button
Conductor thickness t=10 max.
39
f12.5
Conductor drilling 44 M6 screw 44
or f7
Neutral
44
for direct connection
Pole
97 118
f14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
Mounting Stud can be 4-pole Eddy-current
Connection
Line side
Installation
plate rotated 90° Breaker heat-reducing slit
3-pole
and
6-f35
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or f7
allowance 4-M6 tap or f7
Characteristics
Characteristics
225
265
194
225
194
225
Dimensions
14
Dimensions
25 20 20
and
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
Accessories
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
814 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV630-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV630-SEW NV630-HEW
Number of poles 3 4 3
NV630-HEW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (A) 300-630 adjustable
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) −
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) −
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
Time-delay Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) (0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
5h Operating characteristics
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW
2h
Specifications
Ir:300-630A In:630A
LTD operating time (Adjustable) 4h
30min at-125%
20min 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
1000s(TL=150s set)
14min 1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
570s(TL=100s set)
10min 30min
400s(TL= 60s set)
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
Characteristics
2s
Dimensions
5s pickup current Ip
Dimensions
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
1s
Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
Inertial
and
2s -0.9-0.95-1.0)±10% 0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
1s nonoperating time
Pre-alarm 0.1s
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts Inertial
0.04s nonoperating time
TL 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= ±20% 0.02s
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04s
Accessories
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Leakage Molded Case
Current (% of Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% of In)
130
Rated ambient
Continuous load current (%)
SHT or UVT
UL 489 Listed Earth
100
90
80
70
Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Display Unit
Breakers
Electrical operation 3P CT
NVM (*3)
device 4P Magnetic Sensitivity
device selector
94.5
Conductor
28 thickness 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
t=10 max. 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
Sensitivity
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
f10.5
R6
Leakage-indicator 59
92
button
Trip 30
f7
button Test button
Conductor thickness t=10 max.
39
f12.5
Conductor drilling 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral or f7
Pole 44 for direct connection
97 118
f14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
Mounting Stud can be 4-pole Eddy-current
Connection
Line side
Installation
plate rotated 90° Breaker heat-reducing slit
3-pole
and
6-f35
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or f7
allowance 4-M6 tap or f7
Characteristics
Characteristics
225
265
194
225
194
225
Dimensions
14
Dimensions
25 20 20
and
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
Accessories
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
816 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NV800-SEW
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
Number of poles 3
NV800-HEW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (A) 400-800 adjustable
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) −
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) −
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Time-delay Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Earth-leakage indication system Button
NV800-SEW
5h
Operating characteristics
Specifications
2h NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
Detailed
1min
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
10s
Characteristics
Characteristics
10s 5s
Dimensions
Dimensions
breaking time
0.01s
Leakage Molded Case
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% of Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% of In)
90
80
Display Unit
70
Measuring
Breakers
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
Ambient temperature (°C)
Load side
CT
Electrical operation device (*1)
CT
CT
Magnetic Sensitivity
device selector
26
Insulating barrier (removable) 94.5
Mounting hole 46 Breaker
Breaker
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
110
87
8 R6
32
92
243
Operating time selector
(Time-delay type)
275
102
15
Leakage indication button f8.5
32
f8
12
172
M6 tap or f7
32 8
f14
8 70
87
46 22
Test button
15
51
97 40
14 1.0mm clearance on each
103 side of the handle frame.
40
Trip button 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
140
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
210
155 Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Specifications
Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
Detailed
Connection
Connection
Installation
allowance 6-f48
M6 tap or f7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
5
25
and
24 24
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
10
5
4-M6 tap or f7
243
10
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
243
243
295
12.5
and
24 24
13
45
11 11 8-M4 screw
10 8 Add these tapped holes in
M6 screw for 70
8 32 15 f48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
140 mounting breaker
f13
Accessories
140
113 110 M12 bolt 140
Drilling plan
Earth Leakage
Leakage UL 489 Listed
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
818 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF50-SVFU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF50-SVFU Model NV50-SVFU
(5) (10)
Rated current In (A)
(3) 5 10 15 20 30
Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C
NV50-SVFU
15 20 30 40 50
Rated ambient
temperature 40°C 40 50 Number of poles 2 3
3f3W
Phase line 1f2W
Number of poles 2 3 1f2W
Rated voltage VAC 240 UL 489 120-240
Rated voltage
600Y/347V − IEC 60947-2
High-speed
No.5-02
type
240V 14 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn
120V − Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 440 Earth-leakage indication system Indicator window
690V − 480V −
capacity (kA)
440V 7.5/4 120V 14
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 10/5 440V − 7.5/4
400V 10/5 IEC 60947-2 400V − 10/5
EN 60947-2 AC
NF50-SVFU 380V 10/5 (Icu/Ics) 230V 15/8 15/8
230V 15/8 100V 15/8 15/8
Standard attached parts
IEC35 rail mounting claws
(Front connection)
Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.
Remark: 1. The mounting screws must be prepared by the user. (Recommended size: M430.7365 (2 pcs).)
Specifications
(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
NV50-SVFU 4h
Connection
High-
Installation
2h
4h (UL 1053) speed
1h
and
type
2h Operating Characteristics
14min
Characteristics
10min
Dimensions
4min
Dimensions
Max. (3A-30A)
6min
4min 2min
and
1min 30s
Operating time
30s
20s 10s
Accessories
10s 5s
5s
2s
Min.
2s 1s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.2s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s 0.04s
0.02s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
25 100 500
Current (% of Ir) 63.8 75 86.2
Ground fault current
(100% of rated current sensitivity)
130
Rated ambient
lead wires
120
Left pole Right pole TBM
Display Unit
ZCT
Measuring
Load side
Breakers
Line side
100
2-pole 2-pole
Magnetic Sensitivity
90 device selector
3-pole
3-pole 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Leakage indication
Other
Ambient temperature °C
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
2P F-03SVUL2 Terminal 2P TCL-03SVU2
F Large TC-L
3P F-03SVUL cover 3P TCL-03SVU3
Operating handle
2P V-03SVUL2
V
3P V-03SVUL
HL HLF-03SVU
Handle lock device
HL-S HLS-03SVU
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 819
Leakage current
indicator window
36
26
50
87.5
87.5
120
120
35
16.5
37
3.5
f8
Test
Trip button button
Trip button
f4.2
Trip button Trip button
56
18 18 Test 65
button
18 36 18 36 68
36 54 36 54 3 76
90
2-pole 3-pole 2-pole 3-pole
(NF50-SVFU) (NV50-SVFU)
Specifications
Detailed
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 22lb-in (2.5N·m)
Applicable wire range (*1) Crimp terminal type (*2)
AWG (#)
mm2 (60°C/75°C) JST NTM
f5.5 R2-5 R2-5
2-M5
Connection
Installation
1.04-2.63 16-14 R2-5M
V2-5
and
V2-M5
6
2.63-4.6 12 - R3.5-5S
11.5 max. R3.5-5L
R5.5-5 R5.5-5
Characteristics
Characteristics
2.63-6.64 12-10 R5.5-5S
Dimensions
(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)
Dimensions
R5.5-5N
V5.5-5
and
Conductor drilling for R8-5 R8-5
direct connection 6.64-10.52 8
R8-5S
R14-5 R14-5
10.52-16.78 6 R14-5S
14-NK5
Accessories
Remarks: 1. The mounting screws are not enclosed with the breaker. 22-S5
16.78-26.66 4 22-S6
2. The wires cannot be connected directly. R22-5S
JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Notes *1 14AWG or lager to comply with UL Standards.
*2 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp
27
82.5
CL CL
52
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
18 37 55
NF100-CVFU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF100-CVFU Model NV100-CVFU
Rated current In (A) 60 (70) 75
Rated ambient temperature 40°C (80) (90) 100
NV100-CVFU
Rated current In (A)
60 (70) 75 Number of poles 3
Rated ambient
(80) (90) 100
temperature 40°C 3f3W
Phase line
1f2W
Number of poles 2 3 UL 489 120-240
Rated
Rated voltage VAC 240 IEC 60947-2
voltage VAC 100-440
600Y/347V − EN 60947-2
High-speed type
30/50/
CSA C22.2 Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA
AC 480Y/277V − 100/200/500 selectable
No.5-02
240V 14 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn
120V − Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button
690V − 480V −
capacity (kA)
440V 10/5 120V 14
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 10/5 440V 10/5
400V 10/5 IEC 60947-2 400V 10/5
NF100-CVFU 380V 10/5
EN 60947-2 AC
230V 15/8
(Icu/Ics)
230V 15/8 100V 15/8
Standard attached parts IEC35 rail mounting claws, Insulating barrier
(Front connection) (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminal) Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws)
Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.
Specifications
(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
NV100-CVFU 4h
4h 2h High-
(UL 1053)
Connection
Installation
speed
2h 1h type
and
6min
Dimensions
Dimensions
4min 2min
Max. 1min
2min
and
Operating time
Operating time
1min 30s
30s
20s 10s
10s 5s
Accessories
5s
2s
Min.
2s 1s
1s 0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.1s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.1s
0.04s
0.05s
0.02s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip 0.01s
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
25 100 500
63.8 75 86.2
Current (% of Ir)
Ground fault current
(100% of rated current sensitivity)
Rated ambient
120 ZCT
NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU
Load side
Line side
110
3-pole
Display Unit
2-pole
Measuring
100
Breakers
Magnetic Sensitivity
3-pole 90
device selector
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
2P F-05SVUL2 TCL-05SVU2
F 2P
3P F-05SVUL Terminal TCL-05SVU2L
Operating handle Large TC-L
2P V-05SVUL2 cover TCL-05SVU3
V 3P
3P V-05SVUL TCL-05SVU3L
HL HLF-05SVU
Handle lock device 2P HLS-05SVU2
HL-S
3P HLS-05SVU
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 821
Leakage current
112
150
112
150
84
50
indicator button
f4.5
Test button
Trip button
f8.5
f8.5
22 22 45
8
25 50 50 65
Trip button
68
50 75 75 16 max. 4 72
Specifications
Applicable wire range Crimp terminal type (*1)
Detailed
mm2 AWG (#) JST NTM
(60°C/75°C)
2.5-2.63 14 R2-8 R2-8
2.63-6.64 12-10 R5.5-8 R5.5-8
6.64-10.52 8 R8-8 R8-8
Connection
Installation
R14-8
10.52-16.78 6 R14-8
and
R14-8S
16.78-26.66 4 R22-8 R22-8S
26.66-42.42 2 38-S8 R38-8S
Characteristics
Characteristics
60-2BA
Dimensions
Dimensions
42.42-60.57 1/0 CB60-8
60-S8
and
JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp
terminal combination shown above.
Accessories
Size of screwdriver with bolting
Front connection(solderless terminal) Please bolt with flat head screwdriver.
Solderless terminal The length of X : 6mm-7mm
CL Terminal CL Mounting hole CL Terminal The length of Y q 9.5mm
Mounting hole cover cover
Wire size
60°C/75°C CU ONLY Number of strands
210
210
CL CL 14AWG 7
84
50
12-10AWG 7
8AWG 7
6-4AWG 7
2AWG 7
1-1/0AWG 19
The tightening torque is different according to
connected wire.
68 Refer to instruction manual for details.
50 75 75 Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating
90 by the setting of twisted strands or the stress
2-pole 3-pole of heating and cooling.
Display Unit
2-pole 3-pole
Measuring
Breakers
M40.7screw
or f5 Breaker
CL CL CL CL Breaker
Other
R1
111
CL CL
52
50 70
25
The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on
2-pole 3-pole each side of breaker window frame.
NF125-SVU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF125-SVU NF125-HVU Model NV125-SVU NV125-HVU
Rated current In (A) 15 20 30 15 20 30
Rated ambient (40) 50 60 125 (40) 50 60 125
NF125-HVU
15 20 30 15 20 30 temperature 40°C 75 100 75 100
Rated current In (A)
40 50 60 40 50 60 Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Rated ambient 125 125
(70) 75 (80) (70) 75 (80) 3f3W 3f3W 3f3W 3f3W
temperature 40°C
(90) 100 (90) 100
NV125-SVU
Phase line
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
NV125-HVU
IEC 60947-2
100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
Rated voltage VAC 480 480 600Y/347V 600Y/347V VAC EN 60947-2
High-speed type
UL 489 Rated current sensitivity
100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500
CSA C22.2 480V 30 30 50 50 IΔn mA selectable selectable selectable selectable
No.5-02 AC 240V 50 50 100 100 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn
120V − − − − Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 690 Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button
690V 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5 480V 30 30 50 50
capacity (kA)
440V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 120V 50 50 100 100
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 440V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
400V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 IEC 60947-2 400V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2 AC
380V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 (Icu/Ics) 230V 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50
230V 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 100V 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws), Insulating barrier (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs)
(Front connection)
Operating Characteristics (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
4h 4h 4h
Connection
Installation
1h 1h
NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-SVU NV125-SVU
30min NF125-HVU NV125-HVU 30min NF125-HVU NV125-HVU 30min NF125-HVU NV125-HVU
20min 20min 20min
14min 15A-30A 14min 40A-100A 14min 125A
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A-100A) Max.
Characteristics
2min
Characteristics
2min 2min
Max. (40A-50A)
Dimensions
Dimensions
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s
and
NV125-SVU 2h
1h
High-
speed NF125-SVU
NF125-HVU
NV125-SVU
NV125-HVU
NV125-HVU
type
30min
Rated non-operating current
10min
4min
2min
1min 3-pole
Operating time
30s
10s
5s
2s
Temperature Compensation Curve Internal Wiring Diagram
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
1s
0.5s Test button
Rated ambient
0.2s 130
Rated current compensation rate %
temperature
0.04s 110
0.02s 100
0.01s
90 Magnetic Sensitivity
Other
device selector
25 100 500 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
63.8 75 86.2
Ground fault current Ambient temperature °C
(100% of rated current sensitivity) Leakage indication
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-1SVUL
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L TCL-1SVU3
V V-1SVUL
HL HLF-05SVU
Handle lock device
HL-S HLS-05SVU
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 823
24
50
50
124 Sensitivity current selector
160
160
124
84
50
Leakage current indicator button
f4.5
Test button
Trip button f8
.5
f8.5
8
45
50
50
61
22 22
65
Trip button 19 max.
60 60 68
Specifications
Detailed
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 54lb-in (6N·m)
Applicable wire range Crimp terminal type (*1)
mm2 AWG (#)
(60°C/75°C) JST NTM
2.5-2.63 14 R2-8 R2-8
Connection
Installation
2.63-6.64 12-10 R5.5-8 R5.5-8
and
6.64-10.52 8 R8-8 R8-8
R14-8
10.52-16.78 6 R14-8
R14-8S
16.78-26.66 4 R22-8 R22-8S
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
26.66-42.42 2 38-S8 R38-8S
and
60-2BA
42.42-60.57 1/0 CB60-8
60-S8
JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp
Accessories
terminal combination shown above.
50
5.03
Wire size
Number of strands
60°C/75°C CU ONLY
a
14AWG 7
a
12-10AWG 7
6
8AWG 7
160
160
6AWG 7
84
50
4-2AWG 7
1AWG 19
The tightening torque is different according to
connected wire.
Refer to instruction manual for details.
a:Solid copper wire is usable.
68
Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating
50
50
Breaker
Breaker
6
Other
123
R1
52
86
30
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.
824 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
NF225-CWU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF225-CWU
Rated current In (A) 125 150 175
at ambient temperature 40˚C (IEC30˚C) 200 225
Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (VAC) 240
capacities (kA)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600
500V 10/5
IEC 60947-2 440V 15/8
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 18/9
230V 35/18
DC 250V 10/5 (*1)
Mounting screw: M430.7×55 (2pcs),
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Terminal cover: (1 set) (*2)
Notes *1 Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 690, the models
can be used for up to 400 V DC.
*2 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger
NF225-CWU protection) structure.
Operating Characteristics
4h
Specifications
2h
Detailed
1h Type
30min NF225-CWU
20min
14min
10min
6min
Connection
4min
Installation
2min
and
Max.
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
Characteristics
Characteristics
10s
Dimensions
Dimensions
5s
and
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
Max. total
Accessories
0.2s breaking
time
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
130
Rated ambient
Operating handle
temperature
Current rating (%)
100
90
Display Unit
Measuring
80
Breakers
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
External Accessories
Other
100
R22-8 R22-8S
16.78-26.66 4 22-S8 CB22-8S
26.66-42.42 2 R38-8 R38-8
38-S8 R38-8S
R60-8 R60-8
42.42-60.57 1/0 60-2BA CB60-8
CB60-S8 CB60-8S
C
L
102
144 60.57-76.28 2/0 70-8 R70-8
165
50
f8.5 80-3BA
f8.5
76.28-96.3 3/0 CB80-S8
f4.5
10
100-3BA
96.3-117.2 4/0 CB100-S8
JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
Trip button 22 max. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the
crimp terminal combination shown above.
100
92
Specifications
Detailed
C
L Breaker C
L Breaker
Connection
Installation
and
1
Characteristics
C C
Characteristics
R
L L
126
Dimensions
52
Dimensions
and Accessories
35 M40.7 screw 100
or f5
NF250-SVU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF250-SVU NF250-HVU Model NV250-SVU NV250-HVU
Rated current In (A) 125 150 125 150
Rated ambient 175 200 250 175 200 250
NF250-HVU
temperature 40°C 225 225
Rated current In (A) 125 150 125 150
Rated ambient 175 200 250 175 200 250 Number of poles 3 3 3 3
temperature 40°C 225 225 3ø3W 3ø3W 3ø3W 3ø3W
NV250-SVU
Phase line
1ø2W 1ø2W 1ø2W 1ø2W
NV250-HVU
IEC 60947-2
100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
Rated voltage VAC 480 480 600Y/347V 600Y/347V VAC EN 60947-2
30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/
High-speed
100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500
CSA C22.2 480V 35 35 50 50 IΔn mA selectable selectable selectable selectable
type
No.5-02 AC 240V 65 65 100 100 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn
120V − − − − Operating time s within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 690 Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button
690V 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5 480V 35 35 50 50
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 440V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 120V 65 65 100 100
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 440V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
400V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 IEC 60947-2 400V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2 AC
380V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 (Icu/Ics) 230V 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
230V 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50 100V 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws), Insulating barrier (4pcs)
(Front connection)
NF250-HVU Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.
Specifications
Detailed
Operating Characteristics (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics
(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
Connection
Installation
4h 4h
Operating Characteristics
and
2h 2h Operating Characteristics
1h
(UL 489)
NF250-SVU NV250-SVU 1h
(UL 489) NV250-SVU
NF250-SVU NV250-SVU 4h
30min NF250-HVU NV250-HVU 30min NF250-HVU NV250-HVU NV250-HVU 2h High-
speed
20min 20min
14min 125-225A 14min 250A (UL 1053) 1h type
Characteristics
10min
Characteristics
10min 30min
6min 6min
4min 4min 10min
and
Operating time
1min
30s
Operating time
30s
30s
20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
Accessories
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. 2s
2s 2s
1s
1s 1s
0.5s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.05s 0.02s
0.05s
0.01s
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip 25 100 500
0.01s 0.01s 63.8 75 86.2
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 Ground fault current
(100% of rated current sensitivity)
Current (% of Ir) Current (% of Ir)
110
NF250-HVU NV250-HVU
100
Magnetic Sensitivity
Display Unit
90
Measuring
device selector
Breakers
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Leakage indication
Ambient temperature °C
External Accessories
Other
100
hole R60-8 R60-8
42.42-60.57 1/0 60-2BA CB60-8
CB60-S8 CB60-8S
60.57-76.28 2/0 70-8 R70-8
Sensitivity 80-3BA
76.28-96.3 3/0 CB80-S8
current selector
102
100-3BA
144
185
185
144
50
Leakage current 96.3-117.2 4/0 CB100-S8
indicator button
f4.5
117.2-152.05 250/300MCM CB150-S8 (*1)
Trip
button JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
Test button NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Notes *1 TCL-2SVU3L can be mounted when using
CB150-S8.
f8.5
*2 When using with a wire connection, use the
100
100
61
22 Trip button 65 .5
22 f8 .5
f8
10
9
68
1
70 70
C
or
4 72
Specifications
105 105
C
1
Detailed
92 Max. 25 (Conductor thickness Max. 25
t=7 max.)
Connection
Installation
Front connection (solderless terminal)
and
Mounting hole Terminal cover Mounting hole Solderless terminal
Characteristics
Characteristics
Hexagon socket set screw
Dimensions
Terminal cover
Dimensions
and
6.1
Accessories
Wire size
60°C/75°C CU ONLY Number of strands
265
265
102
50
4-2AWG 7
1-1/0AWG 19
3/0-4/0AWG 19
250-350MCM 37
Breaker
CL Breaker
CL
R1
Display Unit
CL
Measuring
CL
126
52
Breakers
Other
35 100
M40.7screw
or f5 The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on
each side of breaker window frame.
NF400-SWU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF400-SWU NF400-HWU
Rated current In (A) 250 300 250 300
at ambient temperature 40˚C 350 400 350 400
UL 489
Rated voltage (VAC)
600Y/347V
3
600Y/347
20
3
600Y/347
25
capacities (kA)
240V 65 100
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690
690V 10/10 (5/5) (*1) 15/10
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30 (25/25) (*1) 42/42
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42 (36/36) (*1) 65/65
400V 45/45 (36/36) (*1) 70/70
230V 85/85 (65/65) (*1) 100/100
Mounting screw: M6360 (4screws) Mounting screw: M6360 (4screws)
Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating plate (1pce)
Standard attached parts
Insulating barrier (4pcs) Insulating barrier (4pcs)
(Only for type with bar terminals) (Only for type with bar terminals)
Notes *1 In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/).
NF400-SWU *2 0.1 for UL1053.
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
2h 2h
Specifications
1h Operating Characteristics
1h
(UL 489) Operating Characteristics
Detailed
2min 2min
Max.
Connection
Installation
1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
and
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
Characteristics
2s
Characteristics
2s
Dimensions
Dimensions
1s 1s
and
0.5s 0.5s
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
temperature
120
(*1) 110
100
(*1) 90
80
−10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Breakers
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
Other
F F-4SUL
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L TCL-4SWU
V V-4SUL
Handle lock device HL HL-4SWU
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 829
Mounting
8
hole
UL
225
257
102
47
Ampere ratings Wire size Number of strands
250A, 300A 250-350kcmil CU
f12.5
37
f7
Trip 250A 350kcmil AL
button
350A, 400A (2) 3/0AWG CU 19
IEC
87 97
Wire size (IEC 60228)
103 Ampere ratings
140 Class 2 Class 5
(max.141) 5 107 250A, 300A 70-185mm2 95-185mm2
(NF400-SWU)
155 350A, 400A 150-240mm2 150-185mm2
Remarks: 1. Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. 3. Use a wire size that can carry the rated current.
2. When using the solderless terminals, conduct periodic inspections and 4. When using IEC Class 5 (multi-core wire), pay attention to strand breakage and pinching, etc., while tightening.
tightening as the wires may wear down over use. 5. The NF400-HWU does not have a solderless terminal.
Specifications
Detailed
Insulating barrier
(removable)
46
26 Conductor thickness 10
t=10 max.
Connection
Installation
13
110
and
44
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
Mounting
and
hole
102
257
47
f12.5
Accessories
f7
Trip
button
f13 10
97
112
103
140
(max.141) 5 107
(NF400-SWU)
(NF400-HWU) 155
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
R6
92
97
30
58
Other
1mm clearance on
44 f7 holes 118 each side of handle.
Insulating plate
or M6 taps
NF630-SWU
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model NF630-SWU NF630-HWU
Rated current In (A)
500 600 630 500 600 630
at ambient temperature 40˚C
UL 489
Rated voltage (VAC)
600Y/347V
3
600Y/347
20
3
600Y/347
25
capacities (kA)
240V 85 100
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690
690V 10/10 15/10
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30 42/42
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42 65/65
400V 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100
Mounting screw: M6335 (4pcs) Mounting screw: M6335 (4pcs)
Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating plate (1pce)
Standard attached parts Insulating barrier Insulating barrier
(500A,600A: 2pcs, 630A: 4pcs) (500A,600A: 2pcs, 630A: 4pcs)
(Only for type with bar terminals) (Only for type with bar terminals)
NF630-SWU
Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
Specifications
2h 2h
Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics
Detailed
2min 2min
Installation
Operating time
Max.
1min Lo 400±80 1min Lo 400±80
and
2 600±120 2 600±120
30s 30s
3 800±160 3 800±160
20s 20s
Hi 1000±200 Hi 1000±200
10s 10s
Min.
5s 5s
Characteristics
Characteristics
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s Max. total 0.1s Max. total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
Accessories
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current % of rated current
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
temperature
120
110
90
(*1) (*1) 80
−10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-6SUL
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L TCL-6SWU
V V-6SUL
Other
243
275
102
8
15
UL
f14
Trip
f8
button Ampere ratings Wire size Number of strands
500A, 600A (2) 250-350kcmil CU ONLY 37
140 97 IEC
Wire size (IEC 60228)
210 103 Ampere ratings
Class 2 Class 5
5 107 500A, 600A (2) 95-185mm2 (2) 120-185mm2
155
Remarks: 1. Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. 3. Use a wire size that can carry the rated current.
2. When using the solderless terminals, conduct periodic inspections and 4. When using IEC Class 5 (multi-core wire), pay attention to strand breakage and pinching, etc., while tightening.
tightening as the wires may wear down over use. 5. The 630A and NF630-HWU does not have a solderless terminal.
Specifications
Detailed
Insulating barrier 46
(removable) Conductor thickness
t=12 max. 10
500A, 600A:110
630A:150
Connection
Installation
and
Characteristics
Characteristics
Mounting
Dimensions
Dimensions
hole
and
102
275
15
Accessories
f14
Trip
f8
button
8
630A:150
14
87
32
40 46
140
97
f14
210 103
M12 bolt
5 107
155
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
R6
97
92
30
58
Other
1mm clearance on
each side of handle. Insulating plate
70 f7 holes 172
or M6 taps
Rated short-circuit
440V 36/36 50/50
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 36/36 70/70
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/36 75/75
380V 36/36 75/75
230V 85/85 100/100
DC 250V − −
Standard attached parts Mounting screw M4 0.7 55 (3P: 2psc, 4P: 4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Breaker mounting MDU, Connection cable (for breaker mounting)
MDU accessories Panel MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting screw,
mounting Connection cable (for panel mounting)
Operating Characteristics
Specifications
10h 10h
Detailed
1h Note) 1h Note)
LTD operating time Current setting Ir Rated current In LTD operating time Current setting Ir Rated current In
30min 6
at 125%(I t ON) 125-250 250A 30min 6
at 125%(I t ON) 125-250 250A
20min 670s (TL = 100s set) (Adjustable) 20min 670s (TL = 100s set) (Adjustable)
Connection
14min 14min
Installation
10min 540s (TL = 80s set) 10min 540s (TL = 80s set)
400s (TL = 60s set) 400s (TL = 60s set)
and
6min 6min
4min 80s (TL = 12s set) 4min 80s (TL = 12s set)
2min 2min
LTD operating time TL
Operating time
Operating time
20s 20s
6 6
I t OFF I t OFF
10s 10s
and
In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15% breaking time In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15% breaking time
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.01s 0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400600 1000 1500 3000 60 70 100 125 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000
500 700 2000 4000 500 700 2000 4000
Current (% of Ir) Current (% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In, or % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In, or % of Ir)
direction 130
temperature
110
100
(*1)
Measuring
Breakers
Breakers
External Accessories
Other
.5
Mtg hole 24 (removable) M8 bolt
f8
100
25
(Hex-soket)
10
38.5
24 Breaker
1
Mtg hole
C
Trip
100
button
C
Trip
1
button 25 max.
144
165
102
86.5
133
f4.5
102
144
165
50
126
or
f4.5
.5
f8
45
f8.5
100
61 45
100
f8.5
9
22 35 68 35 35
70 105 22 35 61 25 max.
Neutral pole 77 M4 × 0.7 taps or f5
105 140 70 105 Neutral pole 68
92 4 (Bus t max.=7)
MDU unit 105 140
72 3-pole 4-pole
3-pole 4-pole MDU specification A
3-pole 4-pole 92
No transmission, pulse output 25
MDU breaker mounting CC-Link 32 Bus drilling for
MDU panel mounting direct connection Drilling plan
Rear mounting
Mtg plate Stud can be Mtg plate Stud can be
t max.=3.2 rotated 90° 4-pole t max.=3.2 rotated 90° 4-pole
Insulation 3-pole 3-pole
Insulation 4-pole Breaker
tube 4-pole Breaker tube Breaker
3-pole 3-pole
Specifications
Detailed
39.5
8
Connection Connection
R1
144
1
144
88.5
126
144
52
R
allowance allowance
22 22
20
20
M4 × 0.7
M4 × 0.7 breaker
breaker 32.5 mtg screw
Connection
Installation
15 6 mtg screw 100 15 6 32.5 f24 35
15 60 B 15 Insulation 100 35 35
and
68 71 70 70
Insulation 77.5 B tube M4 × 0.7
105 68 71 105 70 taps or f5 105
77 106 tube 1mm clearance on
MDU specification B 72 106 each side of handle
MDU unit f9 M8 bolt
f9 M8 bolt No transmission, pulse output 16 3-pole 4-pole
CC-Link 23
Characteristics
Characteristics
Front-plate cut out
Dimensions
Dimensions
MDU breaker mounting Front-plate cut out MDU panel mounting Drilling plan
and
MDU unit terminal for breaker mounting MDU panel mounting MDU terminal for panel mounting
Accessories
Please bind wires. 90 This figure is without terminal cover.
Panel note: Operation and Please bind wires.
14.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 R2 72
Removable connector
82.5
MDU specification 1 2 3 4 5 6 MDU specification 1 2 3 4 5 6
72
No transmission − − − − − − No transmission − − − − FG −
57.5
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 415V 45/45 70/70
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 45/45 70/70
380V 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100
200V 85/85 100/100
Standard attached parts Mounting screw M6 60 (4pcs)
Breaker
(Front connection) Insulation barrier (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Breaker mounting MDU, Connection cable (for breaker mounting)
MDU accessories Panel MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting screw,
mounting Connection cable (for panel mounting)
Operating handle
Left-side Right-side
10h
and
mounting mounting
Operating characteristics
5h NF400-SEP with MDU (*1) AL AX
NF400-HEP with MDU AL for MDU transmission
2h (Magnification to In) AX for MDU transmission
1h Note)
Characteristics
Characteristics
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current (*1) SHT or UVT
Dimensions
Dimensions
30min at 130%
20min Ir: 200-400A In: 400A MG EAL TBL
790s (TL = 150s set) (Adjustable)
14min
and
1min
Accessories
30s
20s Note *1 Right side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left side mounting.
10s
Pre-alarm
-0.95-1.0)
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts
Rated ambient
Derating of Load current (%)
0.2s Tp=
2 0.2±0.04s
(at 200%) 120
0.1s 0.1±0.03s
0.06±0.02s 110
0.05s
INST pickup current II
x4-x16 ±15% 100
0.02s
(Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time
0.01s 90 The rated current does not have thermal
60 70 100 130 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000 characteristics. Reduce the current as
500 700 2000 4000 80
shown in the curve on the left chart if the
Current (% of Ir) 70 ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
External Accessories
Type name Type name
Unit
Accessories Accessories
Display Unit
Measuring
Measuring
Breakers
Breakers
16
51 22
110
Breaker
43
39
Trip
97
button
103
194
102
257
47
f12.5
51
f7
75
39
PE
12
Current M6 taps
Neutral 44 44
f14 indication LED 30 44 or f7
pole
M12 bolt OVER
MDU 58 PAL 36
25
3-pole 4-pole
5 107 f10.5
terminal MDU 70%
168
cover 90 131
Conductor t max.=8 Drilling plan
185
Conductor drilling
140 196 155
for direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
1mm clearance on each side of handle.
Rear connection Front-plate cutout (Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
8
3-pole 3-pole
Connection M6 taps
allowance or f7
194
R6
Specifications
R6
14
225
265
225
20
Detailed
46
25 20
92
26
83
63
128
M6 breaker
mounting screw
138
44 f35 44
10 8
f13 33
87 Insulating 87 43.5
113 M12 bolt 37 37
Connection
Installation
tube (59)
130.5 130.5
and
118 118
3-pole 4-pole
<Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed.
Drilling plan
CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU (No transmission, pulse output)
and
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. Figure of the breaker mounting is
MDU panel mounting MDU terminal removed the terminal cover.
Space greater than the value shown
Panel in the figure below must be secured, <Panel mounting>
thickness 4
and must be separate 10cm or more
Accessories
1-3.2mm 3
Operation/display from the distribution line. 2
side 75 75 R2 72 40 1
L2
70
12
Panel L1
86.5
90
Control power
28.5
1 2 3 4
M4 screw
No transmission
Terminal block
85
90
96
72
M3.5 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
screw
8.5
3
1-3.2mm 2
1
28.5
Panel holder
plate 75 R2
72 76
M3 screw L2 Control power
Other
38 L1
MDU
86.5
Terminal
90
Upper M3 nut
A
connector 1 2 3 4
side PE screw(M4)
SLD DG DB DA
40
MDU display
For the set 5 6 7 8
part
48
M3 installation SLD DG DB DA
85
90
96
screw
104.5
<Breaker mounting>
B
Control power
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG SLD DG DB DA
836
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Measuring Display Unit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 415V 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
380V 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
200V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
Standard attached parts Mounting screw M6 35 (4pcs)
Breaker
(Front connection) (*1) Insulation barrier (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Breaker MDU, Breaker mounting plate, Mounting screw for breaker mounting plate,
mounting Connection cable (for breaker mounting), MDU Mounting screw
MDU accessories
Panel MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting nut, Connection cable (for
mounting panel mounting), MDU Mounting screw
Note *1 4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.
Operating Characteristics
Specifications
Detailed
10h 10h
Operating characteristics Operating characteristics
5h NF630-SEP with MDU 5h NF800-SEP with MDU
NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU
2h (Magnification to In)
2h (Magnification to In)
1h Note) 1h Note)
Connection
Installation
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current
30min at 130%
30min at 130%
20min Ir: 300-630A In: 630A 20min Ir: 400-800A In: 800A
and
Operating time
Operating time
Dimensions
1min 1min
30s 30s
and
20s 20s
10s 10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 5s pickup current Ip Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% 2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
Accessories
-0.95-1.0) -0.95-1.0)
1s 1s
Pre-alarm Pre-alarm
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts 0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts
TL ±20% 0.3±0.06s TL ±20% 0.3±0.06s
Tp= 0.2s Tp=
0.2s 2 0.2±0.04s 2 0.2±0.04s
(at 200%) 0.1s (at 200%) 0.1±0.03s
0.1s 0.1±0.03s
0.06±0.02s 0.06±0.02s
0.05s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.05s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
130
temperature
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting
AL AX 120
(*1)
AL for MDU transmission 110
AX for MDU transmission
100
(*1) (*1) (*1) SHT or UVT
90
MG EAL TBL The rated current does not have thermal
Unit
Display Unit
Measuring
Measuring
Note *1 Right side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left side mounting.
External Accessories
Other
110
87
97 Dimension of terminal
directly connected to
32
103
243
conductor
275
102
15
51
f14
f8
Trip f8.5
75
button
8
Current 8
indication LED
87
600AF 44
12
OVER 70 M6 taps 70
800AF 46 22
85 PAL or f7
32
15
PE 50 30
MDU 40
90
70%
14 210 5 107
Neutral
MDU pole
Conductor t max. 3-pole 4-pole
40 280 131
terminal 600AF t8
f14 800AF t10
140 cover
M12 bolt 155 Drilling plan
210
Conductor drilling
4-pole for direct connection
3-pole
R6 R6
Specifications
8
12.5
243
295
Detailed
243
46 46
40
92
13
138
10
70
8 70 51
32 51
6
M6 breaker ø48 70
ø13 140 172
113 110 140 mounting (86)
Connection
M12 bolt
Installation
screw 210
172
and
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan <Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)
and
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. Figure of the breaker mounting is
MDU panel mounting MDU terminal removed the terminal cover.
Space greater than the value shown
Panel in the figure below must be secured, <Panel mounting>
thickness 4
and must be separate 10cm or more
Accessories
1-3.2mm 3
Operation/display from the distribution line. 2
side 75 75 R2 72 40 1
L2
70
12
Panel L1
86.5
90
Control power
28.5
1 2 3 4
M4 screw
No transmission
Terminal block
85
90
96
72
M3.5 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
screw
8.5
NF630-HEP
383 221 barrier. 1 2 3 4 5 6
NF800-HEP
No transmission FG
Pulse output FG 113 114
75 Panel Panel 5
70 thickness 4
12
3
1-3.2mm 2
1
28.5
Panel holder
plate 75 R2
72 76
M3 screw L2 Control power
Other
38 L1
MDU
86.5
Terminal
90
Upper M3 nut
A
connector 1 2 3 4
side PE screw(M4)
SLD DG DB DA
40
MDU display
For the set 5 6 7 8
part
48
M3 installation SLD DG DB DA
85
90
96
screw
104.5
<Breaker mounting>
B
BH
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model BH BH-P
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated current (A)
BH-P
70 70, 100 70, 100 70 70, 100 70, 100
at ambient temperature 40˚C
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
Rated AC230/400V 3 − 3 −
IEC 60898-1
short circuit AC400V − 3 − 3
capacity (kA) − DC125V 1 1
BH BH-P
1h
Amb. temp.:40°C
Detailed
125
2min 100
and
95
1min
90
30s
85
Operating time
20s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Characteristics
Characteristics
Max.
Dimensions
Dimensions
5s
Min.
2s
1s
Accessories
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
0.05s
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Outline Drawing
Plug-in terminal
•BH Mtg bracket
M5 0.8 screw 32 •BH-P (line side)
7.5
71.5
74
M5 0.8
100
113
screw
73
95
57
95
Display Unit
Measuring
Breaker
Breakers
center
25 25 25 60.5
Mtg slot
25 50 57.5
25 50 75 65.5
25 50 75 Mtg hole f4.5
63.5
77.5
22 47 47 20.5 45.5 70.5 79
Other
12
4.5
14
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
Note Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.
and four for 2-pole and 3-pole breakers.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 839
BH-D6
BH-D10
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Instantaneous tripping Type B, C, D Type B, C Type B, C, D Type B, C
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 440 440 250
0.5, 1,
1.6, 2, 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4,
Rated current In (A) 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 6, 10, 13,
3, 4, 6, 10,
at ambient temperature 30°C 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,
13, 16, 20, 50, 63
25, 32, 40
AC 230V 6 − 6 10 − 6 −
IEC60898-1
Rated GB10963.1 230/400V 6 − − 10 − 6 −
short- (Icn)
circuit 400V − 6 − − 10 − 6
capacity IEC60898-2 DC 125V − − 10 −
(kA) GB10963.2
(Icn) 250V − − − 10
BH-D6
Operating Characteristics
4h
Specifications
4h 4h
2h
Operating Characteristics
Detailed
2h 2h Operating Characteristics
1h Type : BH-D6,BH-10(Type B,C) Operating Characteristics
1h Type : BH-D6,BH-D10(Type D) 1h Type : BH-D10(Type B,C)
30min Rated current : AC 0.5A-63A
Rated current : AC 0.5A-63A Rated current : DC 0.5A-63A
20min Amb.temp. : 30°C 30min 30min
20min Amb.temp. : 30°C 20min Amb.temp. : 30°C
10min
10min 10min
5min
5min 5min
2min
Connection
2min 2min
Installation
1min Max.
Max.
Operating time
and
30s
Operating time
Max.(13A-63A)
Operating time
Characteristics
Characteristics
2s 2s
Dimensions
1s Min.
Dimensions
1s Min. 1s Min.
0.5s
0.5s 0.5s
and
0.2s B C 0.2s 0.2s B C
0.1s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s
0.02s 0.02s
Accessories
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 0.01s 0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
130
Rated ambient temp.
45
87
120
Current ratings (%)
110
18 18 36 18 17 44 6
36 54 54 70 max.
100
72
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
90
80
Solderless terminal –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
1P 2P 3P 4P
840 Miniature Circuit Breakers · Residual Current Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
BH-DN
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model BH-DN
Number of poles (P) 2 (1+N) (*1)
Instantaneous tripping Type C
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 230
Rated current In (A)
6, 10, 16, 20
at ambient temperature 30˚C
Rated
short- IEC60898-1
circuit GB10963.1 AC 230V 4.5
capacity (Icn)
(kA)
BH-DN
Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
Operating Characteristics
Type : BH-DN
Specifications
30min Amb.temp.:30°C
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Connection
Installation
1min
Max.
Operating time
and
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Characteristics
Characteristics
2s
Dimensions
Dimensions
1s
and
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Accessories
0.02s
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
Ambient compensation
8.4
18
130
N
120
Current ratings (%)
45
110
100
17
Display Unit
Measuring
70 max.
Breakers
90
44
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50
45 Solderless
88 terminal
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 841
BV-D
BV-D
Operating Characteristics
4h
Specifications
2h
Detailed
1h
30min
10min
4min
Rated non-operating current
2min
Connection
Installation
1min
Operating time
and
30s
10s
5s
2s
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
1s
0.5s
and
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
Accessories
0.01s
25 50 100 500
Ground-fault current
(% of rated current sensitivity)
Residual
M5 screw Test button indicator
42.5
45
85
18 17 44 6
18 54
70 max.
Display Unit
36
Measuring
72
Breakers
Solderless terminal
Other
2P 4P
842 Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection Isolating Switches Characteristics and Dimensions
BV-DN
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Model BV-DN
Number of poles (P) 2 (1+N) (*1)
Rated operational voltage Ue (VAC) 230
Rated current In (A)
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
at ambient temperature 30˚C
Instantaneous tripping Type C
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 30, 100, 300
Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Residual operation Dependent on line voltage
Rated IEC61009-1
short-circuit GB16917.1 AC 230V 4.5
capacity (kA) (Icn)
BV-DN
Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
Specifications
2h Operating Characteristics 2h
Detailed
Type : BV-DN 1h
1h
Rated current : 6A-40A
30min
30min Amb.temp.:30°C
20min
10min
10min
1min
1min
Operating time
Max.
and
Operating time
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s
5s 5s
Min.
Characteristics
2s
Characteristics
2s
Dimensions
Dimensions
1s
1s
0.5s
and
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s 0.04s
0.02s
Accessories
0.02s
0.01s
0.01s
25 50 100 500
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
Ground-fault current
100% of rated current (% of rated current sensitivity)
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
130
Rated ambient temp.
36
8.4
120
N
110
45
100
17
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
90
70 max.
80
44
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50
45 Solderless
88 terminal
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 843
KB-D
KB-D
Outline Drawing
Specifications
M5 screw Neutral pole
Detailed
44.5
Connection
Installation
and
87
45
Characteristics
Characteristics
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
18 18 36 18 17 44 6
36 54 54 70 max.
Accessories
72
1P 2P 3P 4P
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Other
844 Circuit Protectors / Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
CP30-BA
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product
Frame (A) 30
Model CP30-BA
Number of poles 1 2 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5
0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5,
Rated current (A)
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30
AC (V) 250
UL 1077 Rated voltage (V)
DC (V) 65 125 −
CSA C22.2
No.235 AC 2.5kA at 250V
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V −
Rated Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250
short-circuit IEC 60934
capacity (kA) EN 60934 AC 2.5kA at 230V
DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V −
Operating Characteristics
Specifications
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S)
Detailed
2h 2h 2h 2h
1h DC 1h 1h 1h
40min 40min DC 40min DC 40min DC
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 30s
and
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
Characteristics
Characteristics
Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
Accessories
Medium type with inertial delay (MD) Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
Outline Drawing 1h
40min
2h
1h
40min
2h
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
20min 20min
10min 10min
6min 6min
•CP30-BA 4min 4min
2min 2min
12 29.5 47 35 1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal cover 22.5 IEC 35mm 30s 30s
cover cover cover rail 20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
2s 2s
22.5
1s 1s
ON ON ON
0.5s 0.5s
39
54
73
67
56
63
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s
9.5
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
5.5 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
(3)
17.5 17.5
Measuring
Breakers
AXc
AXb
12
AXc
AXb
12
AXc
AXb
12
(Plus minus self-up screw)
(The figure shows auxiliary switch.
Example: Auxiliary switch)
Temperature Characteristics Curve
11 11 11
AXa
14
AXa
14
AXa
14 Main terminal
(Plus minus self-up screw)
M4·····20A max.
M5·····20A over 300
Operating time variation (%)
250
Other
200
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
150
Mounting dimension
Rated ambient
temperature
100
90
80
54
70
60
12 29.5 47 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 2-M4 tap
2-M tap 2-M tap Tightening torque 1-1.4 (N·m)
Ambient temperature (°C)
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 845
Rear connection The drilling dimensions and connection related dimensions are the same as the dimensions for the breaker body. Refer to the dimension
Plug-in drawings of each model. Note that for the rear connection type, four mounting holes are required even for the 2-pole or 3-pole types.
Specifications
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV
Detailed
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV
Front connection
Operation circuit terminal Center line of electrical operation device
Insulation barrier cover mounting screw
Connection
Operation circuit terminal board Operation circuit terminal cover (Standard supply)
Installation
(removable) (M3 tapping)
(M3.5 screw) Power supply module Center line of electrical
and
Breaker operation device
Manual handle M8 screw 24
OFF
50
lock plate
25
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
Characteristics
Characteristics
ON button A B A B
Dimensions
Dimensions
R1
and
112
130
111
78
86
80
39
41
Manual/automatic B A B A
selection switch Electrically
operated base 61
30 Neutral pole
Accessories
60 158
Front plate 164 30 30 88
OPEN (TRIP) 86 86 M4 0.7 screw
button 90 90 Display hole or f5
90 (ON (green), OFF (red), TRIP (yellow)) 3-pole 4-pole
120 Front plate cut out
3-pole 4-pole Test button Drilling plan
(removable) module
Measuring
Breaker
100
OFF
lock plate
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ON button A B A B
R1
86
80
78
144
165
126
Other
31
32
33
Manual/automatic B A B A
Manual handle
selection switch
Electrically 44
operated base
61 35 35
100
Outline Drawing
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW,
NF630-REW Motor drive type
Front connection Center line of electrical operation device Center line of breaker Max. conductor thickness
Insulating barrier 231 400A frame: t=8
Center line of electrical operation 600/630A frame: t=10 44
device and breaker 8
Breaker Operation circuit Breaker
110
terminal block (M3.5 screw)
70
194
120
257
277
44
44 44
44
M6 or f7
43
16
94.5
112 22 28
195
2- and 3-pole 4-pole
f14 M12 bolt
140 56
255
Trip button 231 168
185 Drilling plan
196
2- and 3-pole
4-pole Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.
Breaker
Detailed
f12.5
Center line of electrical
f7
43
operation device
47
70
234
Connection
297
Installation
120
277
257
144
20
and
ø12.5
ø7
44
44 M6 screw
Characteristics
Characteristics
110
Dimensions
or f7
16
43
141
Dimensions
191.5
and
28 292
112 f14 M12 bolt 352 Drilling plan
Trip button 140
231
M3.5 screw
70
194
120
257
277
44 Test button
44 M6 screw 44
44
43
or f7
16
94.5
112 22 28 195
f14 M12 bolt 3-pole 4-pole
140 56 255
Trip button 231 168
185
3-pole 196 Drilling plan
4-pole
Display Unit
Measuring
Breakers
Breaker
16
110
f14
f7
48
15
290
322
275
112
f14
ø7
48
140
M6 screw
35 Neutral pole 6.5 or f7
70 141
210 191.5 Drilling plan
Operation circuit
280 terminal block 292
231 M3.5 screw 352
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 847
110
Breaker t=12 max.
70
275
243
120
277
44
Neutral
pole
15 32 8
70 70
87
M6 screw
46 or f7
Trip button
140
35 40 2- and 3-pole 4-pole
210 70 94.5
231 210 f14 M12 bolt 195
280 255 Drilling plan
2- and 3-pole 231
4-pole
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.
Specifications
Detailed
NF800-UEW Motor drive type
Front connection
Connection
Installation
and
Center line of electrical Center line of electrical Center line of breaker
operation device and breaker operation device 143
40 Conductor 64
Characteristics
Characteristics
Insulating barrier 14 thickness
Dimensions
Center line of breaker 8
Dimensions
t=8 max.
15
Breaker
and
Center line of Breaker
110
8 32
87
f14
electrical
f7
operation device
15
322
70
Accessories
290
290
120
277
275
112
f14
44
f7
23.5
87
70 M6 screw 140
8 or f7
4-pole
Insulating barrier
Center line of electrical 46
14 Conductor 8
operation device and breaker Breaker thickness
t=12 max.
Display Unit
Breaker
Measuring
Breakers
110
87
70
243
120
277
275
Operation circuit
terminal block
Other
44
M3.5 screw
8
70 M6 screw or f7
87
32
46
Trip button 94.5
15
40
Test button 195 Drilling plan
140
210 255
231
f14 M12 bolt
848
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers Characteristics and Dimensions
Outline Drawing
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1250-SDW Motor drive type
Front connection
280 (4-pole)
Center line of
210 (4-pole) Conductor thickness
4-pole breaker 55
70 t=82 max.
Insulating barrier 15
Bolt max.
Breaker
M1250
110
Operation circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
61
406
120
375
44
13
8
Neutral pole
70 70
80
15 32
59 M8 screw
43 or f10
Center line of electrical 140
140 operation device and 3-pole 4-pole
f13 M12 bolt 231
210 (3 -pole) 3-pole breaker 290
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.
Specifications
Detailed
Conductor thickness 55
60
ø 11 t=6 width 75 max. 20
38
Bolt max. M1065
15
(185.5)
(185.5)
Breaker
Characteristics
Characteristics
38
Dimensions
Dimensions
and
Operation circuit
terminal block
61
375
120
M3.5 screw
406
35
Accessories
70 70 M8 screw
69.5 or f10
101.5
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
203 140
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Molded Case
Breakers
Other
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 849
160 or more
20
109
269
61
406
120
or less
f17.5
81.5
f9.5
273
100
38 15
44
38
60
36
M8 screw
or f10
f11 70
140 231 125 38 15 212
Bolt M1050
210 290 200
Bottom view Drilling plan
Specifications
35 Mounting angle Breaker
allowance
Detailed
Conductor thickness
15 t=6 width 75 max.
18.5
160 or more
20
109
269
61
Connection
406
Installation
120
273
ø17.5
ø9.5
and
100 or less
81.5
44
18
38
Characteristics
Characteristics
54
15
38 18
Dimensions
Dimensions
231 60
and
70 20 f11 106 106 M8 screw
290 125 70 or f10
Center line of electrical 210 Bolt M1050 318
operation device 280
Bottom view Drilling plan
Accessories
NF1600-SDW (3-pole) Motor-drive type
Operation circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be turned 90º. Mounting angle Breaker
Rear connection M3.5 screw Connection
allowance Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max.
15
160 or more
20
109
61
375
406
120
233
175 or more
38 15
36
44
f17.5
38
60
f11
f9.5
406
120
233
375
44
f17.5
f9.5
38
38
15
18
231 60
70 f11 106 106
Center of electrical 290 125 Bolt M1050 70 M8 screw
210 318 or f10
operation device
280
Bottom view Drilling plan
850
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
All models in the MS-T series are equipped with terminal covers. All models in the MS-T series are equipped with terminal covers.
Also, the series includes a wider range of operating coils. (10-100A) Also, the series includes a wider range of operating coils. (10-100A)
List of Produced Models Selections Specifications List of Produced Models Selections Specifications
P.861 P.864 P.873 P.861 P.864 P.875
Can be used as control relays for magnetic contactors, Can be used to protect motors against burning out when overloaded or
using the large number of contacts to transmit signals. under locking.
List of Produced Models Selections Specifications List of Produced Models Selections Specifications
P.862 P.865 P.887 P.862 P.865 P.881
851
Our lineup of magnetic contactors responds to a diverse range of We have a lineup of high frequency switching, maintenance free, long
customer needs. life products that are ideal for applications where a switching sound is
not desired.
These products can be easily attached to, or combined with, Our wide lineup of related devices is ideal for controlling or protecting
magnetic contactors, contactor relays and thermal relays. motors and other devices.
There are a range of options available that have been designed with
concern for safety and ease of use.
Selections Specifications Specifications
P.865 P.889 P.894
852
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
MSOD-T
SD-T
MS-N Series
MSOD-N
SD-N
· Can be used for general purpose · Applicable for normal and reverse · Can be used with DC · The switch's state is
mechanically maintained, so
List Produced
activities such as starting and stopping rotation, and reverse phase braking control circuits. (The
that no release will occur during
Models
a motor or to protect a motor against (plugging), together with use as a switch main circuit can be
blackouts or drops in power
burning out. between normal and emergency power used with both AC or voltage.
Purpose/ sources. DC) · Uses
Functions · Roadway lighting
· Memory circuits in industrial
Procedure
plants, etc.
Selections
Order
MS-T Series
External appearance of representative models
Overload
Thermal
Relays
MS-N Series
TH-N TH-NSR
Contactors
Solid State
S-N8
· Providing safety during maintenance · Because there are only 3 main contacts and no · Can be used to protect motors against burning
inspections, such as by allowing easy wiring auxiliary contacts installed, the contact area for out when overloaded or under locking.
Motor Circuit
Breakers
operations and protecting against electric attachment to the circuit board is reduced. Overload phase failure protection models (TH-
shocks without the need to install a protective · An auxiliary contact unit can also be attached to T/NKP), delayed trip models (TH-T/NSR)
Purpose/ cover. provide auxiliary contacts. and quick trip models (TH-T/NFS, TH-
Functions TFSKP & TH-NKF) are also available.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 853
Magnetic Starter with Overload, Magnetic Starter with Thermal Relays Magnetic Starters with Magnetic Starters with
Delay open type
Phase Failure Protections and Saturable Reactors Quick-trip Thermal Relays Push Button switch
Features/
Summary
Summary
Features/
· Contactor prevent instantaneous · Protection functionality is · Capable of providing protection · Appropriate for protection of · Because a push button is
drop-out when connected motors, provided against motor
List Produced
against overloads and locking, motors with a short allowed integrated to magnetic starter,
resulting from momentary voltage
Models
drop or power interruption caused overloads, locking and phase and preventing unnecessary time during periods of locking, it can be operated without
by lighting or similar. failure. motions of thermal relays, for such as underwater motors installing a separate push
Starter or contactor remain motors with long startup time and compressors. button.
closed for 1 to 4 seconds. or a large inrush current.
· Uses
· Temporary memory circuits for
Procedure
Selections
automated control equipment,
Order
etc.
Specifications
Contactor type Contactor Relay
Standard (AC operated type) DC operated type Mechanically latched type Delay open type With fast wiring terminal
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
– – – – –
Contactors
Solid State
· Can be used as control relays · Can be used with DC control · The switch's state is · Contactor prevent · Providing safety during
for magnetic contactors, etc., circuits. mechanically maintained, instantaneous drop-out when maintenance inspections, such
Motor Circuit
Breakers
using the large number of (The contact part can be used so that no release will occur connected motors, resulting as by allowing easy wiring
electrical contacts to transmit with both alternating or direct during blackouts or drops in from momentary voltage drop operations and protecting
signals. current) power voltage. or powor interruption caused against electric shocks without
by lighting or similar. the need to install a protective
Starter or contactor remain cover.
closed for 1 to 4 seconds.
854
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
External appearance of representative models
Protective cover units for Protective cover units Operation coil surge
charging parts UN-CV/UN-CZ for terminals UN-CW absorber unit UN-SA
Features/
Summary
· These products can be easily attached to, or combined with, magnetic contactors, contactor relays and thermal relays. Please choose the
Models
Relays
· High frequency switching, maintenance free, long life · The range of applications is expanded · Electronic motor protection relay
Motor Circuit
Breakers
products that are ideal for applications where a switching when used in combination with US-N/K capable of protecting against
sound is not desired. US-H series solid state contactors. overloads, locking and phase
· Uses · Uses failure during startup and operation
Purpose/ · Facilities such as hotels and clean rooms · UA-DR1: For controlling alternating of alternating current motors, and
Functions · Heater load switch for equipment such as injection current control circuits detecting phase reversals.
molding machines · UA-PC: For power control
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 855
DC Interface Contactors NC Main Contact Contactors DC Contactors Medium Voltage Vacuum Contactors
MSOD-Q
B(D)-N DU(D)-N
SD-Q SH-V
Features/
Summary
Summary
Features/
SD-QR (Reversing)
List Produced
· Can be operated directly using · b contacts (always closed contacts) · Can be applied to controlling direct · Exceptionally safe high capacity magnetic
Models
transistor output (24VDC0.1A) from are used as the main circuit contacts, current motors of 440V or under and contactor with no arcing, as a result of the
programmable controllers, etc. so it has applications in motor switching of general direct current breaker inside the vacuum bulb
controls and power switches for circuits
electric light circuits. · Uses
· Uses · Controller for variable speed
· For short circuits during the startup
Procedure
Selections
motors
Order
resistance of motors · For use in dynamic brakes
· For ensuring smooth startup of
alternating current motors
Specifications
Low Voltage / Reduced
Related Components
Voltage Starter
Pneumatic Time Delay Relays Voltage Detecting Relay Re-Starting Relay Star-Delta Starters
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
· A pneumatic timer for time intervals · Can be used for detecting drops in · A relay that automatically restarts a · Can be used to reduce electrical and
Motor Circuit
Breakers
between 0.1 and 60 seconds where a power supply voltage, such as for loaded device, that has stopped as a mechanical shock by reducing startup
precise time interval is not required. switching to private power generation result of voltage drops for a short time voltage and controlling startup torque.
as a result of a power outage, or when and momentary blackouts, upon the
used in a voltage drop alarm. resumption of power supply.
· Uses
· Motor and heater overload circuits
for various kinds of industrial plants
856
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
Down-sizing
Small
10A frame model is over 16% smaller with a width of just 36mm!!
There is a saying that "every bit helps" and now with the industries smallest* general purpose Magnetic Contac-
tor in its class, customers are able to more easily down-size their boards than ever before.
For AC-operated 10A frame class general-purpose Magnetic Contactor (based on survey conducted by Mitsubishi dated September 2016)
Reduction
by 7mm!
List Produced
Models
Reduction
by 35mm!
Procedure
Selections
Order
Relays
High-pressure gas
Contactor
Relays
High-pressure gas
opening
Motor Circuit
Fixed contact
Breakers
Arc
Movable contact
Traditional 13 43
–
Front view
21 31
13 21
MS-N Series
22 32
14 22 14 44
New slimline
NEW
Front view 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
MS-T Series
! m! m! m!
-7mm -10m -20m -12m
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
Features/
Summary
Summary
Features/
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Traditional 13 43 13
21
43
31
13
21
43
31
Front view
21 31
22 32 22 32
14 44 14 44
MS-N Series
22 32
14 44
List Produced
S-N35 S-N50 S-N50AE S-N65 S-N65AE S-N80 S-N95
Models
75 75 88 88 100
New slimline
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Front view
MS-T Series
Procedure
Selections
m! 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
m!
Order
-13m -12m
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
Specifications
Front view 13A 18A 20A 32A
43 53 63
Contactor
– –
Magnetic
13 43
Starter/
21 31
SD-N Series
22 32
14 44
Overload
Thermal
Relays
New slimline NEW NEW
Front view
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
SD-T Series
m!
-10m 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
Contactor
Relays
Standardization
Standardization
New integrated terminal covers Target frame : 10A to 50A frame
The perennial issues of remembering to order the terminal covers, fitting them correctly or loosing them in the
process are challenges of the past. The integrated terminal cover system means they are always there, on the
Magnetic Contactor or its Auxiliary contact, ready to be used.
ver is
inal co
A term standard in
d as
include ontactor!!
th c
e
Reduce your coil inventory by up to 50% Target frame : 10A to 35A frame
List Produced
The 14 types of operation coil ratings available with the SN Series have been halved to 8 types with that
Models
increasing the applicable voltage range. Users can reduce their inventory, and by integrating the types of coils
manufactured, a shorter delivery can be realized.
Rated voltage [V] Rated voltage [V]
Coil designation Coil designation
50Hz 60Hz 50Hz/60Hz
Procedure
Selections
Order
12VAC 12 12 12VAC 12
24VAC 24 24 24VAC 24
48VAC 48–50 48–50 48VAC 48–50
100VAC 100 100–110 100VAC 100–127
120VAC 110–120 115–120 200VAC 200–240
Specifications
400VAC
Magnetic
380–410 400–440
Starter/
By integrating the electromagnetic field analysis and drive analysis, inconsistency in the electromagnetic
attraction force is suppressed and rise of the coil temperature is reduced.
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Displacement [mm]
Contactor
Relays
Time [ms]
OFF state ON state When 150VAC 60Hz is applied on 200VAC coil
Option Unit
Capable of direct drive with transistor output of PLC, etc Target frame : 10A to 32A frame *DC-operated models
The adopted high-efficiency polarized electromagnet greatly
Reduced power consumption Reduced power consumption
Contactors
7W 9W by 76%
13A Frame
(Coil:12/24VDC) 7W 2.2W 69%
20A Frame
(Coil:12/24VDC) 9W 2.2W 76% 2.2W 2.2W
0 0
32A Frame
(Coil:12/24VDC) – 2.2W – Traditional New Traditional New
*48VDC to 220VDC:3.3W
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 859
Features/
Summary
gear assemblies set forth with DIN EN 50274/VDE 0660 Teil
Summary
Features/
514, the range for providing protection against contact of live
sections is divided into "Finger Safe (preventing finger
contact)" and "Back of hand safe (protecting back of hand
List Produced
contact), and standards are provided. The MS-T Series
Models
terminal cover satisfies the requirements of these provisions.
Procedure
Selections
Order
The MS-T Series' auxiliary contacts can operate
with load as light as 20V 3mA making it suitable
Specifications
for direct control/operation from a PLC output.
Contactor
Magnetic
Smart wiring
Smart Wiring Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Smart design means Smart wiring Target frame : 10A to 50A frames
Contactor
Relays
The integrated terminal covers have an additional benefit in that they act as a guide to improve wiring
efficiency but also retain the terminal screw in place: no mislaying the screw, no dropping it or having trouble
Option Unit
reinserting it in to the terminal block just fast efficient wiring. Fast wiring terminals (model name with suffix
“BC” ) are also available to further improve wiring efficiency, workability and hence productivity.
!
wiring
Easy
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Screw holder lifts up the screw. Insert a ring crimp lug Tighten the screw
860
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
Standard
Procedure
Selections
Global
Order
Global Standard
Specifications
EN
Relays
Certificate authority GB
Standards EC directive
IEC JIS
Note
Contactor
Relays
Note : Also compliant with the requirements for mirror contacts comply with IEC60947-4-1 Annex F.
When the MMP-T Series and the MS-T Series are used together, the higher SCCR (UL short-circuit current
rating) value, can be achieved. That will be a great support for your business in North America.
* For details on the SCCR value when used in combination with the Motor Circuit Breaker, refer to the Motor Circuit Breaker catalog.
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 861
Frame T10 T12 T20 T21 T25 T32 T35 T50 T65 T80 T100 N125 N150 N180 N220 N300 N400 N600 N800
2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
Category AC-3 220V [2.2] [2.7] [3.7] [4] [5.5] [7.5] [7.5] [11] [15] [19] [22] 30 37 45 55 75 110 160 200
4 5.5 7.5 11 15 15 18.5 22 30 45 55
Rated capacity [kW] 440V [2.7] [4] [7.5] [7.5] [11] [15] [15] [22] [30] [37] [45] 60 75 90 110 150 200 300 400
Standard MSO-
specifications MSOD-
Summary
Features/
With saturable MSO-SR
reactor MSOD-SR
List
List Produced
Models
Models
Magnetic Starters
Produced
2-element Quick-acting MSO-FS
characteristics thermal MSOD-FS
Procedure
Selections
characteristics thermal MSOD-FSKP
Order
3-element (2E) Quick-acting
characteristics thermal MSO-KF
Open time quick motion type MSO-QM
Specifications
mounted type MSOD-SA
Wiring MSO-BC
streamlining
terminal MSOD-BC
Contactor
MSO-YS
Magnetic
Anticorrosion
Starter/
treatment MSOD-YS
Delay open type MSO-DL
Mechanically MSOL-
Overload
Thermal
latched type
Relays
MSOLD-
With terminal cover MSO-CW
Standard S-
specifications SD-
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Standard specifications
3-element (2E) thermal MS-KP
Standard MSO-
specifications MSOD-
3-element (2E) MSO-KP
thermal MSOD-KP
With saturable MSO-SR
reactor MSOD-SR
3-element (2E) thermal MSO-KPSR
With saturable reactor MSOD-KPSR
Magnetic Starters
characteristics thermal
Open type
MSOD-FS
3-element (2E) Quick-acting MSO-FSKP
characteristics thermal MSOD-FSKP
3-element (2E) Quick-acting
characteristics thermal MSO-KF
List Produced
Produced
terminal MSOD-BC
With terminal cover MSO-CW
Procedure
Selections
Anticorrosion MSO-YS
Order
treatment MSOD-YS
Mechanically MSOL-
latched type MSOLD-
Specifications
Standard S-
specifications SD-
Surge absorber S-SA (Note3)
mounted type SD-SA
Anticorrosion
S-YS
treatment
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Mechanically SL-
Overload
Thermal
latched type
Relays
SLD-
Class 2 heat resistance S-FN
With reversible S-SD
conductor (both power
supply and load side) SD-SD
Contactor
5: For the auxiliary contact arrangement in the reversing type, the auxiliary contact arrangement combination for two Magnetic Contactors is indicated as ×2. When using the standard contact arrangement, there is
no need to make a special designation, but when using the special arrangement, designate the contact arrangement for two units.
<Designation example> In case of 1b × 2 + 2b: 2B
6: The auxiliary contact arrangement for the mechanically latched type differs from the delay open type.
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 863
Frame T18 T25 T50 T65 T100 N120 N120TA N220 N400 N600
Heater designation (Standard specifications) 0.12 to 15 0.24 to 22 24 to 50 12 to 65 54 to 100 42 to 82 105 to 125 82 to 180 105 to 330 250 to 660
Standard specifications TH-
With saturable reactor TH-SR
2-element Quick-acting
characteristics thermal TH-FS
Thermal Overload Relays
3-element (2E)
thermal TH-KP
3-element (2E) thermal
With saturable reactor TH-KPSR
TH-FSKP
3-element (2E) Quick-acting
characteristics thermal
TH-KF
With terminal cover TH-CW
Wiring streamlining
terminal TH-BC
Anticorrosion
treatment TH-YS
Summary
Features/
Contactor Relays
Frame T5 T9
List
List Produced
Number of contact 5 9
Models
Models
Produced
5a 9a
Contact arrangement 4a1b 7a2b
3a2b 5a4b
Procedure
Selections
Standard SR-
Order
DC operated type SRD-
Mechanically latched SRL-
type SRLD-
Specifications
With large rated SR-JH
auxiliary contacts SRD-JH
SR-LC
With overlap contact
SRD-LC
Delay open type SR-DL
Contactor
Magnetic
SR-BC
Starter/
With fast wiring terminal
SRD-BC
SR-SA
With surge absorber
SRD-SA
Notes 1: —indicates out of manufacturing range.
Overload
Thermal
2: Refer to the individual rating table for the contact rating when using a type with large
Relays
capacity contact or type with overlap contact. The value given in brackets is the value for
switching the load with two poles installed in a series.
3: When using the mechanically latched type (SRL-, SRLD-), one each can be
mounted on the opening coil and closing coil.
4: Only the side-on auxiliary contact unit UT-AX11 can be mounted on the mechanically
latched type SRL-T5 or SRLD-T5. Only UN-AX11 can be mounted on SRL-N4 or
Contactor
SRLD-N4.
Relays
5: Both the surge absorber unit and DC/AC interface unit cannot be additionally mounted
onto the Contactor Relay's coil terminal.
6: A live section protection cover is provided as a standard.
7: The minimum applicable load level for the contacts at the SR(D)-T9 head-on section
(four terminals on upper level) is the same as UT-AX2/4.
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
864
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
MS 2× T21 KP SA PM
Basic type Combined Thermal Overload Relays Push-button operation (only non-reversible type)
MS AC operated type No code Manual reset (standard) No code Standard specifications without push-button
AR Automatic reset PM With push-button (with thermal reset)
Non-Reversing/Reversing Combined Thermal Overload Relays PS With push-button (without thermal reset)
No code Non-Reversing No code With 2-element Thermal Overload Relays
2× Reversing KP With 3-element Thermal Overload Relays Operation coil specifications
MSO 2× T10 BC KP SA YS
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Order
Relays
Magnetic Contactors
Option Unit
S 2x T10 BC SA
T10-T50
Mechanically latched BC With fast DL Delay open type T12, T21
SLD wiring terminal
DC operated type
CW With terminal cover T65, T80
With special auxiliary contact Applicable model
Non-Reversing/Reversing
No code Standard All series
No code Non-Reversing
With large rated
JH T10-T100
2× Reversing auxiliary contacts
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 865
Basic type Reset method of Thermal Overload Relays Special environment Applicable model
Thermal No code Manual reset (standard) No code Standard
TH
Overload Relays T18, T25,
AR Automatic reset Anticorrosion
YS treatment T50, T65, T100
Combined Thermal Overload Relays specification
Frame size No code 2-element Thermal Overload Relays
T18, T25, T50, T65, T100 KP 3-element Thermal Overload Relays
Note: Frame size classification by mounting type 2-element delay trip type
SR (with saturable reactor)
Magnetic Starters for independent mounting T25
Summary
3-element delay trip type
Features/
For Magnetic Starters T18 KPSR (with saturable reactor)
FS 2-element quick trip type
FSKP 3-element quick trip type
List Produced
Models
Finger protection Applicable model
No code Standard
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Order
CW With terminal cover T65
Contactor Relays
Specifications
SR T5 BC SA
Contactor
Basic type Finger protection Applicable model Operation coil and operation circuit specification Applicable model
Magnetic
Starter/
SR AC operated type No code Standard No code Standard
SRD DC operated type T5, T9 With surge T5, T9
With fast SA
MechanicalIy BC absorber
wiring terminal
SRL latched AC
operated type
Overload
Thermal
Relays
With special contact Applicable model
Mechanically latched
SRLD
DC operated type No code Standard
With large rated
JH
auxiliary contacts T5, T9
Contactor
Frame size
Relays
Optional Units
UT AX 4 BC
Contactors
Solid State
With fast
Breakers
Explanation of terms
Name and display of representative models
Item Purpose Meaning of terms
(Numbers go inside )
(1) Magnetic starter Sealed model: MS
Combines an magnetic contactor and thermal relay.
(magnetic switch) Open model: MSO(D), MSOL(D)
This is a contactor that switches the main contact parts using the power of the electromagnet. Accordingly, For use with both alternating current and direct current main circuits: S(D), SL(D)
(2) Magnetic contactor
there are both AC and DC magnetic contactors, depending on the type of main circuit (AC or DC). For use with direct current main circuits only: DU(D)
(3) AC magnetic contactor An magnetic contactor that uses an electromagnet powered by an AC power source. S
(4) DC magnetic contactor An magnetic contactor that uses an electromagnet powered by a DC power source. SD
1. Devices
A contactor where the contacts are closed (ON) by electrical (via a closing coil) or mechanical operation,
(5) Magnetic contactor with
and the closed state is maintained by the mechanical latch even if that controlling force is removed. SL(D)
mechanical latch Opening the circuit (OFF) is achieved by electrically (via a tripping coil) or mechanically tripping the contacts.
A contactor that can maintain a closed circuit contact for a few seconds by discharging the capacitor,
(6) Delayed release magnetic contactor S-DL
in the event of a voltage drop or momentary power interruption occurring to the control circuit.
(7) Reversing magnetic contactor A magnetic contactor which can reverse the motor by switching the contacts S-(D)-2x, SL(D)-2x
When the motor experiences excess overcurrent (overload) as a result of overloading, locking or
(8) Thermal relay phase failure, the bimetal strips inside the relay are bent by the heat, which trips the output TH
contacts on the magnetic contactor and opens the circuit, preventing the motor from burning out.
(1) Rated insulation voltage The voltage that is used as the standard for guaranteeing the withstand voltage and determining the insulation distance. V (both AC and DC)
(2) Rated operating voltage The voltage that determines closed circuit capacity, interrupting capacity, switching frequency and switching durability. -VAC, VDC
(3) Rated Capacity The capacity of the maximum load capable of being applied at the rated operating voltage. Motor φ kW, Resistance φ kW
(4) Rated operating current The maximum amount of current capable of being applied at the rated operating voltage while maintaining satisfactory performance. AC-3A, AC-4A, DC1A
Summary
Features/
2. Rating
The amount of current that allows the passage of electric current for 8 hours without the temperatures
(5) Open thermal current (lth) Ith=A
of the individual parts rising above their rated values and without switching magnetic contactors.
Drives the switching action of an magnetic contactor by magnetizing the iron core of an
(6) Operating Coil
electromagnet and then demagnetizing it, creating and then removing the attractive force.
List Produced
· Operating Coil Designations The model code which must be specified at time of order and indicates a representative value of the rated operating voltage. ACV, DCV
Models
· Operating Coil Ratings The rated operating voltage for the operating coil (nominal voltage) and the frequency (AC only). VHz, DCV
The current value at which the circuit can be closed (contacts ON) under the conditions
(1) Closed Circuit Capacity A
determined by the standard.
3. Performance
The current at which the circuit can be broken (contacts OFF) under the conditions
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
· Electrical durability Durability against electrical wear while being switched, with electrical current passing through the main circuit, under the conditions determined by the standard. x 10,000 times
The minimum voltage, in the case where the magnetic contactor excites the operating coil, at which the to V
(1) Operating Voltage
contacts can be closed (ON). (In the case of mechanical latch format, closing voltage and tripping voltage) (Specified value: 85% or less of rated operating voltage)
to V
4. Characteristic
Maximum voltage at which the contacts are opened (OFF), when the voltage applied to Specified value: 20% or more of rated operating voltage during
(2) Open voltage
the magnetic contactor's operating coil is gradually reduced. alternating current operation 10% or more
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Relays
(1) Inching Inching or jogging is where the startup current is frequently switched by small rotations of the motor, etc.
(2) Plugging (reverse phase braking) Stopping the motor by suddenly switching the connection of the contacts to the reverse phase.
This uses auxiliary a contacts of an magnetic contactor that has already been switched ON, to
(3) Self Maintenance of Status maintain the ON status of the circuit that passes current though the operating coil of that contactor,
even if there is no ON signal. This is canceled by an OFF operation or a power interruption, etc.
Contactor
Relays
As in the reversing format, when two magnetic contactors must not be set to ON at the same time, in order to
make sure that one contactor cannot be switched to ON, the magnetic contactor that has already been switched
(4) Interlock ON prevents the other magnetic contactor from switching to ON. The two types of interlock are mechanical
interlock, which uses a mechanical structure, and electrical interlock which uses auxiliary b contacts.
Option Unit
(5) a contact This is a contact that is normally open, and which closes when power is supplied to the operating coil. It is also called an NO (Normally Open) contact.
(6) b contact This is a contact that is normally closed, and which opens when power is supplied to the operating coil. It is also called an NC (Normally Closed) contact.
5. Operation Others
Circuits with a large electric current flow (from several A to around 1000A), such as motors and electric light
(7) Main circuit
circuits, etc., are switched by the main contact. (Terminal number between 1/L1-2/T1, 3/L2-4/T2, 5/L3-6/T3)
Contactors
Solid State
Circuits with small current flows (from several tens of mA to several A), such as the operating coil
(8) Operating (control) circuit
of an magnetic contactor or display circuits, are switched with auxiliary a and b contacts.
(9) Line starting This is the most common way starting a motor, where the entire voltage is applied to the motor to start or stop it. Also called full voltage starting.
When starting the motor, the winding is arranged in a star to reduce the electrical and mechanical
(10) Star-delta starting shock. After starting the winding is changed to a delta connection. The current used during starting
Motor Circuit
is 1/3 of that for line starting, making this the cheapest reduced voltage starting method.
Breakers
Responsible for switching to start and stop the motor during continuous operation. (Durability testing uses 6 times the
(11) Category AC-3
rated operating current for closing the circuit and current equal to the rated operating current for breaking the circuit)
Responsible for switching the startup current of the motor. (Durability testing uses 6 times the rated operating
(12) Category AC-4
current for both closing and breaking the circuit), Can also be applied to inching and plugging.
Responsible for switching the electric heat and resistance load, etc., so that inrush current during starting is almost zero.
(13) Category AC-1
(Durability testing uses current equal to the rated operating current for closing and breaking the circuit)
2E: A motor protection relay that provides overloading/locking + phase failure protection, and has a thermal relay and electronics. TH-KP, ET-N
(14) 2E and 3E
3E: An electronic motor protection relay that provides overload/locking + phase failure + antiphase (reverse phase) protection. ET-N
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 867
For S-T10 to T50 types, SR-T5 and T9 types For S-T10SA to T50SA types, SR-T5SA and T9SA types
Coil Rated voltage [V] Coil Rated voltage [V] Varistor voltage
Coil indication Coil indication
designation 50Hz/60Hz designation 50Hz/60Hz [V]
24VAC 24 24VAC 24 120
48VAC 48-50 48VAC 48-50 120
100VAC 100-127 100VAC 100-127 Rated voltage 470
Rated voltage
200VAC 200-240 200VAC 200-240 and frequency 470
and frequency
300VAC 260-300 300VAC 260-300 910
400VAC 380-440 400VAC 380-440 910
500VAC 460-550 Notes 1 : Add "SA" to the end of the type name to order the operation coil surge absorber mounting type (varistor).
Example: S-T10SA 100VAC
Notes 1 : Even when the single rating (example: 200V60Hz) is specified for an order, the
2 : Even when the single rating (example: 200V60Hz) is specified for an order, the above rating voltage is
above rating voltage is indicated on the product.
indicated on the product.
2 : Even when the single rating (example: 200V60Hz) is specified for an order, the
above rating voltage is indicated on the product.
For S-N35, N50AE, N65AE, B-N20 types, For SR-K100 type, For SRT-NN/NF types
Rated voltage [V] Note 1 : Even when the single rating (example: 200V60Hz) is specified for an order, the left rating voltage is indicated on
Coil
Coil indication the product.
designation 50Hz/60Hz Designations of the coils with the following voltage and frequency specifications are as follows.
220V60Hz➝Designation 200VAC
12VAC 12 12 380V50Hz➝Designation 400VAC
Summary
Features/
24VAC 24 24 240V50Hz➝Designation 230VAC
220V50Hz➝Designation 230VAC
48VAC 48-50 48-50 415V50Hz➝Designation 400VAC
100VAC 100 100-110
120VAC 110-120 115-120
127VAC 125-127 127
List Produced
200VAC 200 200-220 Rated voltage
Models
220VAC 208-220 220 and frequency
230VAC 220-240 230-240
260VAC 240-260 260-280
380VAC 346-380 380
400VAC 380-415 400-440
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
440VAC 415-440 460-480
Order
500VAC 500 500-550
Specifications
Notes 1 : Add “SA” to the end of the model name to place an order for Magnetic Contactor with surge
Coil Rated voltage [V] Coil Varistor voltage absorber (varistor).
designation 50Hz/60Hz indication [V] Example: S-N35SA 100VAC
2 : Even when the single rating (example: 200V60Hz) is specified for an order, the left rating voltage
12VAC 12 12 120 is indicated on the product.
24VAC 24 24 120 Designations of the coils with the following voltage and frequency specifications are as follows.
220V60Hz➝Designation 200VAC
48VAC 48-50 48-50 120
Rated 240V50Hz➝Designation 230VAC
100VAC 100 100-110 470
Contactor
220V50Hz➝Designation 230VAC
Magnetic
voltage
Starter/
120VAC 110-120 115-120 470 3 : Variations other than those indicated on the left cannot be manufactured.
and 4 : S-N50AE and N65AE are already equipped with a varistor. Therefore, no need to add “SA” to the
127VAC 125-127 127 470 end of model name for an order.
frequency
200VAC 200 200-220 470
220VAC 208-220 220 470
230VAC 220-240 230-240 470
Overload
Thermal
For S-T65 to T100 types, For S-T65QM to T100QM types, Relays
Rated voltage
200VAC 200-240
and frequency
300VAC 260-350
400VAC 380-440
500VAC 460-550
Notes 1 : The 24VAC and 48VAC coils for the following model names cannot be manufactured.
Contactors
Solid State
Coil designation is the model code which must be specified at time of order. For information about
whether or not a product with a special coil of the rated voltage designation can be manufactured,
please contact your dealer or our company. Note that a special coil is manufactured without
certifications for the various standards (no standard marks).
868
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
DC operated type
For SD-T12 to T100 types, SRD-T5 and T9 types For SD-T12SA to T50SA types, SRD-T5SA and T9SA types
Coil Coil Varistor voltage
Rated voltage Coil indication Rated voltage Coil indication
designation designation [V]
12VDC 12VDC 12VDC 12VDC 47
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 47
48VDC 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC 120
100VDC 100VDC 100VDC 100VDC 470
Rated voltage Rated voltage
110VDC 110VDC 110VDC 110VDC 470
125VDC 120-125VDC 125VDC 120-125VDC 470
200VDC 200VDC 200VDC 200VDC 470
220VDC 220VDC 220VDC 220VDC 470
Notes 1 : The operating coil terminal has a polarity (excluding T35 to T100 types). Connect Notes 1 : If the type with surge absorber for operation coil (varistor) is required, add “SA” to the end of the model
the positive side to terminal number A1 (+) and the negative side to A2 (-). when placing your order. Example: SD-T21SA 100VDC
2 : If the operation power supply is a rectifier, open and close the coil on the DC side. 2 : The operating coil terminal has a polarity (excluding T35SA to T50SA types). Connect the positive side to
terminal number A1 (+) and the negative side to A2 (-).
3 : Variations other than the above cannot be manufactured.
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Notes 1 : The coils do not have polarity. Notes 1 : Add “SA” to the end of the model name to place an order for Magnetic Contactor with surge absorber
2 : If the operation power supply is a rectifier, open and close the coil on the DC side. (varistor).
3 : Two coils are internally connected in series for SD-N80 to SD-N400 and DUD-N60 Example: SD-N21SA 100VDC
to DUD-N260 types. 2 : The coils do not have polarity.
3 : Variations other than the above cannot be manufactured.
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
24VDC 24VDC
Relays
48VDC 48VDC
100VDC 100-110VDC Rated voltage
125VDC 120-125VDC
Contactor
200VDC 200-220VDC
Relays
Coil indication Rated voltage Coil indication · For SRL-T5 or SL-T21 and SL-N35 to SL-N80
designation 50Hz/60Hz designation 24VAC (24V, 50/60Hz), 48VAC(48-50V, 50/60Hz)
· For SRL-T5 or SL-T21
100VAC 100-127 12VDC (Note 2) 12VDC 12VAC (12V, 50/60Hz)
2 : A coil with the rated voltage of 12VDC cannot be manufactured
200VAC 200-240 24VDC 24VDC for N80 to N800 types.
Rated voltage 3 : The coils for direct current do not have polarity.
300VAC 260-350 48VDC 48VDC
Motor Circuit
T10
0.4 2.1 (1.7 to 2.5) 1.3 (1 to 1.6)
T25
T35
T12
T20, T21
(0.55) 2.5 (2 to 3) 1.3 (1 to 1.6)
T50
T25
(1.0) 5 (4 to 6) 2.5 (2 to 3)
T35
1.5 6.6 (5.2 to 8) 3.6 (2.8 to 4.4)
T50
(1.9)2.2 9 (7 to 11) 5 (4 to 6)
Summary
Features/
(2.5) 11 (9 to 13) 5 (4 to 6)
(3.0) 11 (9 to 13) 6.6 (5.2 to 8)
3.7 15 (12 to 18) 6.6 (5.2 to 8)
5.5 22 (18 to 26) 11 (9 to 13)
7.5 29 (24 to 34) 15 (12 to 18)
T65
T80
List Produced
11 42 (34 to 50) 22 (18 to 26)
Models
T65
15 54 (43 to 65) 29 (24 to 34)
T80
N125
T100
N150
N125
N150
45 150 (120 to 180) 82 (65 to 100)
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
N300
Order
N400
N180
55 180 (140 to 220) 105 (85 to 125)
N220
(60) 180 (140 to 220) 105 (85 to 125)
N300
75 250 (200 to 300) 125 (100 to 150)
N400
90 330 (260 to 400) 150 (120 to 180)
Specifications
110 330 (260 to 400) 180 (140 to 220)
N600
N800
N600
160 500 (400 to 600) 250 (200 to 300)
N800
200 660 (520 to 800) 330 (260 to 400)
300 500 (400 to 600)
400 660 (520 to 800)
Contactor
Magnetic
Notes 1: Heater designation is the model code which must be specified at time of order.
Starter/
2: For choices of heater designation with voltage, motor capacity other than those shown above, refer to page 870.
3: N600/N800 should be used in combination with the TH-N600 and a transformer (Mitsubishi CW-model) sold separately.
4: The figures in brackets ( ) for motor capacity indicate special capacity.
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Indicates the frame of an magnetic starter that is applicable to a heater designation of a thermal relay used in a single phase motor.
100 to 110V 200 to 220V
Motor
capacity Heater designation [A] Heater designation [A]
[kW] Magnetic Contactors frame Magnetic Contactors frame
(setting range) (setting range)
Contactor
Relays
T12
T20, T21
T20, T21
0.2 5 (4 to 6) 2.5 (2 to 3)
T10
T12
T25
T35
T25
T35
Option Unit
2: For choices of heater designation with voltage, motor capacity other than those shown above, refer to page 870.
3: In the case of the enclosed models (MS-T12 model), the applicable capacity of the 100 to 110V motors is 0.4kW.
Motor Circuit
Breakers
870
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters
0.75 3.6A 3.6A 2.1A 2.1A 1.7A 1.7A 1.3A 1.3A 15A 15A 6.6A 9A 0.75
1.0 5A 5A 2.5A 2.5A 2.5A 2.1A 1.7A 1.7A 1.0
1.1 5A 5A 3.6A 2.5A 2.5A 2.1A 1.7A 1.7A 22A 22A 9A 9A 1.1
1.3 6.6A 5A 3.6A 3.6A 2.5A 2.5A 2.1A 2.1A 1.3
List Produced
1.5 6.6A 6.6A 3.6A 3.6A 3.6A 2.5A 2.5A 2.1A 29A 22A 15A 11A 1.5
Models
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
7.5 29A 29A 15A 15A 15A 11A 9A 9A 105A 54A 7.5
Order
18.5 to 19 67A 67A 42A 35A 35A 29A 22A 22A 18.5 to 19
22 82A 82A 54A 42A 42A 35A 29A 22A 22
25 82A 82A 54A 54A 54A 35A 35A 29A 25
30 105A 105A 67A 54A 54A 42A 42A 35A 30
37 125A 125A 82A 67A 67A 54A 54A 42A 37
Contactor
132 500A 500A 250A 250A 250A 180A 150A 150A 132
Relays
150 to 160 500A 500A 330A 250A 250A 250A 180A 180A 150 to 160
185 660A 500A 330A 330A 330A 250A 250A 180A 185
200 660A 660A 500A 330A 330A 330A 250A 180A 200
220 660A 660A 500A 500A 500A 330A 250A 250A 220
Contactor
Relays
In that case, specify the heater designation after checking the full load current of the motor.
3: As for a single phased motor, the full load current values may be different depending on its mode of startup and operation. Therefore, the table above should be used as a guideline, and the full load current should
be checked in actual use when determining an appropriate heater designation. In the case of a single phase motor, please connect the motor as shown in the diagram below.
MC MC
THR THR
Motor Circuit
Breakers
M M
Magnetic Contactors Non-Reversing S-T10 S-T12 S-T20 S-T21 S-T25 S-T32 S-T35 S-T50 S-T65 S-T80 S-T100
(Without Thermal Overload Relays, Open type) Reversing S-2×T10 S-2×T12 S-2×T20 S-2×T21 S-2×T25 S-2×T32 S-2×T35 S-2×T50 S-2×T65 S-2×T80 S-2×T100
Magnetic Starters Non-Reversing MSO-T10 MSO-T12 MSO-T20 MSO-T21 MSO-T25 – MSO-T35 MSO-T50 MSO-T65 MSO-T80 MSO-T100
Open type
(With standard Reversing MSO-2×T10 MSO-2×T12 MSO-2×T20 MSO-2×T21 MSO-2×T25 – MSO-2×T35 MSO-2×T50 MSO-2×T65 MSO-2×T80 MSO-2×T100
Model name
2-element, With
Non-Reversing MS-T10 MS-T12 – MS-T21 – – MS-T35 MS-T50 MS-T65 MS-T80 MS-T100
Thermal Overload Enclosed
Relays) Reversing – MS-2×T21 – – MS-2×T35 MS-2×T50 MS-2×T65 MS-2×T80 MS-2×T100
Combined Thermal Overload Relays TH-T18 TH-T25 – TH-T25/T50 TH-T25/T50 TH-T65 TH-T65/T100 TH-T65/T100
Magnetic Starters Non-Reversing MSO-T10KP MSO-T12KP MSO-T20KP MSO-T21KP MSO-T25KP – MSO-T35KP MSO-T50KP MSO-T65KP MSO-T80KP MSO-T100KP
(With Open type 3-element(2E), With
Thermal Overload Relays) Reversing MSO-2×T10KP MSO-2×T12KP MSO-2×T20KP MSO-2×T21KP MSO-2×T25KP – MSO-2×T35KP MSO-2×T50KP MSO-2×T65KP MSO-2×T80KP MSO-2×T100KP
Combined Thermal Overload Relays TH-T18KP TH-T25KP – TH-T25/T50KP TH-T25/T50KP TH-T65KP TH-T65/T100KP TH-T65/T100KP
Rated insulation voltage [V] 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage [kV] 6
Rated frequency [Hz] 50/60
Pollution degree 3
220 to 240VAC 2.5/11 [2.2/11] 3.5/13 [2.7/13] 4.5/18 [3.7/18] 5.5/25 [4/20] 7.5/30(26) [5.5/26] 7.5/32 [7.5/32] 11/40 [7.5/35] 15/55 [11/50] 18.5/65 [15/65] 22/85 [19/80] 30/105 [22/100]
Rated operational current / power Category
AC-3 380 to 440VAC 4/9 [2.7/7] 5.5/12 [4/9] 7.5/18 [7.5/18] 11/23 [7.5/20] 15/30(26) [11/25] 15/32 [15/32] 18.5/40 [15/32] 22/48 [22/48] 30/65 [30/65] 45/85 [37/80] 55/105 [45/93]
Main contact rating
(Three-phase squirrel-cage motor load 500VAC 4/7 [2.7/6] 5.5/9 [5.5/9] 7.5/17 [7.5/17] 11/17 [7.5/17] 15/24 [11/20] 15/24 [11/20] 18.5/32 [15/26] 25/38 [22/38] 37/60 [30/45] 45/75 [45/75] 55/85 [45/75]
standard responsibility) (Note 1) [kW/A]
690VAC 4/5 5.5/7 7.5/9 7.5/9 11/12 11/12 15/17 22/26 30/38 45/52 55/65
Rated operational current / power Category 200 to 220VAC 1.5/8 2.2/11 3.7/18 4.5/20 5.5/26 5.5/26 7.5/35 11/50 15/65 19/80
AC-4
380 to 440VAC 2.2/6 4/9 5.5/13 7.5/17 11/24 11/24 15/32 22/47 30/62 37/75
(Three-phase squirrel-cage motor load
inching responsibility) [kW/A] 500 to 550VAC 2.7/6 5.5/9 5.5/10 7.5/12 7.5/13 11/17 15/24 22/38 30/45 37/55
Summary
Features/
Single-phase motor maximum applicable load/ 100 to 110VAC 0.4/11 0.55/13 0.75/18 0.9/18(20) 1.2/26 1.5/32 1.7/34(35) – – – –
maximum capacity (Category AC-3) [kW/A] 200 to 220VAC 0.8/11 1.0/13 1.5/18 1.8/18(20) – – – – – – –
Rated operational current / power Category 100 to 220VAC 20 32 60 80 100 120 150
AC-1 (Resistance, heater load) 380 to 440VAC 11 13 32 60 80 100 120 150
Conventional free air thermal current Ith [A] 20 32 60 80 100 120 150
List Produced
Standard accessory Non-Reversing 1a 1a1b 2a2b – 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b
Models
(Note 5) Reversing 1a×2+2b 1a1b×2+2b 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2
Auxiliary contact rating
(Note 6, Note 8)
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
100 to 120VAC 6 6 6 6 6 – 6 6 6 6 6
Order
Rated operational current
(Category AC-15 : Alternating current coil load) [A] 200 to 240VAC 3 3 3 3 3 – 3 3 3 3 3
Conventional free air thermal current Ith [A] 10 10 10 10 10 – 10 10 10 10 10
Mechanical durability [ten thousand times] 1000 500
Category AC-3 200 (Note 4) 200 100
Specifications
Performance
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Characteristic
Magnetic
Sealed [VA] 7 7 4.5 10 20 23
Starter/
Starter/
Coil consumption [VA]
Inrush [VA] 45 75 55 110 115 210
Magnetic Contactors (without Thermal Overload Relays) Non-Reversing 36×75×78 43×75×78 63×81×81 43×81×81 75×89×91 88×106×106 88×106×106 100×124×127
Outside dimensions
(Width × Height × Depth) [mm] Reversing 82×85×78 97×85×78 136×81×81 96×81×111 160×114×97 216×115×112 216×115×112 270×140×137
Open type Magnetic Starters Non-Reversing 45×115×79 63×128×82 – 75×157.5×91 90×158×106 90×169.5×106 100×191×127
(Width × Height × Depth) [mm] Reversing 90×125×79 97×125×79 136×138×82 – 160×179×97 216×169×112 216×180.5×112 270×208×137
Overload
Thermal
Relays
(Contact structure 1a1b) UT-AX2/AX11 UN-AX2/AX11 UN-AX80
Auxiliary contact
(Contact structure 2a2b) UT-AX4 UN-AX4 –
blocks
With contact for low level signals – UN-LL22 –
Model names of attachable options (Note 9)
Notes 1: The figure inside the brackets ( ) for rated operating current is applicable to magnetic contactors (without thermal relays). The figure inside the brackets ( ) for motor capacity is applicable to enclosed magnetic
starters.
2: We can also manufacture coil surge absorption built-in models (-SA models) for alternating current operated types T10 to T50 and direct current operated types T12 to T50.
3: The T65 to N800 alternating current operating coils incorporate surge absorption function, so that a surge absorption unit for the coil is not required because coil switching surges do not occur.
Motor Circuit
4: 1,000,000 times for T20 AC-3 Class 380V or higher, and 15,000 times for T35 to N800 AC-4 Class 380V or higher.
Breakers
5: The auxiliary contact structures for mechanical latch and delayed release models are different. For details of mechanical latch models, refer to page 879.
6: +2b of T10 to T20 auxiliary contact arrangements in Reversing type represents b contact built in the UN-ML11 interlock unit.
7: The main unit and the auxiliary contact units need to be attached by customers as separate processes. The auxiliary contact unit for sealed models, and the head on auxiliary contact for mechanical latched
models, cannot be attached as additions.
For details of the auxiliary contact unit, refer to pages 890.
8: For auxiliary contact arrangement in Reversing type, ×2 is displayed as combined auxiliary contact arrangement of two Magnetic Contactors. Please specify the contact arrangement for which two main units are
combined must be designated. <Designation example> In case of 1b × 2 + 2b: 2B
9: In the case of using an option as an applied product, be aware that some options are unable to be attached. For details of combinations, refer to pages 890 to 891.
10: The figure in the square brackets indicates the rated current shown on the rating plate of the product at which the category AC-3 opening/closing durability is 2,000,000 times (1,000,000 times for the T20 380V).
Refer to the electric durability curve for the life performance.
872
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Magnetic Starter/Contactor
Magnetic Contactors Non-Reversing S-N125 S-N150 S-N180 S-N220 S-N300 S-N400 S-N600 S-N800
(Without Thermal Overload Relays, Open type) Reversing S-2×N125 S-2×N150 S-2×N180 S-2×N220 S-2×N300 S-2×N400 S-2×N600 S-2×N800
Magnetic Starters Non-Reversing MSO-N125 MSO-N150 MSO-N180 MSO-N220 MSO-N300 MSO-N400 – –
Open type
(With standard Reversing MSO-2×N125 MSO-2×N150 MSO-2×N180 MSO-2×N220 MSO-2×N300 MSO-2×N400 – –
Model name
2-element, With
Non-Reversing MS-N125 MS-N150 MS-N180 MS-N220 MS-N300 MS-N400 – –
Thermal Overload Enclosed
Relays) Reversing MS-2×N125 MS-2×N150 MS-2×N180 MS-2×N220 MS-2×N300 MS-2×N400 – –
Combined Thermal Overload Relays TH-N120(TA) TH-N120(TA) TH-N220RH TH-N220RH TH-N400RH TH-N400RH TH-N600(+CT) TH-N600(+CT)
Magnetic Starters Non-Reversing MSO-N125KP MSO-N150KP MSO-N180KP MSO-N220KP MSO-N300KP MSO-N400KP – –
(With Open type 3-element(2E), With
Thermal Overload Relays) Reversing MSO-2×N125KP MSO-2×N150KP MSO-2×N180KP MSO-2×N220KP MSO-2×N300KP MSO-2×N400KP – –
Combined Thermal Overload Relays TH-N120(TA)KP TH-N120(TA)KP TH-N220RHKP TH-N220RHKP TH-N400RHKP TH-K400RHKP TH-N600KP(+CT) TH-N600KP(+CT)
Rated insulation voltage [V] 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage [kV] 6
Rated frequency [Hz] 50/60
Pollution degree 3
220 to 240VAC 30/125 37/150 45/180 55/220 75/300 110/400 160/630 200/800
Rated operational current / power Category
AC-3 380 to 440VAC 60/120 75/150 90/180 110/220 150/300 200/400 300/630 400/800
Main contact rating
(Three-phase squirrel-cage motor load 500VAC 60/90 90/140 110/180 132/200 160/250 200/350 300/500 400/720
standard responsibility) (Note 1) [kW/A]
690VAC 70 100 120 150 220 300 420 630
Rated operational current / power Category 200 to 220VAC 22/93 30/125 37/150 45/180 55/220 75/300 110/400 160/630
AC-4
380 to 440VAC 45/90 55/110 75/150 90/180 110/220 150/300 200/400 300/630
(Three-phase squirrel-cage motor load
inching responsibility) [kW/A] 500 to 550VAC 45/65 55/80 75/140 90/140 110/200 150/250 200/350 300/500
Summary
Features/
Rated operational current / power Category 100 to 220VAC 150 200 260 260 350 450 660 800
AC-1 (Resistance, heater load) 380 to 440VAC 150 200 260 260 350 450 660 800
Conventional free air thermal current Ith [A] 150 200 260 260 350 450 660 800
List Produced
Standard accessory Non-Reversing 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b
Models
(Note 5) Reversing 2a2b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 4a4b×2 4a4b×2
(Note 6, Note 8)
Contact arrangement Non-Reversing 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b 4a4b
Max. number of
additional options Reversing
(Note 7) (Note 6, Note 8) 3a3b×2 – – – – – – –
100 to 120VAC 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Selections
Procedure
Sealed [VA] 24 24 40 40 50 50 90 90
Contactor
Inrush [VA] 270 270 440 440 440 440 790 790
Magnetic Contactors (without Thermal Overload Relays) Non-Reversing 100×150×137 120×160×145 138×204×175 138×204×175 163×243×195 163×243×195 290×310×235 290×310×235
Outside dimensions
(Width × Height × Depth) [mm] Reversing 276×150×148 296×160×156 370×215×189 370×215×189 395×250×209 395×250×209 660×435×254 660×435×254
Open type Magnetic Starters Non-Reversing 112×239×137 120×250×145 144×282×180.5 144×282×180.5 163×360×195 163×360×195 – –
(Width × Height × Depth) [mm] Reversing 276×251×148 296×276×156 370×304×194.5 370×304×194.5 395×392×209 395×392×209 – –
Overload
Relays
Auxiliary contact
(Contact structure 2a2b) – – – – – – UN-AX600
blocks
With contact for low level signals – – – – – – – –
(Varistor) (Note 2) – – – – – – – –
Model names of attachable options (Note 9)
(CR) – – – – – – – –
Relays
(Varistor + CR) – – – – – – – –
TRIAC output – – – – – – – –
DC/AC interface
Contact output – – – – – – – –
UN-CZ1250+ UN-CZ1500+
Non-Reversing UN-CZ2200+UN-CZ2201 UN-CZ3000+UN-CZ3001 – –
For Electromagnetic UN-CZ1251 UN-CZ1501
Option Unit
Starters
Charging part Reversing UN-CZ1254 UN-CZ1504 UN-CZ2204 UN-CZ3004 – –
protection cover
Non-Reversing UN-CZ1250×2 UN-CZ1500×2 UN-CZ2200×2 UN-CZ3000×2 – –
For Electromagnetic
Contactors Reversing UN-CZ1252 UN-CZ1502 UN-CZ2202 UN-CZ3002 – –
Contactors
Solid State
Notes 1: The figure inside the brackets ( ) for rated operating current is applicable to magnetic contactors (without thermal relays). The figure inside the brackets ( ) for motor capacity is applicable to enclosed magnetic
starters.
2: We can also manufacture coil surge absorption built-in models (-SA models) for alternating current operated types T10 to T50 and direct current operated types T12 to T50.
Motor Circuit
3: The T65 to N800 alternating current operating coils incorporate surge absorption function, so that a surge absorption unit for the coil is not required because coil switching surges do not occur.
Breakers
4: 1,000,000 times for T20 AC-3 Class 380V or higher, and 15,000 times for T35 to N800 AC-4 Class 380V or higher.
5: The auxiliary contact structures for mechanical latch and delayed release models are different. For details of mechanical latch models, refer to page 879.
6: +2b of T10 to T20 auxiliary contact arrangements in Reversing type represents b contact built in the UN-ML11 interlock unit.
7: The main unit and the auxiliary contact units need to be attached by customers as separate processes. The auxiliary contact unit for sealed models, and the head on auxiliary contact for mechanical latched
models, cannot be attached as additions.
For details of the auxiliary contact unit, refer to pages 890.
8: For auxiliary contact arrangement in Reversing type, ×2 is displayed as combined auxiliary contact arrangement of two Magnetic Contactors. Please specify the contact arrangement for which two main units are
combined must be designated. <Designation example> In case of 1b × 2 + 2b: 2B
9: In the case of using an option as an applied product, be aware that some options are unable to be attached. For details of combinations, refer to pages 890 to 891.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 873
MSO-T10
Non-reversing MS-T10 MS-T12 MS-T21 MS-T25 MS-T35 MS-T50 MS-T65 MS-T80 MS-T100
Model name
Reversing – –
MS-2XT21 MS-2XT25 MS-2XT35 MS-2XT50 MS-2XT65 MS-2XT80 MS-2XT100
Rated capacity (kW) 220 to 240VAC 2.5[2.2] 3.5[2.7]
5.5[4] 7.5[5.5] 11[7.5] 15[11] 18.5[15] 22[19] 30[22]
Category AC-3 380 to 440VAC 4[2.7] 5.5[4]
11[7.5] 15[11] 18.5[15] 22[22] 30[30] 45[37] 55[45]
(Note 1) 500VAC 4[2.7] 5.5[5.5]
11[7.5] 15[11] 18.5[15] 22[22] 37[30] 45[45] 55[45]
0.24 0.35
0.24 0.35
0.12 0.17 0.12 0.17 0.24 0.35 0.24 0.35 0.5 0.7
0.5 0.7
0.24 0.35 0.24 0.35 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.3
0.9 1.3 15 22
0.5 0.7 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.3 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.1 15 22
1.7 2.1 15 22 29 35
Heater rating (designation) of standard 0.9 1.3 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.1 1.7 2.1 2.5 3.6 29 35
2.5 3.6 29 35 42 54
Thermal Overload Relays (A) 1.7 2.1 1.7 2.1 2.5 3.6 2.5 3.6 5 6.6 42 54
5 6.6 42 54 67 82
2.5 3.6 2.5 3.6 5 6.6 5 6.6 9 11 67 82
9 11 95
5 6.6 5 6.6 9 11 9 11 15 22
15 22
Summary
Features/
9 9 11 15 22 15 22 29 35
29 35
42
Operation coil rating Refer to page 876
Non- Standard 1a 1a1b 2a2b
Auxiliary contact Reversing
List Produced
Special 1b 2a –
Models
arrangement Standard – 2a2bx2
Reversing
Special – –
A 165 176 231 282 317
Non-reversing
Procedure
Selections
Order
C 97.5 110 126 145 163
A – 192 247 282 347
Reversing
Specifications
Specifications
(unit: mm) C – 115 130 140 154
Note 1: The figure in the square brackets indicates the rated current shown on the rating plate of the product at which the category AC-3 opening/closing durability is 2,000,000 times (1,000,000 times
for the T20 380V). Refer to the electric durability curve for the life performance.
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Starter/
MSO-T series (non-Reversing) : Open type
MSO-2xT series (Reversing) : Open type
Non-Reversing MSO-T10 MSO(D)-T12 MSO(D)-T20 MSO(D)-T21 MSO-T25
Model name
Reversing MSO-2×T10 MSO(D)-2×T12 MSO(D)-2×T20 MSO(D)-2×T21 MSO-2×T25
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Rated capacity (kW) 220 to 240VAC 2.5[2.2] 3.5[2.7] 4.5[3.7] 5.5[4] 7.5[5.5]
Category AC-3 380 to 440VAC 4[2.7] 5.5[4] 7.5[7.5] 11[7.5] 15[11]
(Note 1) 500VAC 4[2.7] 5.5[5.5] 7.5[7.5] 11[7.5] 15[11]
0.12 0.17 0.24 0.12 0.17 0.24 0.12 0.17 0.24 0.24 0.35 0.5 0.24 0.35 0.5
Contactor
0.35 0.5 0.7 0.35 0.5 0.7 0.35 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.9 1.3 0.7 0.9 1.3
Relays
Heater rating (designation) of standard 0.9 1.3 1.7 0.9 1.3 1.7 0.9 1.3 1.7 1.7 2.1 2.5 1.7 2.1 2.5
Thermal Overload Relays (A) 2.1 2.5 3.6 2.1 2.5 3.6 2.1 2.5 3.6 3.6 5 6.6 3.6 5 6.6
5 6.6 9 5 6.6 9 5 6.6 9 9 11 15 9 11 15
11 11 15 22 22
Option Unit
B 90 97 97 136 136
Reversing Non-Reversing
2.1(1.7 to 2.5), 2.5(2 to 3), 3.6(2.8 to 4.4), 5(4 to 6), 6.6(5.2 to 8), 9(7 to 11), 11(9 to 13), 15(12 to 18), 22(18 to 26)*
0.24 (0.2 to 0.32), 0.35 (0.28 to 0.42), 0.5 (0.4 to 0.6), 0.7 (0.55 to 0.85), 0.9 (0.7 to 1.1), 1.3 (1 to 1.6), 1.7 (1.4 to 2), 2.1 (1.7 to 2.5),
TH-T25
T35 2.5 (2 to 3), 3.6 (2.8 to 4.4), 5 (4 to 6), 6.6 (5.2 to 8), 9 (7 to 11), 11 (9 to 13), 15 (12 to 18), 22 (18 to 26)
TH-T50 29 (24 to 34)
Option Unit
0.24 (0.2 to 0.32), 0.35 (0.28 to 0.42), 0.5 (0.4 to 0.6), 0.7 (0.55 to 0.85), 0.9 (0.7 to 1.1), 1.3 (1 to 1.6), 1.7 (1.4 to 2), 2.1 (1.7 to 2.5),
TH-T25
T50 2.5 (2 to 3), 3.6 (2.8 to 4.4), 5 (4 to 6), 6.6 (5.2 to 8), 9 (7 to 11), 11 (9 to 13), 15 (12 to 18), 22 (18 to 26)
TH-T50 29 (24 to 34), 35 (30 to 40), 42 (34 to 50)
T65 TH-T65 15 (12 to 18), 22 (18 to 26), 29 (24 to 34), 35 (30 to 40), 42 (34 to 50), 54 (43 to 65)
Contactors
Solid State
TH-T65 15 (12 to 18), 22 (18 to 26), 29 (24 to 34), 35 (30 to 40), 42 (34 to 50), 54 (43 to 65)
T80
TH-T100 67 (54 to 80)
TH-T65 15 (12 to 18), 22 (18 to 26), 29 (24 to 34), 35 (30 to 40), 42 (34 to 50), 54 (43 to 65)
T100
TH-T100 67 (54 to 80), 82 (65 to 100)
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Notes 1: Select the value closer to the heater designation if the stabilized current has two values.
2: Heater designation marked with * has Magnetic Starters frames that cannot be applied. For information on the applicable Magnetic Starters frames, refer to the "Heater rating (designation) of
standard Thermal Overload Relays" field in the above table.
3: The connection conductor kit UN-TH21 is required to use in combination with the Magnetic Contactor to make a Magnetic Starters.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 875
S-T10
Summary
Features/
A 75 75 75 81 81 81
Reversing Non-Reversing
B 36 43 43 63 63 43
C 78 78(100) 78(100) 81(108) 81 81(108)
A 85 85 85 81 81 81
List Produced
B 82 97 97 136 136 96
Models
(unit: mm)
C 78 78(100) 78(100) 81(114) 81 111(138)
IEC 35mm rail mounting type
Front clip-on auxiliary contact block mounting type
Procedure
Selections
Option Side clip-on auxiliary contact block mounting type
Order
Surge absorber mounting type
Notes 1: The figure in the square brackets indicates the rated current shown on the rating plate of the product at which the category AC-3 opening/closing durability is 2,000,000 times (1,000,000 times
for the T20 380V). Refer to the electric durability curve for the life performance.
Specifications
Specifications
2: The content within ( ) of rated capacity and rated operational current is applied to the Magnetic Contactor.
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Starter/
Rated operational current (A) 220 to 240VAC 40[35] 55[50] 65[65] 85[80] 105[100]
Category AC-3 380 to 440VAC 40[32] 50[50] 65[65] 85[80] 105[93]
(Note 1) 500VAC 32[26] 38[38] 60[45] 75[75] 85[75]
Conventional free air thermal current Ith (A) 60 80 100 120 150
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Operation coil rating Refer to pages 876
Non- Standard 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b
Auxiliary contact Reversing Special – – – – –
arrangement Standard 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2 2a2b×2
Reversing
Contactor
Relays
Special – – – – –
A 89 106 124(134)
Reversing Non-Reversing
B 75 88 100
C 91(123) 106(133) 127(157)
Option Unit
for the T20 380V). Refer to the electric durability curve for the life performance.
Breakers
876
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Magnetic Starter/Contactor
MSO-N150 MSO-N220
Non-Reversing MSO-N125 MSO-N150 MSO-N180 MSO-N220 MSO-N300 MSO-N400
Model name
Reversing MSO-2×N125 MSO-2×N150 MSO-2×N180 MSO-2×N220 MSO-2×N300 MSO-2×N400
220 to 240VAC 30 37 45 55 75 110
Rated capacity (kW)
380 to 440VAC 60 75 90 110 150 200
Category AC-3
500VAC 60 90 110 132 160 200
42 54 42 54 82 105 82 105 105 125 105 125
Heater rating (designation) of standard Thermal Overload Relays
67 82 67 82 125 150 125 150 150 180 150 180
(A)
105 105 125 180 250 250 330
B C
B 112 120 144 163
Non-Reversing
C 136 145 178 195
Product weight [kg] 3.5 4.6 8.0 12
List Produced
- - - - - -
Side clip-on auxiliary contact block mounting type
Option
Surge absorber mounting type General purpose coil models contain a surge absorber
Specifications
Notes 1: *MSO-2xN18 model has auxiliary contacts (head on unit) as a standard attachment.
2: "CX" of the model name refers to the CAN terminal attachments.
3: The** mark means that CAN terminal attachments cannot be manufactured for this model.
Relays
Model names and types of heaters for thermal relays that can be combined with magnetic starters
Magnetic Contactors
Thermal Overload Relays model Heater designation (adjustable range of stabilized current) (A)
frame
Contactor
Relays
N600, N800 TH-N600(KP) 250(200 to 300):400/5A, 330(260 to 400):500/5A, 500(400 to 600):750/5A, 660(520 to 800)*:1000/5A
Notes 1: Where the stabilized current value is between two heater designations, choose the heater designation to which the current value is closer.
2: Use the TH-N600 model thermal relay combined with the transformer (CW-15 model/15VA by Mitsubishi Electric) whose current transformation ratio is shown in the table.
3: The N600 and N800 models should be combined with the TH-N600. (An MSO model cannot be manufactured.)
4: "CX" of the model name refers to the CAN terminal attachments.
5: Heater designations with the *mark have magnetic starter frames to which they cannot be applied, so please refer to the heater rating (designation) column of the standard model thermal relay on the table above,
Contactors
Solid State
Coil Ratings
Operating coil rating (Alternating current operate) for S-N125 to N800
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Non- Standard 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b
Auxiliary contact Reversing Special – – – – – – – –
arrangement Standard 2a2b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 4a4b×2 4a4b×2
Reversing
Special – – – – – – – –
A 150 160 204 243 310
Summary
Features/
Product weight [kg] 2.7 3.3 5.5 9.5 24
A 150 160 215 250 435
A
List Produced
Product weight [kg] 6 7
Models
12.8 21 54
IEC 35mm rail mounting type – – – – – – – –
Front clip-on auxiliary contact block mounting type – – – – – – – –
Side clip-on auxiliary contact block mounting type – –
Option
Procedure
Selections
Surge absorber mounting type – – – – – – – –
Order
Reversing mechanical interlock attachment possible – –
Specifications
Specifications
Notes 1: *S-2xN18 model has auxiliary contacts (head on unit) as a standard attachment.
2: "CX" of the model name refers to the CAN terminal attachments.
3: The** mark means that CAN terminal attachments cannot be manufactured for this model.
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Starter/
Coil Ratings
Operating coil rating (Alternating current operate) for S-N125 to N800
Coil designation Ratings Coil designation Ratings Coil designation Ratings
Overload
Thermal
100 — 127V 50Hz 260 — 350V 50Hz 460 — 550V 50Hz
Relays
100VAC 300VAC 500VAC
100 — 127V 60Hz 260 — 350V 60Hz 460 — 550V 60Hz
200 — 240V 50Hz 380 — 440V 50Hz (24VAC) 24V 50/60Hz
200VAC 400VAC
200 — 240V 60Hz 380 — 440V 60Hz (48VAC) 48 — 50V 50/60Hz
Note 1: 24VAC cannot be manufactured for N180 to N800, 48VAC cannot be manufactured for N600 and N800.
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
878
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Magnetic Starter/Contactor
SD-N125 SD-N400
Non-Reversing SD-N125 SD-N150 SD-N220 SD-N300 SD-N400 SD-N600 SD-N800
Model name
Reversing SD-2×N125 SD-2×N150 SD-2×N220 SD-2×N300 SD-2×N400 SD-2×N600 SD-2×N800
Rated capacity (kW) 200 to 220VAC 125 150 220 300 400 630 800
Category AC-3 380 to 440VAC 120 150 220 300 400 630 800
Conventional free air thermal current lth [A] 150 200 260 350 450 660 800
Operating coil voltage (designation) 12VDC, 24VDC*, 48V, 100V, 110V, 125V (120 to 125V), 200V, 220V [Figures in brackets ( ) indicates rated values]
Auxiliary contact arrangement Non-Reversing 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b 2a2b
(Both standard and special) Reversing 2a2b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 3a3b×2 4a4b×2 4a4b×2
A 150 160 204 243 310
B 100 120 138 163 371
B C Non-Reversing
C 162 170 200 221 235
Product weight [kg] 4.3 4.8 7.5 13.5 29
Summary
Features/
9.2 10 17 29 64
Models
Notes 1: "CX" of the model name refers to the CAN terminal attachments.
2: Ratings with an * mark are for special products, rated at SD-N220 and above.
3: 12VDC cannot be manufactured for SD-N600 and N800.
Procedure
Selections
Order Specifications
Specifications
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 879
SL SL SL SL SL SL SL
Non-Reversing SL-T21(BC) -N125 -N150 -N220 -N300 -N400 -N600 -N800
SLD SLD SLD SLD SLD SLD SLD
Model name
SL SL SL SL SL SL SL
Reversing – -2×N125 -2×N150 -2×N220 -2×N300 -2×N400 -2×N600 -2×N800
SLD SLD SLD SLD SLD SLD SLD
Rated capacity (kW) 200 to 220VAC 20 125 150 220 300 400 630 800
Category AC-3 380 to 440VAC 20 120 150 220 300 400 630 800
Conventional free air thermal current lth [A] 32 150 200 260 350 450 660 800
Alternating current operate: 100V, 200V, 300V, 400V, 500V
Operating coil voltage (designation)
Direct current operate: 12VDC, 24VDC, 48VDC, 100V (100 to 110V), 125V (120 to 125V), 200V (200 to 220V) [Figures in brackets ( ) indicate rated values]
Auxiliary contact arrangement Non-Reversing 2a2b 1a2b 1a2b 1a2b 1a2b 1a2b 1a2b 1a2b
(Both standard and special) Reversing 2a2b 1a2b×2 2a3b×2 2a3b×2 2a3b×2 2a3b×2 3a4b×2 3a4b×2
81 194 203 227
Non-Reversing
A 262 392
Summary
Features/
B C B 63 100 120 138 163 290
C 136.5 137 145 175 195 235
Product weight [kg] 0.55 3.1 3.7 6 10 27
A 81 194 203 232.5 265.5 467
List Produced
A
Reversing
Models
B 136 276 296 370 395 660
C 136.5 148 156 189 209 254
Product weight [kg] 1.15 7 8 14 22 60
IEC 35mm rail mounting type – – – – – – –
Procedure
Selections
Notes 1: Operating coils are rated for 15 minutes
Order
2: "CX" of the model name refers to the CAN terminal attachments.
3: 12VDC cannot be manufactured for SD-N600 and N800.
Specifications
Specifications
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
880
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Magnetic Starter/Contactor/Thermal Overload Relays
DC Interface Contactors
SD-Q, MSOD-Q series (Non-Reversing)
SD-QR, MSOD-QR series (Reversing)
SD-Q11
Special 1b 2a – –
A
Magnetic Starters Magnetic Contactors
51 52 59 59
B 45 56 90 112
B C C 66.5 67.5 66.5 67.5
Procedure
Selections
C
Specifications
77 77 77 77
Product weight [kg] 0.3 0.31 0.52 0.56
IEC 35mm rail mounting type
Coil Ratings 24VDC
Contactor
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 881
Appearance
Summary
Features/
Rated insulation voltage [V] 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage [kV] 6
Pollution degree 3
List
List Produced
0.12 (0.1 to 0.16) 2.1 (1.7 to 2.5) 0.24 (0.2 to 0.32) 2.5 (2 to 3)
Models
Models
Produced
0.17 (0.14 to 0.22) 2.5 (2 to 3) 0.35 (0.28 to 0.42) 3.6 (2.8 to 4.4)
Main circuit specifications
Procedure
Selections
(Rated operational voltage : 550V maximum)
Order
0.7 (0.55 to 0.85) 9 (7 to 11) 1.3 (1 to 1.6) 11 (9 to 13)
0.9 (0.7 to 1.1) 11 (9 to 13) 1.7 (1.4 to 2) 15 (12 to 18)
1.3 (1 to 1.6) 15 (12 to 18) 2.1 (1.7 to 2.5) 22 (18 to 26)
1.7 (1.4 to 2)
Specifications
Power consumption [VA/element] at minimum/maximum stabilization 0.8 / 1.8 1.5 / 3.0
Terminal screw size M3.5 M4
Electric wire size [mm2] f1.6, 0.75 to 2.5 f1.6 to 2.6, 1.25 to 6
Compatible with terminal
Crimp lug size 1.25-3.5 to 2-3.5, 5.5-S3 1.25-4 to 5.5-4
Contactor
Magnetic
Contact arrangement 1a1b 1a1b
Starter/
Applied products Characteristics/Functions Operation circuit (contact) specifications
Overload
Overload
Thermal
Thermal
Operational The value in brackets indicates the rating for automatic reset. 550VAC 0.3(0.3) / 0.3(0.3) 0.3(0.3) / 0.3(0.3)
Relays
Relays
Current Category DC-13 24VDC 0.5(0.3) 1(0.3)
DC operated Magnetic Contactors
[A] Coil opening and closing
110VDC 0.2(0.2) 0.2(0.2)
The value in brackets indicates the rating for automatic reset. 220VDC 0.1(0.1) 0.1(0.1)
Minimum applicable load level 20V 5mA 20V 5mA
Contactor
Electric wire size [mm2] f1.6, 0.75 to 2.5 f1.6, 0.75 to 2.5
Compatible with terminal
Crimp lug size 1.25-3.5 to 2-3.5 1.25-3.5 to 2-3.5
Trip class 10A
Operating characteristic curve description page Page 886
Option Unit
2
Vibration resistance (vibration resistance malfunction performance) 10 to 55 Hz, 19.6 m/s
Trip-free
Reset method Manual/Automatic switchable Manual/Automatic switchable
Operation indication (lever indication)
Manual trip check
Contactors
Solid State
TH-T series
Frame T50 T65 T100
Appearance
[A]
42 (34 to 50)
(Rated operational voltage : 550V maximum)
54 (43 to 65)
Procedure
Selections
Order
Minimum applicable load level 20V 5mA 20V 5mA 20V 5mA
Terminal screw size M3.5 M4 M4
Electric wire size [mm2] f1.6, 1.25 to 2 f1.6, 1.25 to 2 f1.6, 1.25 to 2
Compatible with terminal
Crimp lug size 1.25-3.5 to 2-3.5 1.25-4 to 2-4, 5.5-S4 1.25-4 to 2-4, 5.5-S4
Contactor
With 3-element (2E) thermal quick-acting characteristics TH-FSKP (TH-T50FSKP) (TH-T65FSKP) (TH-T100FSKP)
Notes 1: The ambient temperature compensator is mounted on all types.
2: The mark indicates standard equipment, the indicates substandard items.
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 883
Appearance
Summary
Features/
Frequency [Hz] 50 to 60
42 (34 to 50) 105 (85 to 125) 82 (65 to 100)
54 (43 to 65) 125 (100 to 150) 105 (85 to 125)
67 (54 to 80) 125 (100 to 150)
82 (65 to 100) 150 (120 to 180)
List
List Produced
180 (140 to 220)
Models
Models
Produced
Main circuit specifications
Procedure
Selections
(The dotted lines ( ) on the table to the right show the compatibility
Order
with the frames of magnetic contactors)
(For heater designations of applied products, refer to the relevant
portion of the main document)
Specifications
Power consumption [VA/element] at minimum/maximum stabilization 3.0 / 7.1 3.8 / 8.6 1.0 / 2.3 (Note 5)
Terminal screw size M8 M8 M10
Electric wire size [mm2] – – –
Compatible with terminal
Crimp lug size 8-8 to 38-8 38-8 to 100-8 22-10 to 150-10
Contactor
Magnetic
Contact arrangement 1a1b 1a1b 1a1b
Starter/
Operation circuit (contact) specifications
Overload
Overload
Thermal
Thermal
The value in brackets indicates the rating for automatic reset. 550VAC 0.5 / 1 0.5 / 1 0.5 / 1
Relays
Relays
Category DC-13 24VDC 1 1 1
DC operated Magnetic Contactors
110VDC 0.2 0.2 0.2
Coil opening and closing
The value in brackets indicates the rating for automatic reset. 220VDC 0.1 0.1 0.1
Minimum applicable load level 20V 5mA 20V 5mA 20V 5mA
Contactor
M4 M4 M4
Relays
Trip-free
Reset method Manual/Automatic switchable Manual/Automatic switchable Manual/Automatic switchable
Operation indication (lever indication)
Manual trip check
N125, N150 N180, N220
Contactors
Solid State
Frame of magnetic contactor that can be combined with the product N125, N150
N150 N220
Applied product
2E format (TH-KPSR) – – –
Breakers
TH-N series
Frame N400 N600
Appearance
Frequency [Hz] 50 to 60
105 (85 to 125) 250 (200 to 300)
125 (100 to 150) (Current transformation ratio: 400/5A)
150 (120 to 180) 330 (260 to 400)
180 (140 to 220) (Current transformation ratio: 500/5A)
List Produced
Produced
(The dotted lines ( ) on the table to the right show the compatibility
Order
Power consumption [VA/element] at minimum/maximum stabilization 1.0 / 2.3 (Note 5) 1.0 / 2.3 (Note 5)
Terminal screw size M12 –
Electric wire size [mm2] – –
Compatible with terminal
Crimp lug size 22-12 to 200-12 –
Contactor
Magnetic
The value in brackets indicates the rating for automatic reset. 550VAC 0.5 / 1 0.5 / 1
Relays
Relays
M4 M4
Relays
Trip-free
Reset method Manual/Automatic switchable Manual/Automatic switchable
Operation indication (lever indication)
Manual trip check
N300, N400
Contactors
Solid State
Frame of magnetic contactor that can be combined with the product N600, N800
N400
Applied product
2E format (TH-KPSR) – –
Breakers
B 45 63 74.3 89 89
A
(Unit: mm)
C 76.5 80 88 83.5 83.5
Heater types
Heater types of TH type Thermal Overload Relays
For Magnetic Starters For single mounting
Model Heater designation (adjustable range of stabilized current) (A)
2-element 3-element (2E) 2-element 3-element (2E)
– – 0.12(0.1 to 0.16) 0.17(0.14 to 0.22) 0.24(0.2 to 0.32) 0.35(0.28 to 0.42) 0.5(0.4 to 0.6) 0.7(0.55 to 0.85) 0.9(0.7 to 1.1)
T18 T18KP
(Note 1) (Note 1) 1.3(1 to 1.6) 1.7(1.4 to 2) 2.1(1.7 to 2.5) 2.5(2 to 3) 3.6(2.8 to 4.4) 5(4 to 6) 6.6(5.2 to 8) 9(7 to 11) 11(9 to 13) 15(12 to 18)
Summary
Features/
0.24(0.2 to 0.32) 0.35(0.28 to 0.42) 0.5(0.4 to 0.6) 0.7(0.55 to 0.85) 0.9(0.7 to 1.1) 1.3(1 to 1.6) 1.7(1.4 to 2) 2.1(1.7 to 2.5)
Standard
T25 T25KP
T25 T25KP
(Note 1) (Note 1) 2.5(2 to 3) 3.6(2.8 to 4.4) 5(4 to 6) 6.6(5.2 to 8) 9(7 to 11) 11(9 to 13) 15(12 to 18) 22(18 to 26)
T50 T50KP – – 29(24 to 34) 35(30 to 40) 42(34 to 50)
T65 T65KP T65 T65KP 15(12 to 18) 22(18 to 26) 29(24 to 34) 35(30 to 40) 42(34 to 50) 54(43 to 65)
List Produced
T100 T100KP – – 67(54 to 80) 82(65 to 100)
Models
– –
– T18FSKP 2.1(1.7 to 2.5) 3.6(2.8 to 4.4) 5(4 to 6) 6.6(5.2 to 8) 9(7 to 11) 11(9 to 13) 15(12 to 18)
Quick trip type
(Note 1) (Note 1)
T25FS T25FSKP T25FS T25FSKP 2.1(1.7 to 2.5) 3.6(2.8 to 4.4) 5(4 to 6) 6.6(5.2 to 8) 9(7 to 11) 11(9 to 13) 15(12 to 18) 22(18 to 26)
T50FS T50FSKP – – 29(24 to 34) 35(30 to 40) 42(34 to 50)
T65FS T65FSKP T65FS T65FSKP 42(34 to 50) 54(43 to 65)
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
T100FS T100FSKP – – 67(54 to 80) 82(65 to 93)
Order
– – 0.24(0.2 to 0.32) 0.35(0.28 to 0.42) 0.5(0.4 to 0.6) 0.7(0.55 to 0.85) 0.9(0.7 to 1.1) 1.3(1 to 1.6) 1.7(1.4 to 2) 2.1(1.7 to 2.5)
T18SR –
(Note 1) 2.5(2 to 3) 3.6(2.8 to 4.4) 5(4 to 6) 6.6(5.2 to 8) 9(7 to 11) 11(9 to 13) 15(12 to 18)
Delay trip type
T25SR T25KPSR 0.24(0.2 to 0.32) 0.35(0.28 to 0.42) 0.5(0.4 to 0.6) 0.7(0.55 to 0.85) 0.9(0.7 to 1.1) 1.3(1 to 1.6) 1.7(1.4 to 2) 2.1(1.7 to 2.5)
T25SR T25KPSR
(Note 1) (Note 1) 2.5(2 to 3) 3.6(2.8 to 4.4) 5(4 to 6) 6.6(5.2 to 8) 9(7 to 11) 11(9 to 13) 15(12 to 18) 22(18 to 26)
Specifications
T50SR T50KPSR – – 29(24 to 34) 35(30 to 40) 42(34 to 50)
T65SR T65KPSR T65SR T65KPSR 15(12 to 18) 22(18 to 26) 29(24 to 34) 35(30 to 40) 42(34 to 50) 54(43 to 65)
T100SR T100KPSR – – 67(54 to 80) 82(65 to 100)
Note 1: Combining UT-HZ18 allows the T18 frame to be used singly (screw mounting or IEC 35 mm rail mounting).
Combining UN-RM20 allows the T25 frame for single mounting to have the IEC 35mm rail mounted.
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
TH-N series
Overload
Overload
Thermal
Thermal
Relays
Relays
TH-N120TA TH-N400HZKP Contactor
Model name TH-N120 TH-N120TA TH-N120TAHZ TH-N220RH TH-N220HZ TH-N400RH TH-N400HZ TH-N600
Relays
MSO-N125 MSO-N125 For single MSO-N180 For single MSO-N300 For single This should be used
-N150 -N150 mounting -N220 mounting -N400 mounting in combination with
a transformer for
Application
use with measuring
Single attachment instruments (15VA).
Option Unit
possible
250
(transformer 400/5A)
330
Standard heater rating (designation) 42, 54 82, 105, 125 105, 125, 150 (transformer 500/5A)
105, 125
67, 82 150, 180 180, 250, 330 500
(A) (transformer 750/5A)
Contactors
Solid State
660
(transformer 1000/5A)
Contact arrangement (rated) 1a1b (a contact 110VAC2A, 220VAC1A, b contact 110VAC 3A, 220VAC2A)
Product weight [kg] 0.46 0.57 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.7 2.7 0.14
Standard item with 2 elements TH-
Specifications
Heater types
Types of heaters in TH model thermal relays
For Magnetic Starters For single mounting
Heater designation (adjustable range of stabilized current) (A)
2-element (2E)3-element 2-element (2E)3-element
N120 N120KP N120 N120KP 42(34 to 50) 54(43 to 65) 67(54 to 80) 82(65 to 100)
N120TA N120TAKP N120TAHZ N120TAHZKP 105(85 to 125) 125(100 to 150)
N220RH N220RHKP N220HZ N220HZKP 82(65 to 100) 105(85 to 125) 125(100 to 150) 150(120 to 180) 180(140 to 220)
N400RH N400RHKP N400HZ N400HZKP 105(85 to 125) 125(100 to 150) 150(120 to 180) 180(140 to 220) 250(200 to 300) 330(260 to 400)
N600 N600KP – – 250(200 to 300) 330(260 to 400) 500(400 to 600) 660(520 to 800) * When combined with a transformer (see notes)
Notes 1: The TH-N600 (KP) model should be used in combination with a transformer for measuring instruments (Rated load of 15VA and current transformation ratio as follows; 250A: 400/5A, 330A: 500/5A, 500A: 750/5A,
660A: 1000/5A).
2: "CX" of the model name refers to the CAN terminal attachments.
(sec.)
1000
20 General overloading/locking/phase failure protection for the motor.
15
800
Overloading/locking/phase failure protection for motors with a
600 10
500
400
8 3-phase 4-wire system of power distribution.
6
List Produced
300 5
4
TH-SR model thermal relay with saturated reactor
Models
200
3 Overloading/locking protection for motors with a long startup time
2
100 or for motors that are frequently used for inching or intermittent
Operating time
80
60 1
ET-N model
overcurrent operation.
50 operation
Procedure
Selections
40
(600%)
TH-KF model thermal relay with quick response properties (also used with 2E)
Order
30 30 seconds
TH-SR model Protection for motors with a short allowable time for locking such
20 (saturated reactor
15 seconds
attached)
as underwater motors, etc.
Specifications
TH-FS model thermal relay with quick response properties and 2 elements
Specifications
10
8 TH model (standard)
TH-KP model (2E attached)
6
5
ET-N model open
7
seconds Locking protection for refrigerator compressor motors etc.
phase operation
4
3 3
TH-KP model open phase properties ET-N model electronic motor protection relay
seconds
2
Protection from overloading and locking of motors, as well as a
wide range of phase failure and phase reversals, etc.
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Relays
Relays
0.2
0.7 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
Category AC-15
(Coil load) 440VAC 1.5
current [A]
550VAC 1.2
120VAC 10
Category AC-12 240VAC 8
Contact rating (Note 1)
Summary
Features/
550VAC 5
24VDC 3
DC rated operational
List
List Produced
220VDC 0.3(0.8)
Models
Models
Produced
24VDC 10
Category DC-12 48VDC 8
(resistive loads) 110VDC 5(8)
Procedure
Selections
220VDC 1(3)
Order
Minimum applicable load level 20V 3mA
Optional unit Characteristic Performance
Specifications
Switching frequency [time/hour] 1,800
Inrush [VA] 45
Coil consumption (Note 3)
Sealed [VA] 7
Power consumption (Note 3) [W] 2.2
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Surge absorber unit
(Note 2)
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Notes 1: The value in brackets indicates the current when switching the load with two poles installed in series.
2: In the optional unit field, and indicate mountable and non-mountable, respectively.
3: Coil consumption are average values in case of applying 220V60Hz to AC200V coil.
Contactor
Contactor
Relays
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
888
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Contactor Relay
SR-K series
Frame K100
Appearance
SR-K100
Number of poles 10
10a, 9a1b
6a4b, 5a5b
550VAC 3
Summary
Features/
110VAC 16
Category AC-12 220VAC 12
Contact rating (Note 2)
24VDC 5
Models
Models
220VDC 0.2(0.8)
24VDC 10
Procedure
Selections
SR-LC
With overlapping contacts
SRD-LC
SR-CX
With terminal cover
SRD-CX
Overload
Thermal
Relays
3: In the case of mechanical latch (SRL-K100, SRLD-K100) models, one absorber can be attached to each of closing and tripping coils.
4: Surge absorption units and DC/AC interface units cannot be attached together as additions to the coil terminal of an contactor relay at the same time.
5: The mark in the option unit column indicates that this option can be manufactured; the indicates that it cannot be manufactured.
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 889
Appearance
(Typical example)
Summary
Features/
UT-AX4 UT-AX2 UT-AX11 UT-SA21 UT-ML11
List
Applied model
List Produced
Magnetic Starters
Models
Models
T10-T32 T10-T32 T10-T32 T10-T20
Produced
Magnetic Contactors
Procedure
Selections
available.
Order Specifications
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option
Option Unit
Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
890
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Optional Units
MS-T/N series
Model Auxiliary contact unit for
Auxiliary contact blocks
name low level signals
Type UT-AX2(BC) UT-AX4(BC) UT-AX11(BC) UN-AX2(CX) UN-AX4(CX) UN-AX11(CX) UN-AX80 UN-AX150 UN-AX600 UN-LL22(CX)
Mounting Front clip-on Side clip-on Front clip-on Side clip-on Front clip-on
A combination of 2 low
level signal contacts and
twin (standard) contacts,
Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact Twin contact for a total 4 pole auxiliary
built-in 2-pole built-in 4-pole built-in 2-pole built-in 2-pole built-in 4-pole built-in 2-pole built-in 2-pole built-in 2-pole built-in 4-pole contact structure
Specification/
auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
Function
contact contact contact contact contact contact contact contact contact For low level signals 1a1b
(2a, 1a1b, 2b) (4a, 2a2b, 3a1b) (1a1b) (2a, 1a1b, 2b) (4a, 2a2b, 3a1b) (1a1b) (1a1b) (1a1b) (2a2b) (5V 5mA)
Appearance
List Produced
Produced
Models
Models
(Typical example) UT-AX2 UT-AX4 UT-AX11 UN-AX2 UN-AX4 UN-AX11 UN-AX80 UN-AX150 UN-AX600 UN-LL22
List
Standard compliance
achieved UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA UL · CSA
Combination with UT-AX11(BC) Combination with Combination with UN-AX11(CX) Combination with Combination with UN-AX11(CX)
Others UT-AX2, 4(BC) is UN-AX2, 4, LL22(CX) –
is not available. not available. is not available. is not available. is not available.
Specifications
Model
DC/AC interface unit for operating coils Protective cover units
name
Mistaken
Magnetic
The magnetic contactor and contactor relay operating on alternating current terminal
Starter/
operation
Charging part protection cover prevention
can be controlled with 24VDC. cover cover
TRIAC Relay TRIAC Relay TRIAC Relay TRIAC Relay
UN-CV117
output output output output output output output output For magnetic For use with
contactors magnetic
contactors For magnetic
Overload
Specification/
Relays
side) pneumatic
Relays
Appearance
Contactors
Solid State
(Typical example) UT-SY21 UN-SY11 UN-SY21 UN-SY32 UN-CV250 UN-CZ605 UN-CZ500 UN-CZ501 UN-CV103 UT-CW110
Standard compliance
achieved
Motor Circuit
Others – –
Notes 1: There are limits on types, rated voltage and use in combination with other models.
2: There is also the UN-RY10 (applicable models: 2XN10 & N11), which integrates the 3 connecting conductors each on the power source and load sides.
3: There is also the UN-RY10L (applicable models: 2XN10 & N11), which integrates 3 connecting conductors.
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 891
UT-SA3 UT-SA21 UT-SA22 UT-SA25 UN-SA3 UN-SA21 UN-SA22 UN-SA25 UN-SA721 UN-SA712 UN-SA722 UN-SA713 UN-SA723 UN-SA725 UT-SA33 UN-SA33
UT-SA23 48VAC 200VAC 48VAC UN-SA13 200VAC 200VAC 48VAC 48VAC 100VAC (Shared with DC) 200VDC 200VAC 48VAC 240VAC
200VAC (Shared (Shared (Shared 200VDC (Shared (Shared (Shared (Shared with DC) 200VAC (Shared with DC) (Shared with DC) (AC100 to 240V)
with DC) with DC) with DC) UN-SA23 with DC) with DC) with DC) 100VAC 100VAC
UT-SA13 200VAC 200VAC 200VAC 400VAC 200VAC (Shared with DC) (Shared with DC)
200VDC (Shared (Shared (Shared 200VAC 200VAC
with DC) with DC) with DC) (Shared with DC) (Shared with DC
400VAC 400VAC
Summary
Features/
List
List Produced
Models
Models
Produced
UT-SA21 UT-SA22 UN-SA21 UN-SA22 UN-SA721 UN-SA712 UN-SA722 UN-SA713 UN-SA723 UN-SA725 UT-SA33 UN-SA33
13 18 17 13 18 17 20 25 25 25 20 25 78
Procedure
Selections
Order
– –
Specifications
LED Single attachment
Mechanical interlock unit Main circuit conductor kit connection detection Reset release
unit conductor kit unit display unit
Contactor
Magnetic
Combined Combined Combined
Starter/
with two with two with two
single units single units single units Detecting
of magnetic of magnetic of magnetic Conductor the Can be
contactors contactors contactors For use in thermal Can be
for conduction Thermal attached
to form a to form a to form a 3 pole resets outside the attached
reversing reversing reversing Connecting conductor connecting 2 pole connecting 3 pole connecting mode relay trip with TH-T25
Connecting conductor circuit board with TH-T18,
Overload
Thermal
parallel magnetic (contact display and TH-20,
Relays
model. model. model. for jumper connecting
for reversing model conductor conductor for short 200mm using screws
The model The model The reversing model connecting contactors welds) of 100VAC using screws
magnetic contactors for short circuits 400mm or with the
incorporates incorporates ML11(CX) magnetic contactors conductor and the main 200VAC or with the
an electric an electric incorporates circuits 550mm IEC35mm
thermal circuit 24VDC IEC35mm
interlock 2b interlock 2b an electric 700mm rails.
relays 100VAC rails.
contact contact interlock 2b
200VAC
Contactor
contact
Relays
Option
Option Unit
Unit
Contactors
Solid State
120 35 20
Breakers
– – – – – –
892
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Solid State Contactors
load US-K
US-K70
List Produced
Produced
Models
Models
1φ 400V
Heater 8 12 16 20 28 32
(Note 2)
capacity
Procedure
Selections
Order
US-N
US-NH
US-KH
US-N30 US-N50
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Relays
US-KH70
Relays
IEC 35mm rail mounting type Can be manufactured with standard products (Note 6)
Option Unit
Charging part protection cover unit Equipped with standard products (Except US-K70, KH70)
Driving unit UA-DR1
Driving unit with output UA-SH8 (Note 8) UA-SH1
Reversing unit UA-RE
Fault Detection Unit UN-FD (for 200V main circuit) & UN-FD4 (for 400V main circuit)
Contactors
State
Contactors
Solid State
Option
Breakers
(Note 5)
Direct Current
34.6 (Note 1) 41.5 52 (Note 1) 69 (Note 1)
US-KD8
IEC 35mm rail mounting type Can be manufactured with standard products
Driving unit
US-K100TE US-K120TE US-K150TE Option UA-SH8
with output
Summary
Features/
AC-1 rated operating current [A]
20 30 40 50
(-10 to 40°C)
US-K100 US-K150 US-K200 Heater 1φ 200V 4 6 8 10
capacity
List
List Produced
[kW] 3φ 200V 6.9 10.3 13.8 17.3
Models
Models
Produced
(-10 to 40°C)
(Note 8) 3φ 400V 13.8 20.7 27.7 34.6
100 120 150 200
40 48 60 80
Procedure
Selections
Order
69.3 (Note 1) 83 103.9 (Note 1) 138.5 (Note 1)
US-H
30 (Note 1) 30 37 (Note 1) 45 (Note 1)
Specifications
US-H20 US-H30 US-H40 US-H50
US-H20DD US-H30DD US-H40DD US-H50DD
IEC 35mm rail mounting type (Note 6)
Fault
UN-FD (for 200V main circuit) & UN-FD4 (for 400V main circuit)
Detection Unit
Contactor
Magnetic
Power
Starter/
Option UA-PC
control unit
US-KH100TE US-KH120TE US-KH150TE
Charging part
UN-CV501US
protection cover unit
Notes 1: When used with the US-K(H)h model, this shows the capacity when applied to a 3 phase load by combining two
or three units of the US-K(H)h model for single phase load together.
Overload
Thermal
2: Shows the capacity for each pole.
Relays
3: Motor load application capacity will vary depending on the conditions of use.
4: The photograph shows the US-NhTE model. The external dimensions of the US-Nh model are smaller.
5: The option unit column shows the extent of application.
6: Can be attached with the specialized product (US-hRM).
7: This shows the values when the main circuit control format is controlled collectively.
8: When the US-N5SS/N8SS (TE) model is attached to the UA-SH8 driving unit with output, remove the cover of the
US-Nh model main unit.
Contactor
UN-FD UA-PC
894
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Motor Circuit Breakers
Protects failure of the industrial Reduces the size of the control board and
motor by means of a single device distribution board
One Motor Circuit Breaker can The internal structure of the Motor Circuit
detect overload operation and Breaker has been optimized to reduce depth.
phase-loss operation of a motor When a connection conductor unit (UT-MT)
and also makes it possible to cut off is used, it will further reduce the size of
short-circuit current. This compact the control board and distribution board.
body Motor Circuit Breaker achieves Furthermore, it can be assembled with an
a rated short-circuit breaking auxiliary contact/alarm contact unit as well as
capacity of 100kA (200/240V). a short-circuit indicator unit (displays in red
when short-circuit occurs) in a 45mm-width
body.
Improves safety during product Example of wiring with connection conductor unit
maintenance
The Motor Circuit Breaker is
provided with a DIN and VDE
standards-compliant charging part
protection cover as standard. This
Summary
Features/
Connection
List Produced
conductor
Models
MMP-T32
Specifications
Specifications
Model Code
Contactor
Magnetic
MMP-T series
Starter/
Relays
Model name Model Frame Specification Code Specification Heater designation (A) Current setting range (A)
MMP AC operated type T32 32A BC With fast wiring terminal 0.16 0.1 – 0.16
0.25 0.16 – 0.25
Contactor
Relays
10 7 – 10
13 9 – 13
18 12 – 18
Motor Circuit
25 18 – 25
Circuit
Breakers
Breakers
32 24 – 32
Motor
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 895
Summary
Features/
0.63 0.4 – 0.63 100 100 100 100 100
1 0.63 – 1 100 100 100 100 100
1.6 1 – 1.6 100 100 100 100 100
2.5 1.6 – 2.5 100 100 100 100 8 6
List Produced
4 2.5 – 4 100 100 100 100 8 6
Models
6.3 4 – 6.3 100 100 100 100 6 5
8 5.5 – 8 100 100 50 38 42 32 6 5
10 7 – 10 100 100 50 38 42 32 6 5
100
Procedure
13 9 – 13 100 32
Selections
50 38 42 6 5
Order
18 12 – 18 100 50 38 35 27 10 8 4 3
25 18 – 25 100 50 38 35 27 10 8 4 3
32 24 – 32 100 50 38 35 27 10 8 4 3
Specifications
Specifications
JIS C8201-2-1 Ann.1
Selectivity category Cat.A
IEC60947-2
JIS C8201-4-1
Utilization category AC-3
IEC60947-4-1
Trip class (JIS C8201-4-1, IEC60947-4-1) 10
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Instantaneous release current 13 ✕ Maximum Ie
Mechanical [times] 100,000
Durability
Electrical [times] 100,000
Phase loss sensitive Yes
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Trip display Yes
Test trip function Yes
Auxiliary contact unit UT-MAX (1a or 1b) AC-12: 125V/5A, 250V/3A
Alarm contact unit UT-MAL (1a or 1b) DC-12: 125V/0.4A, 250V/0.2A
Contactor
Relays
UT-MAX 1b
Model Heater nominal Alarm contact unit UT-MAL 1a
UT-MAL 1b
MMP-T32 32A
MMP-T32BC Short-circuit indicator unit UT-TU
Motor
Motor Circuit
Breakers
Breakers
Circuit
896
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Motor Circuit Breakers
0.2 1.1
50 0.4 1 50 0.4 1 50 0.75 1.4 50 1.6 1 to 1.6
0.3 1.5
0.4 2 50 0.75 1.7 50 0.75 1.7 50 1.5 2.5 50 2.5 1.6 to 2.5
1.5 6 50 3.7 7.1 50 3.7 6.5 50 3.7 5.7 42 MMP-T32 (BC) 8 5.5 to 8
Notes 1: Model names of the units (such as connection conductor unit) used for combining Motor Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor are as follows.
Specifications
Relays
0.2 1.1
50 0.4 1 50 0.4 1 50 0.75 1.4 50 1.6 1 to 1.6
0.3 1.5
Option Unit
0.4 2 50 0.75 1.7 50 0.75 1.7 50 1.5 2.5 50 MMP-T32 (BC) 2.5 1.6 to 2.5
S(D)-(2X)T20(BC)
Model name
SD-Q(R)12 S(D)-(2X)T21(BC)
200/240V
Magnetic Contactors
(Non-Reversing /Reversing)
S-(2X)T25(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T32(BC)
S-(2X)T10(BC)
UT-MQ12
Model name
S(D)-(2X)T12(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T20(BC)
S-(2X)T25(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T32(BC)
S-(2X)T10(BC)
Model name
S(D)-(2X)T12(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T20(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T21(BC)
440/460V
Magnetic Contactors (Non-Reversing /Reversing)
S-(2X)T25(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T32(BC)
S-(2X)T10(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T12(BC)
P.664
Breakers
S(D)-(2X)T20(BC)
Low-Voltage Circuit
500V
S(D)-(2X)T21(BC)
S-(2X)T25(BC)
S(D)-(2X)T32(BC)
P.850
and Starters
units
name
Model
Note 1
Various
Magnetic Contactor
Usage Environment
(1) Ambient temperature : -10°C to 40°C
(Applied to the outside of the
control panel) Average daily atmospheric temperature: 35°C (Max.), Average yearly atmospheric temperature: 25°C (Max.)
(2) Maximum temperature of the
inside of the control panel : 55°C (Yearly average temperature of the inside of the control panel should be 40°C or less.)
Please note that the operating characteristic may vary with the ambient temperature.
(3) Ambient temperature : 45% to 85%RH However, dew condensation and freezing should be avoided.
(4) Height above sea level : 2000m or less
(5) Vibration : 10 to 55Hz, 19.6m/s2 or less
(6) Impact : 49m/s2 or less
(7) Atmosphere : Inclusion of dust, smoke, corrosive gas, moisture, salt content and the like in the atmosphere should
be avoided as much as possible.
Please note that continuing to use the device in a closed condition for a long period may cause contact failure.
Never use the device under an atmosphere that contains flammable gas.
(8) Storage temperature/Relative
humidity : -30°C to 65°C 45% to 85%RH However, dew condensation and freezing should be avoided.
The storage temperature is ambient temperature during transportation or storage and should be within
the usage temperature when starting to use the device.
(9) Precaution on use : Set the position of adjustment dial by taking ambient temperature and mounting conditions into consideration.
Summary
Features/
3
Models
110
90
Selections
Order
80
XSET : The dial position is set based on the information in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 on the right.
[When units are not mounted closely]
Example: When the units are mounted closely for 2.8A rated current of
motor ( ) and 40°C ambient temperature
SET = 2.8 / (90-5) × 100 3.3A ➝
[When units are mounted closely]
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
(10) Connection
Overload
Thermal
Relays
UT-MAX(LL),
Model name MMP-T32
UT-MAL(LL)
Terminal screw size M4 M3.5
Recommended insulation coating (L) peel-off length
Contactor
10mm 8.5mm
Relays
R1.25-4 to R5.5-4
Crimp lug size 0.5-3.7A to 2-S3A (Note 3)
8-4NS (Note 3)
Terminal screw tightening torque [N·m] 1.7 1.0
Notes 1: In each terminal, two wires or two crimp lugs are allowed to be connected.
2: As for handling, temperature adjustment, and closely-attached installation, please read the Instruction Manual.
Contactors
Solid State
(11) Application to single-phase motor : Select the appropriate heater designation by checking the value
of full-load currents of the motor. Since the Motor Circuit Breaker 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
is provided with protection functionality of open-phase, connect
Motor Circuit
motor.
Motor
MOTOR
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 899
10000
1000
Summary
Features/
Operating time(s)
List Produced
Models
Three-phase hot start
10
Procedure
Selections
Order
The momentary
Specifications
Specifications
release characteristic
1 is 1040% to 1560%
of the maximum set
current.
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
0.1
Overload
Thermal
Relays
0.01
100 1000 10000
Contactor
Relays
List of Options
Number Product name Model Specification Description Applied model
1a
UT-MAX
Auxiliary contact unit 1b
1 Contact of the unit operates in conjunction with ON/OFF operation of MMP-T32.
(to be internally installed) 1a
UT-MAXLL
(for subtle load) 1b
1a
UT-MAL
Alarm contact unit 1b The contact of this unit operates in sync with the tripping function (any one of
2
(to be internally installed) short-circuit, overload, or open-phase) of the main unit. (The contact does not
UT-MALLL 1a operate in sync with the ON/OFF state of the main unit.)
(for subtle load) 1b
This terminal block unit is used for connecting the strands of electric wires (single-core wires or
3 3 phase feed-in terminal UT-EP3
stranded wires) of the power supply side when the main unit is connected in parallel using a bus bar.
45mm
UT-2B4
Twin type
45mm
UT-3B4
Triple type This unit supplies power individually to two or three main units without using
4 Bus bar
Summary
Features/
5 Line side terminal adapter kit UT-CV3 Power supply-side terminal cover to respond to UL60947-4-1A, Type E/F.
This unit has a feature that the red lamp is lit only when the device is tripped due to short-circuit.
6 Short-circuit indicator unit UT-TU
This unit is required for application to UL60947-4-1A, Type E/F.
UT-MT20
Procedure
Selections
UT-MT20D
A unit to connect and link the MMP-T32 and Magnetic Contactor electrically and
Order
UT-MQ12
Specifications
Specifications
UT-BT20
A plate to install the combination starter with MMP-T32 and Magnetic
8 Mounting base unit UT-BT32
Contactor combined. Rail mounting and screw mounting are available.
UT-BT32D
UT-RT10
A set of the blocks for mechanically connecting two mounting base units.
Jointing block unit UT-RT20
Contactor
9
Magnetic
Starter/
This unit is required for combining MMP-T32 with a reversing magnetic contactor.
UT-RT32
3
Relays
5
Contactor
Relays
2 4
1
Option Unit
6
Contactors
Solid State
7
Motor Circuit
Circuit
Breakers
Breakers
Motor
8
Low-Voltage Circuit Magnetic Contactor
Magnetic Contactor and Starters Compatibility with
Japanese and Overseas Standards/Order Procedure
Breakers
P.664
and Starters
P.850 901
S-T10 to T32 – ✽ – – q
Non-reversing
S-T35 to T100 – ✽ – e e – q
Magnetic
Contactors
Reversing S-2×T10 to T100 – ✽ – – – – – – – q
Direct current – – – – –
operate SD-T12 to T100 ✽ e
Mechanical latch SL(D)-T21 to T100 – ✽ – q q – – – – – – – q
Non-reversing 2 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
elements MSO-T10 to T100 ✽
Non-reversing 3 – – – – – – – – – – –
elements(2E) MSO-T10KP to T100KP ✽
Open Model Reversing 2 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
elements MSO-2×T10 to T100 ✽
Magnetic
Reversing 3 – – – – – – – – – – –
Starters elements(2E) MSO-2×T10KP to T100KP ✽
Direct current – – – – – – – – – – – – –
operate 2 elements MSOD-T12 to T100 ✽
MS-T Series
Summary
Features/
elements
Magnetic
Non-reversing 3 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Starters elements(2E) MS-T10KP to T100KP
2 elements TH-T18 to T100 – ✽ – – – – – – ✽ ✽ – – – –
Thermal
Overload TH-T18KP/T25KP – ✽ – ✽ ✽ – –
Relays 3 elements(2E)
List Produced
TH-T50KP to T100KP – ✽ – ✽ ✽ e – –
Models
Alternating current SR-T5/T9 – –
operate ✽ ✽ ✽ q q
Contactor Direct current
Relays operate SRD-T5/T9 – ✽ – ✽ ✽ e – –
Mechanical latch SRL(D)-T5 – ✽ – – – – – – – – – – q
Additional – – – – –
auxiliary contacts UT-AX2, 4, 11 ✽ ✽ ✽
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Option Unit Surge Absorption UT-SA23, 21, 22 – ✽ – – – – ✽ ✽ ✽ – – – –
Order
Mechanical – – – – – – – –
interlocks UT-ML11/ML20 ✽ ✽ ✽ ✽
Specifications
Contactors Direct current
operate SD-N35 to N400 ✽ – – –
Mechanical latch SL-N35 to N400 ✽ q – – – – q – – – – q
Non-reversing 2 – – – – – /– – – – – – –
elements MSO-N35/N50 to N400 ✽
Non-reversing 3 – – – – –
elements(2E) MSO-N35 to 400KP ✽
Open Model Reversing 2 – – – – – /– – – – – – –
elements MSO-2×N35/2×N50 to N400 ✽
Contactor
Magnetic
Magnetic
Starter/
Reversing 3 – – – – – – –
Starters elements(2E) MSO-2×N35KP to N400KP ✽ q q q
Direct current – – – – – /– – – – –
MS-N Series
Overload
Thermal
Non-reversing 3 – – – – – – – – – – –
Relays
Starters elements(2E) MS-N35 to N400KP
Thermal Standard 2
elements TH-N20 to N20TA/N60 to N400 ✽ – – – – – /– ✽ ✽ – – – –
Overload
Relays 3 elements(2E) TH-N20KP to N400KP ✽ – ✽ ✽ – –
Direct current – –
Contactor operate SRD-N ✽ ✽ ✽
Contactor
Additional – – – –
auxiliary contacts UN-AX2, 4, 11/80, 150 ✽ / ✽ ✽
High – – – – – –
Option Unit
Non-reversing SD-Q ✽
Sensitivity
Contactors Reversing SD-QR11/QR12 ✽ – – – – – –
Standard number
Product Marking
Certification mark Note 2 Note 2 Note 3 Note 2 Note 2
( is marked on the product)
Certification number
Contactors
Solid State
Notes 1: s : standards compliant product sd : Certification acquired, add "CN" at the end of the model name when ordering.
: certification acquired as a standard product e: Model for which acquisition (application) of certification is expected – : Model for which the acquisition (application) of certification was not carried out
q: certification acquired as an exclusive product ✽: Model outside the application of standards certification
2: If there is any unclear point regarding standards certification labels or product model name indications, please contact your dealer or our company.
3: Self-certified labels of the manufacturer. These labels are not standards certifications.
4: In the case where a JIS compliance statement is required, please request us.
Motor Circuit
5: If the terminal cover (included in MS-T Series as standard) is removed, the product will not qualify for Safety Certification Standard (UL Certification, CSA Certification), standards certified by CB, CCC Certification,
Breakers
Shipping Certification Standards, and Heat Resistance Certification Standards (Heat resistance type 2).
902
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Compatibility with Japanese and Overseas Standards/Order Procedure
Order Procedure
For orders, specify products as shown below. Insert a space where is present.
If adding multiple two-character codes (such as SA, BC, and KP) after a frame size (T10 or others) of type name, specify them in alphabetical order
of the first letters. (Example: MSO-T10BCKPSA)
(If they are not in alphabetical order, the type code is automatically changed.)
Do not add AC to the main circuit Select coil designation from page
Specify the auxiliary contact
Models
Refer to page 864, 873 Select from page 869, 870. voltage. (To distinguish it from the 876 or specify the working
arrangements.from page 873.
operation circuit voltage) operation circuit voltage.
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Order
Model name Operation coil designation or operation circuit voltage Auxiliary contact
S-T20 200VAC 2A
S-T20 100VAC50Hz
Select coil designation from page 876 or specify the working Specify the auxiliary contact arrangements.
Refer to page 864, 875.
operation circuit voltage. from page 876.
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Relays
MSOD-T model
Model name Motor capacity or heater Main circuit voltage Operating Coil designation Auxiliary contact
designation (setting current)
Contactor
SD-T model
Option Unit
Summary
Features/
SL-2×T model, SLD-2×T model
When the left and right side closing and tripping coils have the same coil rating, specify the above SL-T model when placing an order.
If the left and right side coils have different coil rating, however, specify the product as indicated below.
Model name closing coil designation (left side) Tripping coil designation (left side) closing coil designation (right side) Tripping coil designation (right side)
List Produced
SL-2XT21 MC1-100VAC MT1-100VAC MC2-100VAC MT2-100VDC
Models
Please refer to page 879.
• When a closing coil uses direct current, Select the coil designation on page 868.
its model name becomes SLD.
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Order
5. Delay open type Magnetic Starters/Magnetic Contactors
MSO-TDL model, S-TDL model
Specifications
Model name Main circuit voltage Operating Coil
MSO-T21DL 15A 200V 200VAC
S-T12DL 200V 200VAC
Specify the Thermal Overload Relays heater
designation and the main circuit rated voltage. AC100V and AC200V are
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Specify from page 873, 875. Be sure to specify the rated voltage also for available for the operation coil
Magnetic Contactors, since this specification designation.
is a required condition for internal wiring.
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers
904
Low-Voltage Power Distribution Product Magnetic Contactor and Starters Compatibility with Japanese and Overseas Standards/Order Procedure
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Order
SR-Th model
Model name Operating Coil designation Contact structure
Specifications
Relays
SD-Qh model
Model name Operating coil designation or operating circuit voltage Auxiliary contact
SD-Q11 24VDC
SD-QR12 24VDC
Contactor
Relays
MSOD-Qh model
Motor capacity or heater designation Operating coil designation
Model name Main circuit voltage Auxiliary contact
(rectified current set value) or operating circuit voltage
MSOD-Q11 9A 200V 24VDC
Contactors
Solid State
US-K model (3 phase load use) US-H model (dedicated heater load use)
Model name Model name
US-K100TE US-H20
Refer to page 893. Refer to page 893.
Summary
Features/
List Produced
Models
Selections
Procedure
Procedure
Selections
Order Specifications
Contactor
Magnetic
Starter/
Overload
Thermal
Relays
Contactor
Relays
Option Unit
Contactors
Solid State
Motor Circuit
Breakers